Manual Do Produto

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Intelligent Optical Transport
Platform
V100R006C01
Product Description
Issue 03
Date 2012-03-29
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2012. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations
of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright © Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Intelligent Optical Transport Platform
Product Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Version
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 V100R006C01
iManager U2000 V100R005C00
iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R005C00
Intended Audience
This document describes the orientation, technical features, functions, software and hardware
structure, and technical specifications of the product in addition to the compliance standards.
This document is intended for:
l Network Planning Engineer

l Data Configuration Engineer
l System Maintenance Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Symbol Description
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

avoided, will result in death or serious injury.
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Symbol Description
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss,
CAUTION
performance degradation, or unexpected results.
TIP Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

important points of the main text.
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows.
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

are in boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains
all updates made in previous issues.
Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Based on Product Version

V100R006C01
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 V100R006C01. Compared with
the second official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
4.1 System System Architecture is modified.

Architecture
2.3.1 Service Types of Access Services is modified.

Types
Whole manual Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii


V100R006C01
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 V100R006C01. Compared
with the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
4.1 System System Architecture is modified.

Architecture
5.4 Protection Equipment Level Protection is modified.
5.7 OTN l ODUflex is modified.

Technologies l Mapping and Multiplexing is added.
Whole manual Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.

V100R006C01
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 V100R006C01.
Update Description
1 Overview Overview is added.
4.2.1 Cabinet Cabinet is modified.
5.7 OTN Added the descriptions of ODUflex and OTN Technologies.

Technologies
4.2.3.1 Function Added the descriptions of TN13OAU101, TN13OAU103,

Boards TN13OAU105, TN11LOA, TN53NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2,
TN55TQX, TN53TDX, TN12D40, TN12M40, TN12M40V,
TN55NPO2E, TN16SCC boards.
9 Technical Added the descriptions of TN13OAU101, TN13OAU103,

Specifications TN13OAU105, TN11LOA, TN53NS2, TN53ND2, TN53NQ2,
TN55TQX, TN53TDX, TN12D40, TN12M40, TN12M40V,
TN55NPO2E, TN16SCC boards.
Whole manual The structure of the contents is adjusted.

Some bugs in the manual of the previous version are fixed.
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv


V100R006C00
This issue is the third official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 V100R006C00. Compared with
the second official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
4.2.1 Cabinet Cabinet is modified.
Introduction Introduction to PID IPA is added.
Whole manual The structure of the contents is adjusted.


V100R006C00
This issue is the second official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 V100R006C00. Compared
with the first official release, the manual of this issue provides the following updates.
Update Description
4.2.3.1 Function Added the descriptions of THA and TOA boards.

Boards
4.2.3.3 Tributary Added the descriptions of TN53TQX, TN54THA and TN54TOA

Board boards.
9 Technical Added the descriptions of TN12OBU1P1, TN53TQX, TN54THA

Specifications and TN54TOA boards.
B Power Added the descriptions of TN12OBU1P1, TN54TOA, TN54THA

Consumption, and TN53TQX boards.
Weight, and Valid
Slots of Boards
Whole manual Deleted the descriptions of TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12PTQX,

TN12ELQX boards.

V100R006C00
This issue is the first official release for OptiX OSN 8800 T16 V100R006C00.
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Product Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Overview.........................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Product Appearance............................................................................................................................................2
2 Introduction....................................................................................................................................3
2.1 Positioning..........................................................................................................................................................4
2.2 Product Features.................................................................................................................................................5
2.3 Service Access....................................................................................................................................................7
2.3.1 Service Types............................................................................................................................................7
2.3.2 Capability of Service Access.....................................................................................................................8
3 Networking and Applications..................................................................................................10

3.1 Basic Networking Modes.................................................................................................................................11
3.2 Typical OTN Networking.................................................................................................................................11
3.2.1 WSS Grooming Solution.........................................................................................................................12
3.2.2 Application of Electrical-Layer Grooming..............................................................................................13
3.2.3 Optical-Electrical Convergence Solution................................................................................................14
3.2.4 WDM ASON Solution.............................................................................................................................15
3.2.5 PID Solution............................................................................................................................................16
4 Product Architecture...................................................................................................................19
4.1 System Architecture.........................................................................................................................................20
4.2 Hardware Architecture......................................................................................................................................21
4.2.1 Cabinet.....................................................................................................................................................21
4.2.1.1 N63B Cabinet Structure..................................................................................................................21
4.2.1.2 Configuration of the Integrated N63B Cabinet..............................................................................22
4.2.1.3 N66B Cabinet Structure..................................................................................................................24
4.2.1.4 Configuration of the Integrated N66B Cabinet..............................................................................25
4.2.1.5 Cabinet Installation Mode..............................................................................................................26
4.2.1.6 TN16PDU.......................................................................................................................................27
4.2.1.7 UPM................................................................................................................................................28
4.2.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack................................................................................................................36
4.2.2.1 Structure..........................................................................................................................................36
4.2.2.2 Slot Description..............................................................................................................................38
4.2.2.3 Fan..................................................................................................................................................39
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

4.2.2.4 Power Consumption.......................................................................................................................43

4.2.2.5 Power Requirement........................................................................................................................44
4.2.3 Board.......................................................................................................................................................47
4.2.3.1 Function Boards..............................................................................................................................47
4.2.3.2 Optical Transponder Board............................................................................................................48
4.2.3.3 Tributary Board..............................................................................................................................52
4.2.3.4 Line Board......................................................................................................................................55
4.2.3.5 PID Board.......................................................................................................................................58
4.2.3.6 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit...........................................................59
4.2.3.7 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board...............................................................................60
4.2.3.8 Fixed Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Board..................................................................................62
4.2.3.9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing unit....................................................................63
4.2.3.10 Optical Amplifier Board...............................................................................................................63
4.2.3.11 Optical Supervisory Channel Board.............................................................................................65
4.2.3.12 Optical Protection Board..............................................................................................................66
4.2.3.13 Interface Board.............................................................................................................................66
4.2.3.14 Spectrum Analyzer Board............................................................................................................67
4.2.3.15 Variable Optical Attenuator Board...............................................................................................68
4.2.3.16 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Board.........................................................................68
4.2.4 Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) Module..........................................................................................68
4.3 Software Architecture.......................................................................................................................................69
4.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................................................................69
4.3.2 Communication Protocols and Interfaces................................................................................................69
5 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................71

5.1 Electrical Layer Grooming...............................................................................................................................73
5.1.1 OTN Centralized Grooming....................................................................................................................73
5.2 Optical Layer Grooming...................................................................................................................................74
5.2.1 Grooming Ability....................................................................................................................................75
5.2.2 Basic Concept..........................................................................................................................................75
5.2.3 1-Degree ROADM..................................................................................................................................77
5.2.4 2-Degree ROADM..................................................................................................................................78
5.2.5 3-Degree ROADM..................................................................................................................................79
5.2.6 4-Degree ROADM..................................................................................................................................82
5.2.7 9-Degree ROADM..................................................................................................................................85
5.3 Transmission System........................................................................................................................................87
5.3.1 Integrated System and Open System Compatibility................................................................................87
5.3.2 40 Gbit/s..................................................................................................................................................88
5.3.3 3.1.5 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s Hybrid Transmission...................................................................88
5.3.4 Transmission Distance.............................................................................................................................89
5.4 Protection..........................................................................................................................................................90
5.4.1 Equipment Level Protection....................................................................................................................90
5.4.1.1 1+1 Protection for Cross-Connect, SCC, and Clock Boards..........................................................90
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

5.4.1.2 SCC Board 1+1 Protection.............................................................................................................91

5.4.1.3 DC Input Protection........................................................................................................................92
5.4.1.4 Redundancy Protection for Fans.....................................................................................................92
5.4.1.5 Inter-Subrack Communication Protection......................................................................................92
5.4.2 Network Level Protection........................................................................................................................92
5.4.2.1 WDM Protection.............................................................................................................................92
5.4.2.2 Data Protection...............................................................................................................................93
5.5 Data Characteristics..........................................................................................................................................94
5.5.1 Service.....................................................................................................................................................94
5.5.2 QoS..........................................................................................................................................................98
5.5.3 OAM........................................................................................................................................................98
5.5.3.1 ETH-OAM......................................................................................................................................98
5.5.3.2 RMON............................................................................................................................................99
5.5.3.3 Test Frame......................................................................................................................................99
5.6 Optical Power Management ..........................................................................................................................100
5.6.1 Introduction to IPA................................................................................................................................100
5.6.2 Introduction to IPA of the Raman System.............................................................................................100
5.6.3 Introduction to ALC..............................................................................................................................100
5.6.4 Introduction to APE...............................................................................................................................101
5.6.5 Introduction to EAPE............................................................................................................................102
5.6.6 Introduction to OPA..............................................................................................................................103
5.6.7 Introduction to AGC..............................................................................................................................103
5.7 OTN Technologies.........................................................................................................................................104
5.7.1 Frame Format........................................................................................................................................105
5.7.2 OTN Packet Encapsulation....................................................................................................................108
5.7.3 ODUflex................................................................................................................................................111
5.7.4 Mapping and Multiplexing....................................................................................................................114
5.7.5 TCM.......................................................................................................................................................116
5.7.6 FEC Function.........................................................................................................................................117
5.8 WDM Technologies.......................................................................................................................................118
5.8.1 DWDM and CWDM Technical Specifications.....................................................................................118
5.8.2 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM System .................................................120
5.8.3 Nominal Central Wavelengths of the CWDM System .........................................................................122
5.8.4 Chromatic Dispersion Compensation....................................................................................................122
5.8.5 SBS Suppresses.....................................................................................................................................122
5.8.6 Supervisory Channel..............................................................................................................................122
5.8.7 DRZ Coding Scheme.............................................................................................................................123
5.8.8 ODB Technology...................................................................................................................................124
5.8.9 DQPSK Technology..............................................................................................................................124
5.8.10 Tunable Wavelengths..........................................................................................................................124
5.8.11 EDFA Technology...............................................................................................................................125
5.8.12 Raman Amplification..........................................................................................................................125
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

5.8.13 Jitter Suppression Function.................................................................................................................125

5.8.14 Automatic Laser Shutdown.................................................................................................................125
5.9 Clock Synchronization Solutions...................................................................................................................127
5.9.1 Clock Network Models..........................................................................................................................127
5.9.2 Methods and Typical Applications of Frequency Synchronization......................................................129
5.9.3 Methods and Typical Applications of Phase Synchronization..............................................................132
5.10 ASON Management.....................................................................................................................................134
5.11 Transmission of Network Management Information...................................................................................135
5.11.1 DCN Composition...............................................................................................................................135
5.11.1.1 Optical Supervisory Channel Administration.............................................................................137
5.11.1.2 Electrical Supervisory Channel Administration.........................................................................138
5.11.2 Huawei DCN Solution.........................................................................................................................139
5.11.2.1 DCN Solution Classification by NMS Access Mode.................................................................140
5.11.2.2 DCN Solution Classification by Protocol...................................................................................141
5.11.2.3 DCN Solution Classification by Physical Resource...................................................................145
5.11.3 Huawei DCN Management Capability................................................................................................146
5.12 Network Management Tools and Protocols.................................................................................................148
5.12.1 U2000..................................................................................................................................................148
5.12.2 Web LCT.............................................................................................................................................148
5.12.3 Simple Network Management Protocol..............................................................................................148
5.12.4 NTP Protocol.......................................................................................................................................148
5.13 License Control.............................................................................................................................................151
5.13.1 Service Capacity License.....................................................................................................................151
5.14 Features of Upgrade and Maintenance.........................................................................................................151
5.14.1 Software Package Loading..................................................................................................................152
5.14.2 PRBS Error Detection Function..........................................................................................................152
5.14.3 Hot Patch.............................................................................................................................................153
6 NE Type and Signal Flow........................................................................................................155

6.1 OTM in a DWDM System..............................................................................................................................156
6.1.1 OTM Node with Optical Multiplexer Board and Optical Demultiplexer Board (40-Wavelength)......156
6.1.2 OTM Node with Optical Multiplexer Board, Optical Demultiplexer Board, and Interleaver Board (80-
Wavelength)....................................................................................................................................................157
6.2 OLA in a DWDM System..............................................................................................................................159
6.3 FOADM in a DWDM System........................................................................................................................160
6.3.1 FOADM Node with Optical Multiplexer Unit and Optical Demultiplexer Unit...................................160
6.3.2 FOADM Node with OADM Units........................................................................................................162
6.4 ROADM in a DWDM System........................................................................................................................163
6.4.1 ROADM Node with WSD9 Board and WSM9 Board (40-Wavelength).............................................163
6.4.2 ROADM Node with WSD9 Board and WSM9 Board (80-Wavelength).............................................165
6.4.3 ROADM Node with WSD9 Board and RMU9 Board (40-Wavelength)..............................................167
6.4.4 ROADM Node with WSD9 Board and RMU9 Board (80-Wavelength)..............................................169
6.4.5 ROADM Node with RDU9 Board and WSM9 Board (40-Wavelength)..............................................172
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

6.4.6 ROADM Node with RDU9 Board and WSM9 Board (80-Wavelength)..............................................173
6.4.7 ROADM Node with WSMD4 Boards...................................................................................................176
6.4.8 ROADM Node with WSMD9 Boards...................................................................................................177
6.5 REG in a DWDM System..............................................................................................................................179
6.6 OTM in a CWDM System..............................................................................................................................182
6.7 FOADM in a CWDM System........................................................................................................................183
7 About the ASON........................................................................................................................185

7.1 Overview........................................................................................................................................................186
7.1.1 Background and Advantages.................................................................................................................186
7.1.2 Features of the ASON............................................................................................................................187
7.1.3 Huawei OTN ASON Solution...............................................................................................................187
7.1.4 Introduction and Development of the OTN ASON...............................................................................189
7.2 ASON Software and ASON Functions..........................................................................................................190
7.2.1 Basic Concepts of ASON......................................................................................................................190
7.2.2 Structure of the ASON Transmission Network.....................................................................................192
7.2.3 Location of ASON Software.................................................................................................................193
7.2.4 Structure of ASON Software.................................................................................................................194
7.2.5 ASON Protocol......................................................................................................................................195
7.2.6 OTN ASON Links.................................................................................................................................197
7.2.7 Function Structure of the OTN ASON..................................................................................................202
7.2.8 ASON Network Protection and Restoration..........................................................................................204
7.3 Automatic Discovery of Topologies and Resources......................................................................................205
7.3.1 Auto-Discovery of ASON NEs.............................................................................................................205
7.3.2 Auto-Discovery of Control Links..........................................................................................................206
7.3.3 Auto-Discovery of TE Links.................................................................................................................208
7.4 Creation and Deletion of the ASON Trail......................................................................................................208
7.4.1 Creation of an LSP................................................................................................................................208
7.4.2 Deletion of an LSP................................................................................................................................210
7.4.3 Rerouting of an LSP..............................................................................................................................211
7.4.4 Change of an LSP..................................................................................................................................212
7.5 OTN ASON Feature.......................................................................................................................................212
7.5.1 End-to-End Service Configuration........................................................................................................212
7.5.2 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration.......................................................................................213
7.5.3 SLA Classification of Services..............................................................................................................214
7.5.4 Diamond WDM ASON Trail................................................................................................................216
7.5.5 Silver WDM ASON Trail......................................................................................................................219
7.5.6 Copper WDM ASON Trail....................................................................................................................221
7.5.7 OVPN....................................................................................................................................................222
7.5.8 Crankback Mechanism .........................................................................................................................224
7.5.9 Network Traffic Engineering.................................................................................................................225
7.5.10 Service Association.............................................................................................................................227
7.5.11 Service Optimization...........................................................................................................................228
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

7.5.12 Service Migration................................................................................................................................229

7.5.13 Preset Restoration Trail.......................................................................................................................229
7.5.14 Trail Pre-Computation and Adjustment..............................................................................................231
7.5.15 Service Reversion Mechanism............................................................................................................231
7.5.16 Resource Sharing of Trails..................................................................................................................233
7.5.17 ASON Features Based on the Split of Optical and Electrical NEs......................................................235
7.5.18 ASON Services Traversing Third-Party Equipment...........................................................................239
7.6 Optical-Layer and Electrical-Layer ASON Services......................................................................................240
7.6.1 Protection and Restoration Mechanisms for Services...........................................................................240
7.6.2 Quick Finding of Optical-Layer and Electrical-Layer Functions..........................................................241
7.6.3 Prerequisites for Enabling ASON Features...........................................................................................244
7.6.4 Conditions for Configuring ASON Services.........................................................................................244
8 Operation, Administration, and Maintenance.....................................................................247

8.1 Automatic Deployment Commissioning........................................................................................................249
8.2 End-to-End Service Configuration.................................................................................................................249
8.3 Supervision and Administration Module........................................................................................................249
8.4 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces.................................................................................................250
8.5 Orderwire Function.........................................................................................................................................253
8.6 Security Management.....................................................................................................................................253
8.7 Master-Slave Subrack Management...............................................................................................................254
8.7.1 Master-Slave Subrack Management......................................................................................................254
8.7.2 Subrack Cascading Scheme...................................................................................................................255
8.8 Administration and Maintenance....................................................................................................................257
8.8.1 Alarm and Performance Event Management.........................................................................................257
8.8.2 Performance Monitoring of Access Services........................................................................................258
8.8.3 Performance Monitoring of Network....................................................................................................259
9 Technical Specifications...........................................................................................................261
9.1 General Specifications....................................................................................................................................262
9.1.1 Cabinet Specifications...........................................................................................................................262
9.1.2 Subrack Specifications..........................................................................................................................262
9.1.3 DCM Frame Specifications...................................................................................................................264
9.1.4 CRPC Frame Specification....................................................................................................................265
9.1.5 Fan-Tray Assembly Specifications........................................................................................................265
9.2 Laser Class......................................................................................................................................................265
9.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications.......................................................................................................266
9.3.1 LDX Specifications...............................................................................................................................266
9.3.2 LEM24 Specifications...........................................................................................................................272
9.3.3 LEX4 Specifications..............................................................................................................................278
9.3.4 LOA Specifications...............................................................................................................................284
9.3.5 LOG Specifications...............................................................................................................................297
9.3.6 LOM Specifications...............................................................................................................................306
9.3.7 LSQ Specifications................................................................................................................................317
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

9.3.8 LSX Specifications................................................................................................................................320

9.3.9 LWXS Specifications............................................................................................................................330
9.3.10 TMX Specifications.............................................................................................................................337
9.3.11 Jitter Transfer Characteristics..............................................................................................................349
9.3.12 Input Jitter Tolerance...........................................................................................................................350
9.3.13 Output Jitter.........................................................................................................................................351
9.4 Tributary Unit and Line Unit Specifications..................................................................................................351
9.4.1 ND2 Specifications................................................................................................................................352
9.4.2 NQ2 Specifications................................................................................................................................359
9.4.3 NS2 Specifications................................................................................................................................364
9.4.4 NS3 Specifications................................................................................................................................371
9.4.5 TDX Specifications...............................................................................................................................375
9.4.6 TOA Specifications...............................................................................................................................378
9.4.7 TOG Specifications...............................................................................................................................385
9.4.8 TOM Specifications...............................................................................................................................388
9.4.9 THA Specifications...............................................................................................................................399
9.4.10 TQX Specifications.............................................................................................................................401
9.4.11 TSXL Specifications............................................................................................................................404
9.5 PID Unit Specifications..................................................................................................................................406
9.5.1 ENQ2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................406
9.5.2 NPO2 Specifications..............................................................................................................................406
9.5.3 NPO2E Specifications...........................................................................................................................409
9.6 Cross-connect Unit Specifications..................................................................................................................411
9.6.1 TN16XCH Specifications......................................................................................................................411
9.7 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit Specifications..................................................................412
9.7.1 D40 Specifications.................................................................................................................................412
9.7.2 FIU Specifications.................................................................................................................................413
9.7.3 ITL Specifications.................................................................................................................................414
9.7.4 M40 Specifications................................................................................................................................416
9.7.5 M40V Specifications.............................................................................................................................417
9.7.6 SFIU Specifications...............................................................................................................................419
9.8 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit Specifications.......................................................................420
9.8.1 CMR2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................420
9.8.2 CMR4 Specifications.............................................................................................................................421
9.8.3 MR2 Specifications...............................................................................................................................423
9.8.4 MR4 Specifications...............................................................................................................................424
9.8.5 MR8V Specifications............................................................................................................................428
9.9 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Specifications.....................................................431
9.9.1 RDU9 Specifications.............................................................................................................................431
9.9.2 RMU9 Specifications............................................................................................................................431
9.9.3 WSD9 Specifications.............................................................................................................................432
9.9.4 WSM9 Specifications............................................................................................................................434
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

9.9.5 WSMD4 Specifications.........................................................................................................................435

9.9.6 WSMD9 Specifications.........................................................................................................................437
9.10 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications..........................................................................................................438
9.10.1 CRPC Specifications...........................................................................................................................438
9.10.2 DAS1 Specifications............................................................................................................................439
9.10.3 HBA Specifications.............................................................................................................................442
9.10.4 OAU1 Specifications...........................................................................................................................443
9.10.5 OBU1 Specifications...........................................................................................................................450
9.10.6 OBU2 Specifications...........................................................................................................................453
9.11 System Control, Supervision and Communication Board Specifications....................................................454
9.11.1 SCC Specifications..............................................................................................................................454
9.11.2 AUX Specifications.............................................................................................................................455
9.12 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications........................................................................................456
9.12.1 HSC1 Specifications............................................................................................................................456
9.12.2 SC1 Specifications...............................................................................................................................457
9.12.3 ST2 Specifications...............................................................................................................................458
9.12.4 SC2 Specifications...............................................................................................................................459
9.13 Optical Protection Unit Specifications.........................................................................................................460
9.13.1 DCP Specifications..............................................................................................................................460
9.13.2 OLP Specifications..............................................................................................................................462
9.13.3 SCS Specifications..............................................................................................................................464
9.14 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications.......................................................................................................465
9.14.1 MCA4 Specifications..........................................................................................................................465
9.14.2 MCA8 Specifications..........................................................................................................................466
9.14.3 OPM8 Specifications...........................................................................................................................466
9.14.4 WMU Specifications...........................................................................................................................467
9.15 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications..........................................................................................468
9.15.1 VA1 Specifications..............................................................................................................................468
9.15.2 VA4 Specifications..............................................................................................................................469
9.16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board Specifications.......................................................470
9.16.1 GFU Board Specifications...................................................................................................................470
9.16.2 DCU Specifications.............................................................................................................................471
9.16.3 TDC Specifications..............................................................................................................................472
9.17 DCM Specifications ....................................................................................................................................473
10 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development..................................................................477

10.1 Sustainable Development.............................................................................................................................478
10.2 Energy Conservation and Emission Reduction............................................................................................478
A Equipment Specifications and Environment Requirements...........................................480

A.1 Performance Specifications for Optical Interfaces........................................................................................481
A.2 Power Supply Requirements..........................................................................................................................481
A.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility......................................................................................................................481
A.4 Environment Requirement.............................................................................................................................481
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

A.4.1 Storage Environment............................................................................................................................482

A.4.2 Transport Environment.........................................................................................................................484
A.4.3 Operation Environment........................................................................................................................486
B Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards ................................................489

C Standards Compliance.............................................................................................................501
C.1 ITU-T Standards............................................................................................................................................502
C.2 IEEE Standards..............................................................................................................................................506
C.3 Laser Security Standards................................................................................................................................506
C.4 Security Standards.........................................................................................................................................507
C.5 EMC Standards..............................................................................................................................................507
C.6 Environment Related Standards.....................................................................................................................508
C.7 Grounding Standards.....................................................................................................................................510
C.8 Noise Standard...............................................................................................................................................510
C.9 Fireproofing Standards...................................................................................................................................510
C.10 International Standards................................................................................................................................510
D Glossary......................................................................................................................................512
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

Product Description 1 Overview
1 Overview
About This Chapter
This chapter describes types and appearance of OTN products.
1.1 Product Appearance

This chapter describes the appearance of OTN equipment.
Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Product Description 1 Overview
1.1 Product Appearance

This chapter describes the appearance of OTN equipment.
Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.
Figure 1-1 The appearance of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Product Description 2 Introduction
2 Introduction
About This Chapter
2.1 Positioning
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is mainly applicable to the metropolitan convergence layers.
2.2 Product Features
As a one-box product (OTN+OCS), the equipment integrates functions such as WDM
transport, ROADM, 40G, cross-connections of any granularity in the range of 100M to 40G,
ASON, and rich management and protection.
2.3 Service Access
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) service, synchronous
optical network (SONET), Ethernet service, storage area network (SAN) service, optical
transmission network (OTN) service, video service and others.

2.1 Positioning
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is mainly applicable to the metropolitan convergence layers.
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 can be used with the metropolitan DWDM equipment, SDH
equipment, and data communication equipment at the backbone layer to provide a large-capacity
transport channel for services and network egresses. The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 applies to the
long-distance and large-capacity transmission of nation-level trunk and inter-province trunk to
maximally meet the requirements of large-capacity and ultra-long haul transmission for carriers.
In addition, the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides carriers with a stable platform for multi-service
operation and future network capacity expansion.
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 use dense wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) technologies
to achieve transparent transmission with multiple services and large capacity. It not only provides
service grooming at the optical layer on a wavelength basis by using the ROADM technology,
but also provides sub-wavelength grooming based on ODUflex/ODU3/ODU2/ODU1/ODU0.
This improves the flexibility in service grooming and bandwidth utilization to a great extent.
The OptiX OSN 8800 can interconnect with the OptiX OSN 6800/OptiX OSN 3800/OptiX OSN
1800 to form an end-to-end OTN network. Also, they can interconnect with the OptiX BWS
1600G to form a WDM network. Typically, the OptiX OSN 8800 is applied to the OTN network.
Figure 2-1 shows the position of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 in the overall network hierarchy.
Figure 2-1 Position of the OptiX OSN 8800 in the network hierarchy
OptiX OSN OptiX
8800 T32 BWS 1600G
OptiX OSN
8800 T32
OptiX OSN 80-wavelengths
80-wavelengths
8800 T64
OptiX OSN
8800 T64
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN Backbones
8800 T64 8800 T64 core layers
OptiX OSN
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 6800 OptiX Metro OptiX OSN
3500 8800 T32
6100 7500
STM-16 40-wavelengths STM-64

OptiX OSN
3500 OptiX Metro OptiX OSN Convergence
6100 OptiX OSN 8800 T32 OptiX OSN layers
8800 T16 7500
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN OptiX OSN OptiXOSN

3500 3800 3800 1800
STM-16 STM-4 STM-4/1 STM-4/1
OptiX OSN STM-4/1

OptiX OSN
3500 OptiX OSN OptiX OSN 3800
3500 3800 OptiX OSN Access
7500 layers

NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides OptiX OSN 8800 T64 subracks, OptiX OSN 8800 T32 subracks and OptiX
OSN 8800 T16 subracks.
2.2 Product Features

As a one-box product (OTN+OCS), the equipment integrates functions such as WDM
transport, ROADM, 40G, cross-connections of any granularity in the range of 100M to 40G,
ASON, and rich management and protection.
Transmission Equipment with High Integration and Ultra Capacity

The equipment is of high integration, which enables flexible service configuration. A network
built with the equipment is easy to design, to expand, and to maintain, and requires a smaller
number of spare parts.
The equipment supports access of massive services and centralized cross-connections and
management of the services. This avoids assembly of multiple subracks. The equipment is of
high integration. For example, one PID chip is integrated with tens of photoelectric components
to achieve 12 x 10G transmission.
When used as an 80/40-channel system, the OptiX OSN 8800 supports:
l Service access over one channel of 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s.

l Transmission of 10 Gbit/s services over a distance of 5000 km, 40 Gbit/s services over a
distance of 2000 km without electrical regeneration.
l Ultra long-haul transmission of 10 Gbit/s services over a 1 x 82 dB single span.
The OptiX OSN 8800 CWDM systems support service access over eight wavelengths. Each
wavelength supports a maximum rate of 2.5 Gbit/s.
The ASIC and PID technologies enable design of a board with high density and help reduce
power consumption of each port. Ultra cross-connections help reduce bridging at many ODF
and also save space in telecommunications rooms.
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports centralized cross-connections through a cross-connect
board. The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides one type of cross-connection boards, that is, XCH.
It supports hybrid cross-connections of ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, ODU3, and ODUflex signals,
and supports a 640 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity to the maximum.
Dynamic Optical-Layer Cross-Connections

Dynamic intra-ring grooming and inter-ring grooming can be realized using the ROADM board.
Dynamic optical layer grooming can be classified into intra-ring grooming and inter-ring
grooming, or into two-dimensional grooming and multi-dimensional grooming.
Dimension refers to transmission direction. Two-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength

grooming in two transmission directions. Multi-dimensional grooming refers to wavelength
grooming in multiple transmission directions.

Flexible Electrical-Layer Cross-Connections

The equipment supports non-blocking electrical cross-connections, centralized cross-
connections of massive services, and complex networking.
Full Service Access over Shared 10G and 40G Channels

The ODUk sub-wavelengths can be flexibly combined to share 10G/40G line bandwidth for
transmission. This enables uniform carrying of any services over one wavelength and therefore
improves wavelength utilization to a great extent.
Bandwidth is tailored for services. This improves the efficiency of transmission bandwidth and
achieves "zero waste" of bandwidth.
Hybrid O/E Cross-Connections and Quick Service Deployment

Hybrid O/E cross-connections achieve flexible cross-connections of wavelength or sub-
wavelength services. Quick service deployment helps reduce CapEx. On a flattened network,
services are easy to plan, deploy, and expand. Much less time needs to be taken to provision a
service.
High Reliability
The tributary/line separated structure maximizes the return on investment and reduces the
number of spare parts. When service type changes, users only need to replace the tributary boards
but fully reuse the existing line boards. The use of independent line and tributary boards reduces
the number and type of spare parts from N x M to N + M (N, M > 2), thereby helping operators
reduce construction costs.
Rich OAM, Easy Maintenance, and Lower OpEx

The rich O/E overhead information on OTN equipment leads to a more transparent network,
facilitates fault identification, and helps reduce maintenance costs.
The PRBS function enables quick self-check of OTUs, quick assessment of channel
performance, and quick fault identification.
The "5A" auto-adjustment function:

l Automatic level control (ALC) function effectively resolves the problem of attenuation of
fibers operating over a long term.
l Automatic gain control (AGC) enables adaptation to transient changes in the number of
wavelengths.
l Automatic power equilibrium (APE) enables auto-optimization of OSNR specification of
each channel.
l Intelligent power adjustment (IPA) avoids personal injuries (to eyes or bodies) resulting
from laser radiation in case of anomalies such as a fiber cut.
l The optical power adjust (OPA) is made to ensure that the input power of the OTU board
and OA board meet the commissioning requirements.
Support monitor channel power, central wavelength, OSNR, and overall optical spectrum, and
also supports remote real-time measurement of optical spectrum parameters.

2.3 Service Access

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) service, synchronous
optical network (SONET), Ethernet service, storage area network (SAN) service, optical
transmission network (OTN) service, video service and others.
2.3.1 Service Types

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) services, synchronous
optical network (SONET) services, Ethernet services, storage area network (SAN) services,
optical transmission network (OTN) services, and video services.
Table 2-1 lists the service types and rates that the OptiX OSN 8800 supports.
Table 2-1 Service types and rates that the OptiX OSN 8800 supports
Service Service Type Service Rate Reference Standard

Category
SDH STM-1 155.52 Mbit/s ITU-T G.707
STM-4 622.08 Mbit/s ITU-T G.691

ITU-T G.957
STM-16 2.5 Gbit/s
ITU-T G.693
STM-64 9.95 Gbit/s ITU-T G.783
STM-256 39.81 Gbit/s ITU-T G.825
SONET OC-3 155.52 Mbit/s GR-253-CORE

GR-1377-CORE
OC-12 622.08 Mbit/s
ANSI T1.105
OC-48 2.5 Gbit/s
OC-192 9.95 Gbit/s
OC-768 39.81 Gbit/s
Ethernet FE 125 Mbit/s IEEE 802.3u

service
GE 1.25 Gbit/s IEEE 802.3z
10GE WAN 9.95 Gbit/s IEEE 802.3ae
10GE LAN 10.31 Gbit/s
SAN service ESCON 200 Mbit/s ANSI X3.296

ANSI X3.230
FICON 1.06 Gbit/s
ANSI X3.303
FICON Express 2.12 Gbit/s
FC100 1.06 Gbit/s
FC200 2.12 Gbit/s

Service Service Type Service Rate Reference Standard

Category
FC400 4.25 Gbit/s
FC800 8.5 Gbit/s
FC1200 10.51 Gbit/s
FICON4G 4.25 Gbit/s
FICON8G 8.5 Gbit/s
ISC 1G 1.06 Gbit/s IBM GDPS

( Geographically
ISC 2G 2.12 Gbit/s Dispersed Parallel
ETR 16 Mbit/s Sysplex) Protocol
CLO 16 Mbit/s
InfiniBand 2.5G 2.5 Gbit/s InfiniBand TM

Architecture Release
InfiniBand 5G 5 Gbit/s 1.2.1
FDDI 125 Mbit/s ISO 9314
OTN service OTU1 2.67 Gbit/s ITU-T G.709

ITU-T G.959.1
OTU2 10.71 Gbit/s
OTU2e 11.10 Gbit/s
OTU3 43.02 Gbit/s
Video service HD-SDI 1.485 Gbit/s SMPTE 292M
DVB-ASI 270 Mbit/s EN 50083-9
SDI 270 Mbit/s SMPTE 259M
3G-SDI 2.97 Gbit/s SMPTE 424M
2.3.2 Capability of Service Access

Table 2-2 lists the capability of service access when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions as the
equipment in the OTN system.
Table 2-2 Capability of service access

Service Type Maximum of Service Maximum of Service
Amount for a Board Amount for an 8800 T16
Subrack
FE 22 224

Service Type Maximum of Service Maximum of Service

Amount for a Board Amount for an 8800 T16
Subrack
GE 22 160
10GE LAN 4 32
10GE WAN 4 32
STM-256/OC-768 1 8
STM-64/OC-192 4 32
STM-16/OC-48 16 128
STM-4/OC-12 16 192
STM-1/OC-3 16 224
OTU1 16 128
OTU2/OTU2e 4 32
OTU3 1 8
ESCON 16 224
FC100/FICON 16 160
FC200/FICON Express/ 16 160

InfiniBand 2.5G
FC400/FICON4G/InfiniBand 2 32
5G
FC800/FICON 8G 4 48
FC1200 1 16
ISC 1G 8 128
ISC 2G 4 64
ETR/CLO 8 64
HD-SDI 8 128
FDDI 8 128
DVB-ASI/SDI 16 224
3G-SDI 8 128

Product Description 3 Networking and Applications
3 Networking and Applications
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the point-to-point networking, chain networking, ring
networking, and mesh networking. It can be networked with other WDM equipment to realize
a complete transport solution.
3.1 Basic Networking Modes
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports point-to-point networking, chain networking, ring networking,
and mesh networking. It can be networked with other WDM and SDH or SONET equipment to
realize a complete transport solution.
3.2 Typical OTN Networking
The OptiX OSN 8800 can be jointly used not only with the OptiX OSN 6800 or OptiX OSN
3800 to form a complete OTN end-to-end network, but also with the OptiX BWS 1600G or
OptiX Metro 6100 to form a WDM network. The OTN or WDM network is then used to transmit
the services from the NG SDH/PTN or data communication equipment. In this manner, the OptiX
OSN 8800 T16 implements a complete transport solution.

3.1 Basic Networking Modes

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports point-to-point networking, chain networking, ring networking,
and mesh networking. It can be networked with other WDM and SDH or SONET equipment to
realize a complete transport solution.
Different networking modes are applied to different application scenarios. You need to select
the required networking mode according to the service requirements.
Point-to-Point Network
A point-to-point network is the basic application. It is used for end-to-end service transmission.
The other networking modes are based on point-to-point networking mode, which is the basic
network. A point-to-point network is generally used to transmit common voice services, private
line data services, and storage services.
Chain Network
The chain network with OADM(s) is suitable for a scenario where wavelengths need to be added/
dropped and passed through. A chain network has similar service types as a point-to-point
network, but the chain network is more flexible than the point-to-point network. It can be
applicable not only to the point-to-point service but also applicable to the convergence service
and broadcast service dedicated for simple networking.
Ring Network
Network security and reliability are key factors that indicate the quality of the services provided
by network operators. Because of the high survivability, ring network is a dominant networking
mode in MAN DWDM network planning. The ring network has the widest application range.
It can be applicable to the point-to-point service, convergence service, and broadcast service. It
can diversify into complex network structures such as tangent rings, intersecting rings, and ring
with chain.
Mesh Network
A large number of nodes are connected by straight routes on a mesh network. Mesh networks
have no node bottleneck and ensure unblocked services through alternative routes during
equipment failure. In a mesh network, more than one route is available between two nodes. Thus,
the mesh network has high service transmission reliability, and the mesh topology is a
mainstream networking mode for ASON networks. The mesh networking features flexibility
and scalability. It is widely used in ASON networks.
3.2 Typical OTN Networking

The OptiX OSN 8800 can be jointly used not only with the OptiX OSN 6800 or OptiX OSN
3800 to form a complete OTN end-to-end network, but also with the OptiX BWS 1600G or
OptiX Metro 6100 to form a WDM network. The OTN or WDM network is then used to transmit
the services from the NG SDH/PTN or data communication equipment. In this manner, the OptiX
OSN 8800 T16 implements a complete transport solution.

Typical OTN Networking

When working with the OptiX OSN 6800, the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 can form an OTN network
or a DWDM ring to transport or add/drop services on the WDM line. Figure 3-1 shows the
typical OTN networking.
Figure 3-1 Typical OTN networking

OptiX OSN
8800 T16
OptiX OSN
6800 OptiX OSN
DWDM Ring 8800 T32
OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

Interconnection
8800 T64 3500
at client side
OptiX OSN
3500
OptiX OSN SDH Ring
OptiX OSN DWDM Ring 6800
OptiX OSN
6800 OptiX OSN 3500
6800
OptiX OSN
3500
:OADM :ADM
3.2.1 WSS Grooming Solution

ROADM in wavelength selective switch (WSS) mode is applicable to intra-ring grooming and
inter-ring grooming.
At a network node, ROADM in WSS mode can freely change the add/drop status or pass-through
status of a wavelength, and does not interrupt a service in the change process. ROADM can work
with tunable lasers to flexibly groom wavelengths.
WSS enables output of any wavelength through any port. A port in WSS mode can be used as
either a port for local wavelength adding or dropping or a multi-directional MS port. WSS can
work with WSS or a coupler to build ROADM, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2 Functional diagram of a WSS-based ROADM node

4/8 4/8
… …
… …
WSD9 OAU
OAU WSM9
OAU WSM9 WSD9 OAU
… …
… …
4/8 4/8
WSS realizes colorless wavelength add/drop. Users can set the add/drop or pass-through state
of wavelengths on the NMS. In addition, the dynamic wavelength status can be adjusted remotely
and the services can be fast provisioned.
WSS supports the wavelength grooming in multiple directions and the multi-dimensional
ROADM structure. With WSS, the wavelength resources of multi-directional node on a ring
with chain or intersecting rings network are reconfigurable, as shown in Figure 3-3.
Figure 3-3 Inter-ring grooming ROADM solution

C
D B East South
A
WSS
WSS
WSS
WSS
West East
South North
E
WSS
WSS
WSS
WSS
G
West North
3.2.2 Application of Electrical-Layer Grooming

The OptiX OSN 8800 grooms services by means centralized cross-connections.

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports ODUflex, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and ODU3 cross-connections.
GE, 2.5G, and 10G services can share bandwidth to improve bandwidth utilization. As shown
in Figure 3-4, a GE service and a 2.5G service share a wavelength.
Figure 3-4 Application of electrical-layer grooming
3.2.3 Optical-Electrical Convergence Solution

At the service access end, the equipment cross-connects multi-rate services to 40G channels for
transmission. At a service pass-through station, the equipment fast transmits services by means
of ROADM optical cross-connections. At the service receive end, the equipment drops 40G
services from the line by processing electrical-layer cross-connections. If a wavelength conflict
occurs during optical-layer cross-connections, the equipment can convert wavelengths by means
of electrical-layer cross-connections. In addition, when the transmission distance exceeds the
limit, electrical regeneration can be used. As shown in Figure 3-5, the wavelengths of two
services conflict. In this case, wavelengths can be converted by means of electrical-layer cross-
connections. When the performance of the line deteriorates and results in bit errors, electrical
regeneration can be used to transmit services.

Wavelength conflict
Optical
Bit errors
Layer
Grooming
Electrical
Layer
Grooming
STM-1/GE/2.5G/10G&40G
3.2.4 WDM ASON Solution

The equipment supports the ASON control plane. With the ASON control plane and WDM
features such as ROADM, FOADM, and optical wavelength/sub-wavelength protection, the
equipment provides an ideal WDM ASON solution.
At the core layer of a network, a mesh network is built with WSS/ROADM for wavelength
rerouting. At network edges, ring and chain networks are built with traditional FOADM, OTM,
or PLC ROADM, as the service volume is low and fiber resources are insufficient. For details,
see Figure 3-6.
An ASON network provides the same protection solutions as a traditional network does. In
addition, GMPLS and WSS together provide wavelength rerouting for services under no
protection or 1+1 protection on a mesh network. This helps improve survivability of services.

Figure 3-6 WDM ASON solution
PLC ROADM
C
D
OTM
OLA
FOADM
WSS ROADM
A B
Non-protection 1+1 Protection
Services Services
3.2.5 PID Solution

This section describes typical PID application.
PID helps to effectively eliminate bandwidth and O&M bottlenecks on a WAN, leveraging the
features such as large capacity, high integration, versatile multi-service access, small size, and
environment-friendly design. On a WAN, a 40G/80G/120G/200G aggregation ring based on
PID boards only is recommended, eliminating commissioning while enabling quick service
provision.
Typical network 1: WAN for a small or medium-sized city

At the OTN aggregation layer, two to six aggregation rings can be deployed with two to four
NEs in each ring. A PID board(s) is used on each NE's line side. Build a 40G/80G/120G/
200G network using PID groups as required. On each aggregation ring, services are electrically
regenerated by the PID and cross-connect boards at each site. NEs at the OTN backbone layer
are interconnected with NEs on aggregation rings through PID boards. Figure 3-7 shows the
details.

Figure 3-7 WAN for a medium or large-sized city
40/80x10G
Backbone layer
Aggregation layer
200G ring
... ...
40G/80G ring 120G ring
: Router : High-end router : NG WDM equipment
: BRAS : PID-installed NG WDM equipment at the aggregation layer
Typical network 2: WAN for a medium or large-sized city

At the OTN aggregation layer, 13 to 20 aggregation rings can be deployed with two to four NEs
in each ring. A PID board(s) is used on each NE's line side. Build a 40G/80G/120G/200G network
using PID groups as required. On each aggregation ring, services are electrically regenerated by
the PID and cross-connect boards at each site. NEs at the OTN backbone layer are interconnected
with NEs on aggregation rings through PID boards. Figure 3-8 shows the details.

Figure 3-8 WAN for a medium or large-sized city
80x40G Mesh
Backbone
layer
Aggregation
layer
200G ring
40G ring
... ...
80G ring 120G ring
: Router : High-end router : NG WDM equipment
: BRAS : PID-installed NG WDM equipment at the aggregation layer

Product Description 4 Product Architecture
4 Product Architecture
About This Chapter
4.1 System Architecture

The OptiX OSN 8800 system uses the L0 + L1 + L2 architecture. Ethernet switching is
implemented on Layer 2, ODUk/VC switching on Layer 1, and wavelength switching on Layer
0.
4.2 Hardware Architecture
4.3 Software Architecture
The system software includes the board software, NE software and the network management
system.

4.1 System Architecture

The OptiX OSN 8800 system uses the L0 + L1 + L2 architecture. Ethernet switching is
implemented on Layer 2, ODUk/VC switching on Layer 1, and wavelength switching on Layer
0.
Figure 4-1 and #tc_wdm_ng_pd_0004/fig_tc_wdm_ng_pd_0004_02 show the system

architecture of the OptiX OSN 8800 used as an OTN and an OCS system, respectively.
Figure 4-1 System architecture of the OptiX OSN 8800 (OTN)

To line fiber
L0 Optical-layer board
WDM-side optical module Client-side optical module
Cross- Cross-
connect connect
Signal processing module board board
(active) (standy) Signal processing module
L1 ODUk ODUk L1
Line board Tributary board
WDM-side optical module Clock board (active)
Clock board (standby)

Signal processing module
L2 L2 switching module Power (active)

-48 V/-60 V DC
Power (standby)
Client-side optical module
Fans
NMS OTU board
External alarm
Auxiliary
interface External clock/
System control and communication board external time
DCN board (active)
System control and communication
board (standby)
Backplane
Control and communication bus & Clock bus Electrical signal
Electrical cross-connect bus(ODUk) Optical-layer service
Functions of modules are as follows:

l Optical-layer boards are classified into optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards,
optical add/drop multiplexing (OADM) boards, optical amplifier (OA) boards, optical
supervisory channel (OSC) boards, optical spectrum analysis boards, optical variable
attenuator boards, and optical power and dispersion equalization boards. These boards are
intended to process optical-layer services, for example, to cross-connect wavelengths at
the optical layer.
l Electrical-layer boards such as OTU, tributary, and line boards are used to process
electrical-layer signals, and perform conversion between optical and electrical signals. The
OptiX OSN 8800 uses a tributary-line-separate architecture, and a centralized cross-
connect unit to flexibly groom electrical-layer signals at different granularities.
l For OptiX OSN 8800, EoO, EoW, Ethernet over SDH (EoS) boards have the L2 processing
capabilities, and they can add, strip, and exchange VLAN tags, learn MAC addresses, and
forward packets.
l As the control center of the entire system, the system control and communication (SCC)
board cooperates with the network management system (NMS) to manage boards in the
system and to implement inter-subrack communication.
l The clock board provides system clock signals and frame header signals to each service
board, and synchronizes the local system time with the upstream system time, achieving
clock and time synchronization.
l The power supply and fan systems with a redundancy protection design ensure highly-
reliable equipment operation.
l The auxiliary interface board provides functional ports such as clock/time input/output
ports, management serial port, alarm output and cascading ports, and alarm input/output
ports.
l Inter-board communication and service cross-connections, clock synchronization, and
power supplies are implemented using the backplane buses. Backplane buses include
control and communication buses, clock buses, and power buses.
4.2 Hardware Architecture
4.2.1 Cabinet
In typical configuration, the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 is installed in N63B cabinet.
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 has subracks as the basic working units. The subrack of the OptiX
OSN 8800 T16 has independent power supply and can be installed in N63B cabinet, or N66B
cabinet.
4.2.1.1 N63B Cabinet Structure

The N63B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 300 mm depth, complying with the ETS
300-119 standard.
The following subracks can be installed on the N63B cabinet: OptiX OSN , OptiX OSN 8800
T16 and OptiX OSN 6800.
The N63B cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), open-close type front door, rear panel fixed
by screws, and side panels at the left and right sides.
Cabinet doors and side panels can be disassembled. The front door and side panels have
grounding points. Keys to the front door of all N63B cabinets are the same.

Figure 4-2 shows the appearance of the N63B cabinet.
Figure 4-2 N63B cabinet appearance
4.2.1.2 Configuration of the Integrated N63B Cabinet

Typical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack
type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model.
Table 4-1 lists the typical configurations of the N63B cabinet.
NOTE
There are two types of ETSI 300 mm rear-column cabinets: T63B and N63B. These two types of cabinets
differ in color and door. You can perform an expansion installation on the T63B cabinet based on the typical
configurations of the N63B cabinet.

Table 4-1 Typical configurations of the N63B cabinet

Typ Number of PDU Model Circuit Maximum Power
ical Subracks and Breaker a Power Consumpti
Con Frames Consumpti on for the
figu on of Typical
rati Integrated Configurati
on Equipment on
b
1 2 x OptiX OSN TN16 Eight 63 A 5400 W < 4000 W

8800 T32 + 1 x circuit
DCM frame breakers
2 1 x OptiX OSN TN16 Four 63 A and 5400 W < 4000 W

8800 T32 + 2 x four 32 A
OptiX OSN 6800 circuit
+ 2 x DCM frame breakers

OptiX OSN 8800 breakers
T16 + 1 x DCM
frame

DCM frame breakers
5 3 x OptiX OSN TN16 Six 63 A and 5000 W < 4000 W

8800 T16 +1 x two 32 A
6 2 x OptiX OSN TN16 Four 63 A and 5000 W < 4000 W

8800 T16 + 2 x four 32 A
7 1 x OptiX OSN TN16 Two 63 A and 5000 W < 4000 W

8800 T16 + 3 x six 32 A
8 4 x OptiX OSN TN11 Four 63 A 4800 W < 4000 W

6800 + 1 x DCM circuit
frame breakers
9 3 x OptiX OSN TN11 Four 63 A 4800 W < 4000 W

6800 + 2 x CRPC circuit
frame + 3 x DCM breakers
frame

Typ Number of PDU Model Circuit Maximum Power

ical Subracks and Breaker a Power Consumpti
Con Frames Consumpti on for the
figu on of Typical
rati Integrated Configurati
on Equipment on
b
a: This column lists the number of circuit breakers required on the PDF.
b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum
power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated
equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment can not exceed the maximum
power consumption.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption.
Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the
formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).
Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in
normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the
device under extreme conditions.
4.2.1.3 N66B Cabinet Structure

The N66B is an ETSI middle-column cabinet with 600 mm depth, complying with the ETS
300-119 standard.
The following subracks can be installed on the N66B cabinet: OptiX OSN , OptiX OSN , OptiX
OSN 8800 T16, and OptiX OSN 6800.
The N66B cabinet consists of the rack (main frame), open-close type front and rear doors, and
side panels at the left and right sides.
Cabinet doors and side panels can be disassembled. The front door and side panels have
grounding points. Keys to the front and rear doors of all N63B cabinets are the same.
Figure 4-3 shows the appearance of the N66B cabinet.

Figure 4-3 N66B cabinet appearance
4.2.1.4 Configuration of the Integrated N66B Cabinet

Typical configuration of the N63B cabinet involves settings of the following items: the subrack
type, the number of subracks, DCM and CRPC frames, and the PDU model.

Table 4-2 Typical configurations of the N66B cabinet
Typic Number of PDU Circuit Maximum Power

al Subracks and Mode Breaker a Power Consumptio
Confi Frames Consumptio n for the
gurat n of Typical
ion Integrated Configuratio
Equipment b n
1 1 x OptiX OSN TN16 Sixteen 63 10800 W < 6000 W

8800 T64 + 2 x A circuit
T32 + 2 x DCM
frame

8800 T64 + 4 x and eight 32
OptiX OSN 6800 A circuit
3 1 x OptiX OSN TN16 Sixteen 63 10000 W < 6000 W

8800 T64 + 4 x A circuit
T16 + 2 x DCM
frame
a: This column lists the number of circuit breakers required on the PDF.
b: The maximum power consumption of the integrated equipment refers to the maximum
power consumption of the cabinet or the maximum heat dissipation capacity of the integrated
equipment. The power consumption of the integrated equipment do not exceed the maximum
power consumption.
NOTE
In the case of transmission equipment, power consumption is generally transformed into heat consumption.
Hence, heat consumption (BTU/h) and power consumption (W) can be converted to each other in the
formula: Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) / 0.2931 (Wh).
Power consumption for the typical configuration refers to the average power consumption of the device in
normal scenarios. The maximum power consumption refers to the maximum power consumption of the
device under extreme conditions.
4.2.1.5 Cabinet Installation Mode
The ETSI 300 mm cabinet supports three installation modes: back-to-back installation, face-to-
face installation, and side-by-side installation. They can be located on cement floors or anti-
static floors. There are two ways of cabling for the cabinets: upward cabling and downward
cabling.
The ETSI 600 mm cabinet supports two installation modes: face-to-face installation, and side-
by-side installation. They can be located on cement floors or anti-static floors. There are two
ways of cabling for the cabinets: upward cabling and downward cabling.

4.2.1.6 TN16PDU
The TN16PDU is installed in the upper part of a cabinet to supply power to subracks inside the
cabinet.
NOTE
The TN51PDU and TN16PDU have the same functions but differ in height. The TN51PDU is 133.4 mm
high. When two are installed on a cabinet, one more DCM frame can be configured if the TN16PDU is
used, compared with the TN51PDU.
TN51PDU can be substituted by the TN16PDU.This topic describes the TN16PDU.
The TN16PDU consists of two parts: A and B, which backs up each other. Both A and B receive
four -48V/-60V power supplies and output four power supplies for subracks in the cabinet.
Whether short-circuiting copper bars are required is determined by the current of power supplied
by the power supply equipment in the telecommunications room:
l When eight 63 A power supplies are provided, no short-circuiting copper bar is required.
l When four 125 A power supplies are provided, short-circuiting copper bars are required
for dividing one 125 A power supply into two 63 A power supplies.
For more information about short-circuiting copper bars, see Short-Circuiting Copper
Bar.
Figure 4-4 shows the front panel of the TN16PDU.
Figure 4-4 Front panel of the TN16PDU

Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply Power supply
output area switch area input area switch area output area
- - - - - - - -
+ + + + + + + +
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
A B
1 2 3
1. Output cable terminal block 2. Input cable terminal block 3. Power switch
l Panel dimensions: 535 mm (W) x 100 mm (H)

l Output cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output cable terminal
blocks for connecting power cables of subracks to supply power for subracks.
l Input cable terminal block: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four input cable terminal
blocks and receive four -48V/-60V DC power supplies, eight -48V/-60V DC power supplies
in total.
l Power switch: Both A and B of the DC PDU have four output power switches to control
power supplies for subracks inside the cabinet and provide overcurrent protection for each
other.
Figure 4-5 shows the internal pin assignments of the TN16PDU.

Figure 4-5 TN16PDU internal pin assignments
OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
- - - - - - - -
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
+ + + + + + + +
ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON
INPUT A INPUT B
OUTPUT A OUTPUT B
+ + + + OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF
+ + + +
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
- - - - - - - -
INPUT A INPUT B
Short-Circuit Copper Bar

If a power supply is 125 A, both A and B need to receive two power supplies, four power supplies
in total. In this case, short-circuit copper bars are required for both A and B. Figure 4-6 shows
the appearance of the short-circuiting copper bar.
Figure 4-6 Appearance
Copper Plate
4.2.1.7 UPM
The UPM is an external uninterruptible power module. The UPM can directly convert 110 V/
220 V AC mains power into -48 V DC power required by the transmission equipment. The UPM
is suitable for the telecom carriers who cannot provide -48 V DC power supply or requires
batteries.
Application
Figure 4-7 shows the application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

Figure 4-7 Application of the UPM on the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
OptiX OSN equipment
Backplane
110V/220V -48V
UPM PIU
Board A
-48V
PIU
Board B
-48V
Appearance
The UPM is a special power supply system and EPS75-4815AF is one type of the UPM.
The output power of a single EPS75-4815AF power system is 2000 W. The EPS75-4815AF
power system is 3U high. Figure 4-8 shows the appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system.
Figure 4-8 Appearance of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Functions and Features

UPM can work with storage batteries . When the external AC power system supplies power
normally, the batteries store power. When the 110 V/220 V AC power supply is interrupted, the
batteries can supply power for 3 to 4 hours. To supply power to the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
equipment, only one power system is required to be connected to the batteries.
The standard maximum configuration of each EPS75-4815AF power system includes five
rectifier modules and one monitoring module.

NOTE
The batteries do not belong to the EPS75-4815AF. Therefore, the batteries need to be configured separately.
If the batteries are required, a battery cabinet is provided generally or a dedicated space in the equipment
cabinet is reserved for the batteries.
Table 4-3 provides the functions and features of the UPM.
Table 4-3 Functions and features of the EPS75-4815AF power system
Function and EPS75-4815AF

Feature
Hot-swappable The AC/DC rectifier module of the UPM is hot-swappable. When you
function replace a faulty rectifier module, the other rectifier module can still
work normally. Therefore, the maintainability of the system is
improved.
Storage battery The UPM provides the storage battery protection function. When the
protection function mains supply is interrupted, the power system of the equipment
automatically switches to the storage battery, which ensures that the
equipment operates normally. The battery module provides a capacity
of 40 to 500 Ah. The default capacity is 65 Ah.
Loading capacity The loading capability of each rectifier module is 800 W.
Lightning-proof The rectifier module is embedded with the lightning-proof protector.

function The rectifier module can bear the 1.2/50 us x 6 kV or 8/20 us x 3 kA
lightning surge. When the lightning current enters the rectifier module
along with the power cable, install category-C and category-B light
arresters before you connect the AC mains supply to the power system
to prevent the overvoltage caused by the direct lightning strike from
damaging the rectifier module.
Working Principle and Signal Flow

The UPM is fed by one 220 V AC mains power supply. The rectifier module converts the input
power into –48 V DC voltage to provide four DC branches and one battery branch.
When the UPM works normally, the monitoring module controls the rectifier module, storage
battery loop, and load loop, which work according to the preset parameters or user settings. The
monitoring module also monitors the status and data of the rectifier module, storage battery loop,
and load loop.
In the case of a mains supply failure, the equipment is fed by the storage battery group that is
connected to the UPM. The battery group must be connected to the UPM before the mains supply
fails. When the batteries start to discharge due to a mains supply failure, the monitoring module
reports the no-mains-supply alarm. With the discharge of the batteries, the battery voltage starts
to drop. When the battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring module reports the DC
undervoltage alarm. When the battery voltage reaches 43 V, the battery group enables the power-
off protection function to interrupt the connection between the battery group and the equipment.
As a result, the batteries are automatically protected.
When the mains supply is restored, the UPM resumes normal operations.

Interfaces and Indicators

Figure 4-9 shows the rear view of the GIE4805S power system (subject to the UPM on site).
Figure 4-9 Front panel of the EPS75-4815AF power system
1. Control miniature circuit breaker 2. Control MCB of the battery 3. Control MCB of load 1 (10 A)
(MCB) of the AC input (30 A) branch (80 A)
4. Control MCB of load 2 (30 A) 5. Control MCB of load 3 (40 6. Control MCB of load 4 (40 A)
A)
7. AC phase line terminal 8. AC zero line terminal 9. Negative 48 V terminal of the battery
branch
10. Negative 48 V terminal of the load 11. Positive 48 V terminal of 12. Positive 48 V terminal of the load
branch the battery branch branch
13. Connecting terminal of the 14. DB44 signal interface 15. Communication interface (COM)
protection grounding cable
16. Communication test interface
(TEST)
Interfaces
The front panel of the EPS75-4815AF has seven interfaces. Table 4-4 describes the types and
usage of the interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF.
Table 4-4 Interfaces of the EPS75-4815AF power system

Interface Type of Interface Usage
Power Power interface "7" and "8" indicate the AC mains

input input terminals, which access 110 V/
interface 220 V AC power.

Power Power interface The power output interfaces are in the

output lower left corner on the front panel of
interface the UPM. The terminals indicated by
"9" and "11" constitute a battery
interface, through which the power
system is connected to the battery
input socket at the back of the storage
battery box through a battery cable.
"10" and "12" indicate the output
interfaces of four loads. The output
interfaces can supply power to the
OptiX OSN equipment by using
power cables.
Connectin Power interface The UPM is grounded through the

g terminal cabinet.
of the
protection
grounding
cable
DB44 DB44 The backplane of the subrack can be

signal connected to the sensor transfer box
interface (an optional device) through the DB44
signal interface and to the monitoring
module through the 96-pin DIN
connector. In addition, the sensor
transfer box can be connected to
multiple sensors. As a result, the
monitoring function is extended.
Communi RJ45 It is used for communication with the

cation PC. The COM interface can adopt the
interface RS-485 communication mode or
(COM) RS-232 communication mode. Three
baud rates are available, namely, 4800
kbit/s, 9600 kbit/s, and 19200 kbit/s.
The baud rate can be adjusted and the
default baud rate is 9600 kbit/s.
Communi RJ45 It is used for internal test.

cation test
interface
(TEST)

Switch Button The switch buttons are on the left of

button the UPM, as shown in Figure 4-9. "1"
indicates the control MCB of the AC
input (30 A), which enables and
disables the input of the AC mains
supply. "2", "3", "4", and "5" indicate
the load control switches, which
enable and disable the load output.
Definition of DB44 signal pins

Table 4-5 provides the definition of DB44 signal pins.
Table 4-5 Definition of DB44 signal pins

Pin Diagram Pin Definiti Function Pin Definit Function
on ion
1 24 V Auxiliary power 23 SMOK Smoke sensor

output E
2 12 V Auxiliary power 24 WATE Water damage detection

output R
3 12 V Auxiliary power 25 DOOR Door status switch (DSS)

output signal detection
4 GND Signal ground 26 WIRE Distribution frame

connection
5 GND Signal ground 27 JK1+ Positive terminal of dry

contact 1
6 SIM1 Voltage 28 JK1- Negative terminal of dry

detection of the contact 1
first battery pack
7 SIM2 Voltage 29 JK2+ Positive terminal of dry

detection of the contact 2
second battery
pack
8 - - 30 JK2- Negative terminal of dry

contact 2
9 - - 31 CONT1 Positive terminal for output

O+ control of optical coupler 1
10 GND Signal ground 32 CONT1 Negative terminal for output

O- control of optical coupler 1

Pin Diagram Pin Definiti Function Pin Definit Function

on ion
11 VHUM Ambient 33 CONT2 Positive terminal for output

humidity O+ control of optical coupler 2
measurement
12 VBTEM Battery 34 CONT2 Negative terminal for output

1 temperature O- control of optical coupler 2
measurement 1
13 VBTEM Battery 35 FANCT Positive terminal for fan

2 temperature R1+ rotation control
measurement 2
14 VTEM1 Ambient 36 FANCT Negative terminal for fan

temperature R1- rotation control
measurement 1
15 VTEM2 Ambient 37 JKM1+ Positive terminal for a

temperature lightning arrester failure
measurement 2 alarm
16 JTD1 Backup 1 38 JKM1- Negative terminal for a

lightning arrester failure
alarm
17 JTD2 Backup 2 39 JKM2+ Positive terminal for an AC

power-off alarm
18 JTD3 Backup 3 40 JKM2- Negative terminal for an AC

power-off alarm
19 JTD4 Backup 4 41 JKM3+ Positive terminal for a battery

undervoltage alarm
20 JTD5 Backup 5 42 JKM3- Negative terminal for a

battery undervoltage alarm
21 JTD6 Backup 6 43 JKM4+ Positive terminal for power

supply system failure
22 JTD7 Backup 7 44 JKM4- Negative terminal for power

supply system failure
Indicators
The front panel of each rectifier module has the following indicators:
l Running status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)

l Alarm and protection indicator (ALM) – one color (yellow)
l Faulty state indicator (FAULT) – one color (red)
The front panel of the monitoring module has the following indicators:

l Power supply system fault indicator (ALM) – one color (red)

l Power supply system status indicator (RUN) – one color (green)
Valid Slots
The UPM is case shaped. Therefore, the UPM does not occupy a slot in the subrack.
Technical Specifications
A UPM consists of five power boxes and thus realizes the protected power supply. The output
power of each UPM is 5 x 800 W.
Table 4-6 lists the power parameters of the UPM.
Table 4-6 Power parameters of the UPM
Parameter Value
Voltage range 90-290 V AC

of the AC input
AC input One single-phase three-wire system: 45-65 Hz
Rated input ≤ 28 A
current
Output 53.5±0.5 V
nominal
voltage
Rated output DC output branches Load MCB 1: 10 A

current Load MCB 2: 30 A
Load MCB 3: 40 A
Load MCB 4: 40 A
Battery MCB: 80 A
Total output DC current 37.5±3 A to 75±3 A
Regulated ≤ ±1%
voltage
precision
Non-balance of ≤ ±5% (50%-100% load)

load sharing
Rated ≥ 89%
efficiency of
the integrated
equipment
Power factor ≥ 0.99 (nominal input or output)
Peak-to-peak ≤ 200 mV (within the range of 20 MHz)

noise voltage

Parameter Value
Electrical ≤ ±0.1%
network
adjustment rate
Lightning When the UPM works alone, the input end can bear the simulated lightning
protection surge current whose waveform is 8/20μs and amplitude is 5 kA for five
performance times in both directions. The interval between two surges must be at least
one minute. If the lightning surge current is higher than the preceding
indexes, the UPM may be damaged and cannot work normally.
Cooling The fan that is embedded in the rectifier module cools the module.
method
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the UPM are as follows:
l Dimensions of the UPM: 436 mm (W) x 255 mm (D) x 133 mm (H) (17.2 in. (W) x 10.0
in. (D) x 5.2 in. (H))
l Weight: 15 kg (33.1 lb.)
4.2.2 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Subrack
4.2.2.1 Structure
Subracks are the basic working units of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. Each subrack has independent
power supply.

Figure 4-10 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack structure (subrack door excluded)
1
6
5
2
3
4
1. Board area 2. Fiber cabling area 3. Fan tray assembly

4. Air filter 5. Fiber spool 6. Mounting ear
l Board area: All the boards are installed in this area. 24 slots are available.
l Fiber cabling area: Fiber jumpers from the ports on the front panel of each board are routed
to the fiber cabling area before being routed on a side of the open rack.
l Fan tray assembly: Fan tray assembly contains ten fans that provide ventilation and heat
dissipation for the subrack. The front panel of the fan tray assembly has four indicators that
indicate fan status and related information.
NOTE
For detailed descriptions of the fan tray assembly, see 4.2.2.3 Fan.
l Air filter: It protects the subrack from dust in the air and requires periodic cleaning.
l Fiber spool: Fixed fiber spools are on two sides of the subrack. Extra fibers are coiled in
the fiber spool on the open rack side before being routed to another subrack.
l Mounting ears: The mounting ears attach the subrack in the cabinet.

Table 4-7 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Item Specification
Dimensions 498 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 450 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 17.7 in. (H))
Weight (empty subracka) 18 kg (39.6 lb.)
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly
or air filter is installed.
4.2.2.2 Slot Description

The board area and interface area of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack provide 25 slots.
Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack are shown in Figure 4-11.
Figure 4-11 Slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
IU19 IU20 IU21 IU23 IU24

IU22
EFI PIU AUX PIU ATE
IU9 IU10
IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
IU25 FAN
l : houses service boards and supports service cross-connections.

l IU9 and IU10 are reserved for the XCH/SCC or for the other service boards.
NOTE
Slots IU9 and IU10 can be used to house service boards only when the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 functions
as a slave subrack.
If slots IU9 and IU10 are used to house service boards or SCC boards, install a special filler panel in each
slot first
l IU22 is reserved for future use.

l The following table provides the slots for housing active and standby boards of the subrack.
Board Slots for Active and Standby Boards
PIU IU20 & IU23
XCH/SCC IU9 & IU10
4.2.2.3 Fan
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack has one fan tray assembly, which includes ten independent
fans and an air filter. The air filter can be drawn out, cleaned and replaced.
Version Description
Only one functional version of the fan tray assembly is available, that is, TN16.
Functions and Features

Table 4-8 describes the functions of a fan tray assembly.
Table 4-8 Functions

Function Description
Basic function Dissipates the heat generated by a network element (NE), so that
the NE can operate normally within the designated temperature
range.
Commissioning control l Auto Speed Mode: Implements automatic fan speed

regulation, depending on the subrack temperature.
l Adjustable Speed Mode: You can manually adjust the fan
speed.
Partitioned heat Each subrack is divided into five partitions to help provide
dissipation efficient heat dissipation. The fan speed in each partition is
independently regulated.
Hot swapping Provides the hot swapping function for the fan tray assembly.
Alarming Reports alarms of the fans, and reports the in-service information.
Status checking Checks and reports on the fan status.
Working Principle
Air flow from the subrack is bottom intake top exhaust. Figure 4-12 shows the heat dissipation
and ventilation system in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.

Figure 4-12 Subrack heat dissipation and ventilation system
Air outlet
Board area
Optical fiber
laying area
Fan tray assembly
Air inlet
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two fan speed modes, as described in Table 4-9. The
partitioned speed regulating function is available in Auto Speed Mode. It is recommended that
you operate fans in Auto Speed Mode by default.
Table 4-9 FAN speed mode

FAN Speed Description
Mode
Auto Speed Mode Fan speed in each partition is regulated automatically according to the
temperature of the boards in the partition where the fans are installed.
l Lower than 47°C (116.6°F): the fans intelligently adjust their speeds
to ensure stable heat dissipation for boards while ensuring low noise
and energy consumption.
l Higher than 47°C (116.6°F): the fans in the partition where services
boards are running will rotate at a high speed.
Fan speed in each partition is independently regulated.
The fans run at full speed if the speed regulating signals are abnormal.
If one of the fans fails, the other fans run at full speed.
Adjustable Speed Five fan speed modes are available: Low Speed, Medium-Low
Mode Speed, Medium Speed, Medium-High Speed, and High Speed. You
can set the fan speed manually. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fans in
all partitions run at the same speed and do not support the partitioned
manual fan speed adjustment.
Each OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is divided into five partitions in terms of heat dissipation.
The subrack adopts one fan tray assembly to implement partitioned heat dissipation. See Figure
4-13.

Figure 4-13 Partitioned heat dissipation of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack
IU19 IU20 IU21 IU23 IU24

IU22
EFI PIU AUX PIU ATE
IU9 IU10
IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU IU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
Fan tray
A B C D E
assembly
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, there are five partitions (A, B, C, D, and E) in each subrack. Two
fans in each partition dissipate heat generated by the boards in the partition where the fans reside.
NOTE
If any one of the ten fans in the fan tray assembly fails, the system can keep on operating for 96 consecutive
hours in an environment with temperatures between 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 113°F).
Replace the fan tray assembly immediately if two or more fans fail in the fan tray assemblies.
The fan tray assembly consists of fans and fan control unit. Figure 4-14 shows the functional
blocks of the fan tray assembly.
Figure 4-14 Functional block diagram of the fan tray assembly
Speed adjusting Speed adjusting

signal signal
SCC Fan control unit

Status signal Status signal
FAN
External power External power

supply 1 supply 2

l FAN: dissipates heat generated by normal operation of the subrack. FAN is the core of the
fan tray assembly.
l Fan control board:
– Controls the fan speed according to the fan speed regulating signals.
– Detects faults. After a fault is detected, the fan control unit reports an alarm. In this case,
the SCC board issues commands to instruct the other fans to run at the full speed.
– Monitors speed regulating signals, the fan status, and the online/offline state of the fan
tray assembly.
– Receives and carries out commands from the SCC board to shut down the fans on the
fan tray assembly if necessary.
Appearance
Figure 4-15 shows a fan tray assembly.
Figure 4-15 Fan tray assembly
SYSTEM
2
1. Air filter 2. Operating status indicators 3. Fans (ten in total)
NOTE
An air filter is installed on the fan tray assembly to prevent dust from entering the subrack.
Valid Slots
The fan tray assembly occupies one slot. The valid slot for the fan tray assembly is IU25 in the
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack.
Specifications of the Fan Tray Assembly

Table 4-10 lists the technical specifications of the fan tray assembly.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the
same. Heat consumption (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).

Table 4-10 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly
Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W)
x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))
Weight 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
Power Consumptiona l Low Speed: 42.7 W

l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W
l Medium Speed: 106.8 W
l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W
l High Speed: 215 W
a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured,
rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully
configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high
ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 215 W.
4.2.2.4 Power Consumption

This section describes the maximum and typical subrack power consumption specifications.
Table 4-11 describes the power consumption of an OptiX OSN8800 T16 subrack.
NOTE
For the transport equipment, heat consumption and power consumption are similar and can be taken as the
same. Heat rate (BTU/h) = Power consumption (W) x Time (h)/0.2931(Wh).
Typical configuration power consumption indicates the average power consumption of the equipment with
the typical configuration and the equipment runs at the room temperature. Maximum power consumption
indicates the possible maximum power consumption when the equipment runs in an environment with
extreme conditions.
Table 4-11 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Item Specification
Maximum subrack power consumptiona 1800 W
Typical configuration power consumption 700 W
a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption
obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the
subrack.
Table 4-12describes the power consumption of the subrack in typical configuration in an 8800
T16.

Table 4-12 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Unit Name Typical Maximum Remarks
Power Power
Consumpt Consumpt
ion at 25°C ion at 55°C
(77°F) (W)a (131°F) (W)
a
Subrack OTU subrack 509.2 615.6 8 x 10G OTU (LDX), 1 x XCH, 2

x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,
and 1 x fan tray assembly
OTN 501 808 5 x NQ2, 2 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x

electrical TQX, 2 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
cross-connect 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
subrack assembly
OTM subrack 468.7 569.7 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1

x OBU1, 6 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x
PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,
OLA subrack 228.1 294.3 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 2 x

FIU, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OADM 449.5 561.5 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 2 x FIU, 8

subrack x LSX, 1 x SC2, 1 x XCH, 2 x
221 269.2 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x WSMD9,

1 x DAS1, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x
AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x
fan tray assembly
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and
cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
4.2.2.5 Power Requirement

This section describes the requirements on power supply.
Requirements on Voltage and Current

Table 4-13 provides the requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16
subrack.

Table 4-13 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Item Requirement
Rated working current 37.5 A
Nominal working voltage -48V DC/-60V DC
Working voltage range -40V DC to -72V DC
PIU
The PIU board receives and provides DC power for equipment. For OptiX OSN /, the PIU board
can be TN16PIU or TN51PIU. For OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the PIU board must be TN16PIU.
l Function
Accesses DC power in a range from -40 V to -72 V. Provides lightning protection and
power filtering functions. Unlike the TN51PIU, the TN16PIU supports intelligent ammeter
function, which enables the TN16PIU to detect the power consumption of the entire subrack
and report the power consumption to the system control unit.
NOTE
The overcurrent protection function for the access power supplies of each subrack is realized by the
magnetic circuit breaker of the PDU.
l Front Panel
Appearance of the Front Panel
Figure 4-16 Front panel of the TN51PIU board
PIU
PWR
RTN(+) REG(-)
PIU
PWR
RTN -48V

Figure 4-17 Front panel of the TN16PIU board

PIU
PWR
RTN(+) NEG(-)
Indicators: Power indicator (PWR) - green

l Valid Slots
Table 4-14 Valid slots for the TN51PIU board

Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89
OptiX OSN IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46
Table 4-15 Valid slots for the TN16PIU board

Product Valid Slots
OptiX OSN IU69, IU70, IU78, IU79, IU80, IU81,IU88 and IU89
OptiX OSN IU39, IU40, IU45, and IU46
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 IU20 and IU23
l Specifications
– Performance Specifications
Table 4-16 Performance specifications of the PIU board

Item Unit Value
Number of DC input power supplies - 1
Input DC power voltage range V DC -40 to -72
Input DC power current A ≤60
– Mechanical Specifications
Dimensions of front panel: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 3.1 in. (H))

Weight:
– TN51PIU: 0.5 kg (1.10 lb.)
– TN16PIU: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.)
– Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Maximum Power

Consumption at 25°C Consumption at 55°C
(77°F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN51PIU 1.8 1.8
TN16PIU 3 3.6
4.2.3 Board
4.2.3.1 Function Boards

There are many types of functional boards, such as optical transponder boards and optical
multiplexer/demultiplexer boards.
The boards can be divided into several functional boards, as shown in Table 4-17.
Table 4-17 Functional boards
Functional boards Boards
Optical transponder board LDX, LEM24, LEX4, LOG, LOM, LSQ, LSX, LOA,
LWXS, TMX
Tributary board TOM, TQX, TDX, TOG, TOA, THA, TSXL
Line board NS2, ND2, NS3, NQ2
PID board NPO2, NPO2E, ENQ2, PQ2
Cross-connect unit and system AUX, SCC, XCH

and communication unit
Optical multiplexer/ FIU, D40, M40, M40V, ITL, SFIU

demultiplexer board
Fixed optical add and drop MR8V, CMR2, CMR4, MR2, MR4
multiplexer board
Reconfigurable optical add and RDU9, RMU9, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD4, WSMD9
drop multiplexer board
Optical amplifier board CRPC, OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, HBA, DAS1
Optical supervisory channel SC1, SC2, HSC1, ST2

(OSC) board
Optical protection board DCP, OLP, SCS

Functional boards Boards
Spectrum analyzer board MCA4, MCA8, WMU, OPM8
Variable optical attenuator VA1, VA4

board
Interface Board ATE, EFI,
4.2.3.2 Optical Transponder Board

The optical transponder unit (OTU) accesses one or multiple channels.
It converges or converts the signals to output standard DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-
T G.694.1 or standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.2.
In this way, it helps the multiplexer board to perform wavelength division multiplexing on signals
of different wavelengths.
All OTUs are transceivers and can perform the preceding process as well as its reverse process
at the same time.
OTUs include:
l LDX: 2x10 Gbit/s Wavelength Conversion Board
l LEM24: 22 x GE + 2 x 10GE + 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch board
l LEX4: 4 x 10GE and 2 x OTU2 Ethernet Switch Board
l LOA: 8-channel multirate (100Mbit/s-2.5Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board
l LOG: 8 x Gbit/s Ethernet unit
l LOM: 8-port multi-service multiplexing & optical wavelength conversion board
l LSQ: 40 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
l LSX: 10 Gbit/s wavelength conversion unit
l LWXS: arbitrary rate (16 Mbit/s-2.7 Gbit/s) wavelength conversion board (single transmit)
l TMX: 4 channels STM-16/OTU1/OC-48 asynchronous mux OTU2 wavelength conversion
board
Figure 4-18 shows the position of the OTUs in the system.

Figure 4-18 Position of the OTUs
OTU
OTU
OM
(C-ODD)
OTU
OTU WMU
Client-side equipment
OTU
OM
OA
(C-EVEN)
Line-side ODF
OTU
ITL FIU
SC1
OTU
OTU OA
OD
(C-ODD)
OTU
OTU
OTU
OD
(C-EVEN)
OTU
: The optical transponder unit
OTU: optical transponder unit OM: optical multiplexer unit SC1: unidirectional OSC unit
OD: optical demultiplexer unit FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit
ODF: optical distribution frame WMU: wavelength monitor unit ITL: interleaver board
C-ODD: ODD channels in C band C-EVEN: EVEN channels in C band
Table 4-18 shows the functions of OTUs.

Table 4-18 Functions of OTUs

Board Functi Maxim Type/Rate of Type of Regener WDM
on um Signals on Signals on ator Specific
Numb Client Side WDM Side Board ation
er of
Client–
Side
Signal
s
TN12LD Conver 2 STM-64, OTU2/OTU2e TN52ND DWDM

X gence OC-192, 10GE 2,
and LAN, 10GE TN53ND
wavelen WAN, OTU2, 2,
gth OTU2e TN53NQ
convers 2,
ion TN54NQ
2
TN11LE Conver 24 FE, GE, 10GE OTU2 TN52ND DWDM

M24 gence LAN, 10GE 2,
and WANa TN53ND
wavelen 2,
gth TN53NQ
convers 2,
ion TN54NQ
2
TN11LE Conver 4 10GE LAN, OTU2 TN52ND DWDM

X4 gence 10GE WANa 2,
and TN53ND
wavelen 2,
gth TN53NQ
convers 2,
ion TN54NQ
2


er of
Client–
Side
Signal
s
TN11LO Conver 8 OTU1, OTU2 TN52ND DWDM

A gence STM-16, 2,
and STM-4, TN53ND
wavelen STM-1, 2,
gth OC-48, OC-12, TN53NQ
convers OC-3, FC100, 2,
ion FC200, FC400, TN54NQ
FC800, 2
FICON,
FICON
Express,
FICON 4G,
FICON 8G,
HD-SDI, GE,
FE, DVB-ASI,
SDI, 3G-SDI,
ESCON, FDDI
TN12LO Conver 8 GE OTU2 TN52ND DWDM

G gence 2,
and TN53ND
wavelen 2,
gth TN53NQ
convers 2,
ion TN54NQ
2
TN12LO Conver 8 GE, FC100, OTU2 TN52ND DWDM

M gence FICON, 2,
and FC200, FICON TN53ND
wavelen Express, 2,
gth FC400, FICON TN53NQ
convers 4G, InfiniBand 2,
ion 2.5G, TN54NQ
InfiniBand 5G, 2
ISC 1G, ISC
2G, 3G-SDI


er of
Client–
Side
Signal
s
TN13LS Wavele 1 STM-64, OTU2/OTU2e TN52ND DWDM

X ngth OC-192, 2,
convers FC1200, 10GE TN53ND
ion LAN, 10GE 2,
WAN, OTU2 TN53NQ
and OTU2e 2,
TN54NQ
2
TN11LS Wavele 1 STM-256, OTU3 TN54NS DWDM

Q ngth OC-768, OTU3 3
convers
ion
TN12L Wavele 1 STM-16, Same as the - DWDM

WXS ngth STM-4, optical signals CWDM
convers STM-1, accessed
ion OC-48, OC-12, through the
OC-3, FC200, client side
FC100, GE,
FE, FDDI,
ESCON, DVB-
ASI, SDI,
FICON,
FICON
Express, HD-
SDI, ISC 1G,
ISC 2G, ETR,
CLO
TN12TM Conver 4 STM-16, OTU2 TN52ND DWDM

X gence OC-48 and 2,
and OTU1 TN53ND
wavelen 2,
gth TN53NQ
convers 2,
ion TN54NQ
2
a: For WDM system, there is no difference between STM-64 and 10GE WAN service. When
10GE WAN service is configured, set Service Type to STM-64 on the U2000.
4.2.3.3 Tributary Board

The tributary boards include:

l TDX : 2 x 10G tributary service processing board
l TOM: 8 x multirate ports service processing board
l TOA: 8 x any-rate ports service processing board
l THA: 16 x any-rate ports service processing board
l TQX: 4 x 10G tributary service processing board
l TSXL: 40G tributary service processing board
l TOG: 8 x GE tributary service processing board
Table 4-19 shows the functions of the tributary boards.
Table 4-19 Functions of the tributary boards

Board Function
TN52TDX TN52TDX convert signal as follows:

l 2 x 10GE LAN/10GE WAN/STM-64/OC-192/
OTU2/OTU2e <-> 2 x ODU2/ODU2e
TN53TDX TN53TDX convert signal as follows:

OTU2/OTU2e/FC800/FC1200 <-> 2 x ODU2/
ODU2e
l 2 x FC800 <-> 2 x ODUflex
TN54THA THA convert signal as follows:

l 16 x 125 Mbit/s to 1.25 Gbit/s <-> 16 x ODU0
l 16 x 1.49 Gbit/s to 2.67 Gbit/s <-> 16 x ODU1
l 16 x 125 Mbit/s to 2.2 Gbit/s <-> 1 to 16 x ODU1
l 16 x OTU1 <-> 32 x ODU0

Board Function
TN52TOM TN52TOM convert signal as follows:

l 7 x 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s <-> 1 x OTU1
l 6 x 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s <-> 1 x OTU1 (dual fed
and selective receiving)
l 6 x 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s <-> 2 x OTU1
l 4 x 100 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s <-> 2 x OTU1 (dual fed
and selective receiving)
l 4 x OTU1 <-> 4 x ODU1
l 4 x OTU1 <-> 8 x ODU0
l 2 x OTU1 <-> 2 x OTU1 (dual fed and selective
receiving)
l 4 x OTU1 <-> 4 x OTU1 (electrical regeneration)
TN54TOA TOA convert signal as follows:

l 8 x 125Mbit/s to 1.25Gbit/s<->8 x ODU0
l 8 x 1.49Gbit/s to 2.67Gbit/s<->8 x ODU1
l 8 x 125Mbit/s to 2.2Gbit/s<->1 to 8 x ODU1
l 8 x OTU1<->16 x ODU0
l 5 x 3G-SDI<->5 x ODUfle x
l 4 x FC400<->4 x ODUfle x
TN52TOG TOG convert signal as follows:

l 8 x GE<->8 x ODU0
TN52TQX TN52TQX convert signal as follows:

OTU/OTU2e <-> 4 x ODU2/ODU2e

l 4 x FC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e <-> 4 x ODU2/
ODU2e

l 4 x FC800/FC1200/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/
STM-64/OC-192/OTU2/OTU2e <-> 4 x ODU2/
ODU2e
l 4 x FC800 <-> 4 x ODUflex
TN53TSXL TN53TSXL convert signal as follows:

l 1 x STM-256/OC-768/OTU3 <-> 1 x ODU3

4.2.3.4 Line Board
The line unit includes:
NS2: 10G line service processing board
ND2: 2 x 10G line service processing board
NQ2: 4 x 10G line service processing board
NS3: 40G line service processing board
Table 4-20 shows the functions of the line board.
Table 4-20 Functions of the line unit
Board Board Num Type of Num Type of Hybri Rege

Descriptio ber of Signals on ber of Signals on d nerat
n Back Backplane WD WDM Side Trans or
plane Side M missi Funct
Side Side on ion
Signa Signa
ls ls
TN53 10G line 8 ODUO 1 OTU2 Suppo Not

NS2 service Electrical Optical rts suppor
processing signal signal hybrid ted
board transm
4 ODU1 1 OTU2 ission
Electrical Optical of
signal signal ODUfl
1 l ODU2 1 l OTU2 ex,
Electrical Optical ODU0
signal signal , and
ODU1
l ODU2e l OTU2e signals
Electrical Optical .
signal signal
1 ODUflex 1 OTU2
Electrical Optical
signal signal
TN52 2 x 10G line 16 ODU0 2 OTU2 Suppo Suppo

ND2 service Electrical Optical rts rted
processing signal signal hybrid
board transm
signal signal ODU0
,
ODU1
, and
ODU2
(or


Side Side on ion
Signa Signa
ls ls
2 l ODU2 2 l OTU2 ODU2

Electrical Optical e)
signal signal signals
l ODU2e l OTU2e .
Electrical Optical
signal signal

ND2 service Electrical Optical rts rted
board transm
signal signal ODUfl
2 l ODU2 2 l OTU2 ex,
signal signal ,
ODU1
l ODU2e l OTU2e , and
signal signal (or
4 ODUflex 2 OTU2 ODU2
Electrical Optical e)
signal signal signals
.
TN52 40G line 32 ODU0 1 OTU3 Suppo Not

NS3 service Electrical Optical rts suppor
board transm
signal signal ODU0
4 l ODU2 1 l OTU3 ,
signal signal , and
ODU2
l ODU2e l OTU3e (or
signal signal e)
signals
.


Side Side on ion
Signa Signa
ls ls
TN54 40G line 32 ODU0 1 OTU3 Suppo Suppo

NS3 service Electrical Optical rts rted
board transm
signal signal ODU0
4 l ODU2 1 l OTU3 ,
signal signal , and
ODU2
l ODU2e l OTU3e (or
signal signal e)
signals
1 l ODU3 1 l OTU3
.
Electrical Optical
signal signal
l OTU3e
Optical
signal
TN52 4 x 10G line 32 ODU0 4 OTU2 Suppo Not

NQ2 service Electrical Optical rts suppor
board transm
signal signal ODU0
4 l ODU2 4 l OTU2 ,
signal signal , and
ODU2
l ODU2e l OTU2e (or
signal signal e)
signals
.

NQ2 service Electrical Optical rts rted
board transm
signal signal


Side Side on ion
Signa Signa
ls ls
4 l ODU2 4 l OTU2 ODUfl

Electrical Optical ex,
signal signal ODU0
l ODU2e l OTU2e ,
signal signal , and
ODU2
8 ODUflex 4 OTU2 (or
signal signal e)
signals
.

NQ2 service Electrical Optical rts rted
board transm
signal signal ODU0
4 l ODU2 4 l OTU2 ,
signal signal , and
ODU2
l ODU2e l OTU2e (or
signal signal e)
8 ODUflex 4 OTU2 signals
Electrical Optical .
signal signal
4.2.3.5 PID Board
The PID unit includes:
NPO2: 12 x OTU2 PID board
NPO2E: 12 x OTU2 PID board
PQ2: Assembly Of 4 x 10G PID Service Processing Sub-Board
ENQ2: 4 x 10G line service processing board
Table 4-21 shows the functions of the PID board.

Table 4-21 Functions of the PID unit
Board Function
TN54NPO2/ Converts 64 channels of ODU0 signals, 32 channels of ODU1 signals, or

TN55NPO2/ 8 channels of ODU2 signals into 8 channels of standard WDM wavelength
TN55NPO2E OTU2 signals. Alternatively, the TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E
converts 8 channels of ODU2e signals into 8 channels of OTU2e signals.
The TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E supports hybrid transmission
of ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals. Further, the TN54NPO2/
TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E receives 4 channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals
cross-connected from the ENQ2 by the backplane, multiplexes 12
channels of OTU2/OTU2e signals into one channel of optical signals, and
then outputs the optical signals. The TN54NPO2/TN55NPO2/
TN55NPO2E also performs the reverse process.
TN54PQ2 Performs 4 x 10G O/E integration when working with TN55NPO2.
TN54ENQ2 Converts thirty-two channels of ODU0 signals or sixteen channels of

ODU1 signals or four channels of ODU2/ODU2e signals from the
backplane into four OTU2/OTU2e signals. The TN54ENQ2 also performs
the reverse process. The TN54ENQ2 supports hybrid transmission of
ODU0, ODU1, and ODU2/ODU2e signals.
NOTE
The TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E can process four wavelengths. After being equipped with the TN54PQ2
service processing board, it can process four more wavelengths.
For details about the PID boards, see the Hardware Description.
4.2.3.6 Cross-Connect Unit and System and Communication Unit

The cross-connect unit and system and communication unit include the cross-connect board,
system control and communication board.
XCH Board
XCH: An XCH board integrates the functions of the cross-connect board, system control and
communication board, and clock board and is intended for the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.
l The cross-connect unit supports centralized grooming of electrical service signals.
l The system control and communication unit is the control center for the equipment. It helps
the NM system to manage the boards of the equipment and enables the equipment to
communicate with each other.
l The clock unit is used to provide the system clock and time to ensure the synchronization
of the clocks and time on the NEs.
Cross-connect module on the TN16XCH board: supports centralized grooming of ODU0/

ODU1/ODU2/ODU3/ODUflex signals. Supports a maximum cross-connect capacity of 640
Gbit/s for ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU3/ODUflex signals.
System control and communication unit on the TN16XCH board: achieves service grooming,
configuration management, and alarm output of a subrack.

NOTE
An OptiX OSN 8800 T16 NE can consist of multiple subracks. Generally, two TN16XCH boards are
housed in slots IU9 and IU10 in the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 master subrack to provide mutual backup. The
TN16XCH is better installed in slot IU9. If there is a standby TN16XCH , install the standby TN16XCH
in slot IU10. When subracks are cascaded in master-slave mode, the AUX board in a slave subrack collects
alarm information and overheads associated with only the slave subrack and the TN16XCH board in the
master subrack processes overheads and alarms associated with the master subrack, processes the
overheads, alarms, and package loading for all slave subracks, applies configurations to slave subracks,
and uniformly communicates with the NMS.
The main functions of the clock module on the TN16XCH board are as follows:
l Provides the intra-NE system clock and system frame. The service boards on the NE use
the system clock and frame header to synchronize the intra-NE services.
l Selects the time recovered from the service signals or the TOD port of the synchronous
timing interface board ATE to synchronize the time of the entire system.
l Synchronizes the time and clocks between the NEs.
l Provides the intra-NE system clock and system frame. The service boards on the NE use
the system clock and frame header to synchronize the intra-NE services.
l Selects the time recovered from the service signals or the TOD port of the synchronous
timing interface board ATE to synchronize the time of the entire system.
l Synchronize the time and clocks between the NEs.
System Control and Communication Board

SCC: The SCC board is the system control and communication board for the OptiX OSN 8800
T16.
TN16SCC: It helps the NM system to manage the boards of the equipment and enables the
equipment to communicate with each other.
System Auxiliary Interface Board

AUX: The AUX board is the system auxiliary interface board for the OptiX OSN 8800 T16.
TN16AUX: Implements the communications between boards or subracks, and provides
management function in a slave subrack.
4.2.3.7 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board

The multiplexer and demultiplexer unit multiplexes or demultiplexes optical signals of different
wavelengths.
The multiplexer and demultiplexer units include:
l D40: 40-channel demultiplexing unit
l FIU: fiber interface unit
l SFIU: fiber interface unit for sync timing
l M40: 40-channel multiplexing unit
l M40V: 40-channel multiplexing unit with VOA
l ITL: interleaver board
Figure 4-19 shows the position of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit in the system.

Figure 4-19 Position of the multiplexer and demultiplexer unit
OTU
OTU
OM
(C-ODD)
OTU
OTU
WMU
OTU
OM
OA
(C-EVEN)
Client-side Device
Line-side ODF
OTU
ITL FIU
SC1
OTU
OTU OA
OD
(C-ODD)
OTU
OTU
OTU
OD
(C-EVEN)
OTU
: The multiplexer and demultiplexer units
OTU: Optical Transponder Unit OA: Optical Amplifying Unit OM: Optical Multiplexer Unit
OD: Optical Demultiplexer Unit SC1: Unidirectional Optical FIU: Fiber Interface Unit
Supervisory Channel Unit
ODF: Optical Distribution Frame ITL: interleaver board WMU: Wavelength Monitored
Unit
C-ODD: Odd channels in the C band C-EVEN: Even channels in the C
band
The functions of the multiplexer and demultiplexer units are as follows:

l TN11D40/TN12D40: Demultiplexes main path signal to a maximum of 40 channels of
service in C band.
l TN11SFIU/TN12FIU/TN13FIU: Realizes the multiplexing and demultiplexing of signals
transmitted by the main path and the optical supervisory channel in C band.
l TN11M40/TN12M40: Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one signal in C band.
l TN11M40V/TN12M40V: Multiplexes a maximum of 40 signals into one signal and adjusts
the input optical power of each channel in C band.
l TN11ITL/ TN12ITL: Multiplexes/demultiplexes optical signals between the DWDM
systems with the 100 GHz channel spacing and that with the 50 GHz channel spacing in C
band.

l TN11SFIU: Multiplexes and demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main path and
optical supervisory channel.
4.2.3.8 Fixed Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer Board
In the fixed optical add/drop multiplexer unit, single-wavelength optical signals are added/
dropped from the multiplexed signals and sent to an OTU.
At the same time, the single-wavelength optical signals transmitted at the OTU are multiplexed
into the multiplexed signals.
The fixed optical add/drop multiplexer units include:
l CMR2: CWDM 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit

l CMR4: CWDM 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
l MR2: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
l MR4: 4-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit
l MR8V: 8-channel optical add/drop multiplexing unit with VOA
Figure 4-20 shows the position of the fixed optical add/drop multiplexer unit in the system.
Figure 4-20 Position of the fixed optical add/drop multiplexer unit
SC2
West East
FIU OA OA FIU
line-side line-side
OADM OADM
ODF Unit Unit ODF
OA OA
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
West client-side East client-side
: The optical add/drop multiplexer unit
ODF: optical distribution frame FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit
OADM Unit: optical add/drop multiplexer unit SC2: bidirectional OSC unit OTU: optical transponder unit
The functions of the fixed optical add/drop multiplexer unit are as follows:
l TN11CMR2: Adds/drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
l TN11CMR4: Adds/drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
l TN11MR2: Adds/drops and multiplexes two signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
l TN11MR4: Adds/drops and multiplexes four signals to/from the multiplexed signals.

l TN11MR8V: Adds/Drops and multiplexes eight signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
Adjusts the multiplexed input optical power of WDM-side signal and the input optical
power of cascade ports for pass-through wavelengths.
4.2.3.9 Reconfigurable Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing unit

The reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit demultiplexes any single-wavelength
signal from multiplexed signals and sends it to the OTU. It also multiplexes any single-
wavelength signal into multiplexed signals. The reconfigurable optical add and drop
multiplexing units include:
l RMU9: 9-port ROADM multiplexing board
l RDU9: 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board
l WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board
l WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board
l WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing and demultiplexing board
l WSMD9: 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing and demultiplexing board
The functions of the reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing units are as follows:
l TN11RDU9: Broadcasts the main path signals in nine directions at the same time.
l TN11RMU9: Adds eight single-channel signal or multi-channel signals to the main path.
Used with the OTU with tunable wavelength, the RMU9 realizes the dynamic input of eight
channel signals.
l TN12WSD9/TN13WSD9: Achieves the dynamic and configurable demultiplexing of any
wavelengths to any ports. A node on the ring or chain network can transmit any wavelength
combination to any ports so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. The
TN13WSD9 unit is used in the 80–wavelength system. The board can also add eight
channels of colorless signals to the main path, and supports board cascade for adding more
channels of signals.
l TN12WSM9/TN13WSM9: Achieves the dynamic and configurable multiplexing of any
wavelengths to any ports. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths
at the local station through any ports as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths.
The TN13WSM9 unit is used in the 80-wavelength system. The board can also add eight
channels of colorless signals to the main path, and supports board cascade for adding more
channels of signals.
l TN12WSMD4: Achieves service broadcasting function, and supports the function of
configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can
broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as four channels of the same
signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to any port. The TN12WSMD4 unit
is used in the 80-wavelength system.
l TN11WSMD9: Achieves service broadcasting function, and supports the function of
configurable multiplexing any wavelengths. Any node on a ring or chain network can
broadcast the signals received from the main optical path as nine channels of the same
signals, and can input any wavelengths added locally to any port. The TN11WSMD9 unit
is used in the 80-wavelength system.
4.2.3.10 Optical Amplifier Board

The optical amplifier board amplifies the power of the multiplexed optical signals to extend the
transmission distance.

The optical amplifier boards include:

l CRPC: case-shaped Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band
l OAU1: optical amplifier unit
l OBU1: optical booster unit
l OBU2: optical booster unit
l HBA: high-power booster amplifier board
l DAS1: double optical amplifier unit with supervisory channel
NOTE
OAU1 uses two amplifiers to provide two-level amplification and a DCM module can be configured
between the two amplifiers. An OAU1 board provides two pump sources with pump wavelengths of 980
nm and 1480 nm. OBU1 or OBU2 adopts one-level amplification and provides only one pump source with
a pump wavelength of 980 nm.
The functions of the optical amplifier units are as follows:

l TN11CRPC: Generates multi-channel pump light of high power, providing energy for the
amplification of signals in the fiber. Realizes the distributed in-service amplification of
signals over long distance with wide bandwidth and low noise. It includes two types:
– CRPC01: Adopts backward pumping technology. The typical gain is 10 dB for G.652
fiber. The typical gain is 12 dB for LEAF fiber.
– CRPC03: Adopts forward pumping technology. The typical gain is 10 dB for G.652
fiber.
l TN12OAU1: Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals, and amplifies the input
optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. It includes
five types:
– OAU100: The OAU100 continuously adjusts the gain from 16 dB to 25.5 dB based on
the input optical power.
– OAU101: The OAU101 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB based on
– OAU102: The OAU102 continuously adjusts the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB.
l TN13OAU1: Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals, and amplifies the input
three types:
l TN12OBU1: Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals, and amplifies the input
four types:
– OBU101: The typical gain is 20 dB.


– OBU1P1: Configured at the receive site, is an OA board intended for PID and is used
together with the TN55NPO2/TN55NPO2E board.
l TN12OBU2: Adjusts the optical power of the input optical signals, and amplifies the input
one type OBU205 and the typical gain is 23 dB.
l TN11HBA: Amplifies the input optical signals in C band. The total wavelengths range
from 1529 nm to 1561 nm. This ensures the high output optical power of the board. The
board mainly amplifies the launched optical power to meet the requirement of ultra-long
haul transmission. The typical gain is 29 dB.
l TN11DAS1: Integrates the functions of the OAU101, FIU, and SC1 boards.
– Amplifies the input optical signals in C band with the wavelength range of 1529 nm to
1561 nm. The board can continuously adjust the gain from 20 dB to 31 dB.
– Multiplexes or demultiplexes signals on the optical supervisory channel into or from
on the main optical path.
– Receives, transmits, controls, and processes one channel of signals on the optical
supervisory channel. The operating wavelength of the optical supervisory channel
ranges from 1480 nm to 1520 nm.
4.2.3.11 Optical Supervisory Channel Board
The OSC unit transmits and extracts the system overhead information and then sends it to the
SCC after simple processing.
The OSC units include:
l SC1: unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit

l SC2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
l HSC1: high power unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit
l ST2: bidirectional optical supervisory channel and timing transmission unit
The functions of the OSC units are as follows:

l TN12SC1: The SC1 is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory signal.
The SC1 supports a maximum of 48 dB transmission.
l TN12SC2: The SC2 is used to receive, process, and transmit two optical supervisory
signals. The SC2 supports a maximum of 48 dB transmission.
l TN11HSC1: The HSC1 is used to receive, process, and transmit one optical supervisory
signal. The HSC1 supports a maximum of 53 dB transmission.
l TN11ST2: The ST2 is used to receive, process, and transmit two optical supervisory signals.
– The ST2 board supports transparent transmission of two channels of FE electrical
signals
– The ST2 board supports transparent transmission of two channels of 2M clock signals.
– The ST2 board supports control of the DCN communication flow.
– The ST2 board supports forward error correction (FEC).
– The ST2 board supports IEEE 1588 v2 function.

4.2.3.12 Optical Protection Board

The optical protection unit protects the network system in self-healing mode.
The optical protection units include:
l OLP: optical line protection unit
l DCP: 2-channel optical path protection unit
l SCS: sync optical channel separator unit
The functions of the optical protection units are as follows:
l TN12OLP:
– Provides optical line protection. When the active fiber decreases in performance, it
automatically switches to the standby fiber.
– Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual
fed and selective receiving function.
– Provides client 1+1 protection, which uses a working OTU and a protection OTU to
protect the client-side services.
l TN12DCP:
– Provides intra-board 1+1 protection to protect the services of the OTU that has no dual
fed and selective receiving function. Compared with the OLP, the DCP provides
protection for two signals so as to realize high-integrated 1+1 protection.
– Provides OWSP protection by occupying two wavelengths to protect one channel of
service at two adjacent stations.
l TN11SCS:
4.2.3.13 Interface Board

The interface boards provide functional interfaces such as management interface, inter-subrack
communication interface, alarm output and cascading interface, alarm input and output interface.
ATE
On the OptiX OSN 8800, the TN16ATE board provides the following interfaces:
l Interface for eight alarm inputs, outputs, and cascading.
l 120-ohm balanced clock interface for two inputs and two outputs of 2 Mbit/s or 2 MHz
clock signals.
l 75-ohm unbalanced clock interface for two inputs and two outputs of clock signals. A
connector is installed at the 120-ohm RJ45 interface for converting impedance of a clock
interface from 120 ohm to 75 ohm, achieving input and output of 75-ohm clock signals.
l Interface for two channels of external time signals.
EFI
On the OptiX OSN 8800, the TN16EFI board provides the following interfaces:

l Subrack communication interface:

– Connects a network cable from the ETH1/ETH2/ETH3 interface on one subrack to
corresponding interfaces on the other subracks to achieve the communication between
the master subrack and slave subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the
communication between the master and slave subracks.
– Connects a network cable to a CRPC or ROP board to achieve communication with the
CRPC or ROP board.
l Network management interface:
– Connects the network interface on the NEs through a network cable to that on the NMS
server to achieve the management of the NMS over the NEs.
– Connects the NM_ETH1/NM_ETH2 network interface on one NE through a network
cable to that on another NE to achieve communication between NEs.
l Alarm output/concatenation interface: This interface drives the running indicators and
alarm indicators of the cabinet that holds the subrack.
l OAM interface: The OAM interface is a serial NM interface, providing functions of serial
NM and supporting X.25 protocol.
4.2.3.14 Spectrum Analyzer Board
The spectrum analyzer units include:
l MCA4: 4-channel spectrum analyzer unit

l MCA8: 8-channel spectrum analyzer unit
l WMU: wavelength monitor unit
l OPM8: 8-channel optical power monitoring board
The functions of the spectrum analyzer units are as follows:

l TN11MCA4: Monitors in service the
– Central wavelength
– Power value
– Signal-to-noise ratio
– The number of optical wavelengths of the optical signal
The information monitored is reported to the SCC for processing. Provides the spectral
analysis for four channels.
l TN11MCA8: Monitors in service the
– Central wavelength
– Power value
– Signal-to-noise ratio
analysis for eight channels.

l TN11WMU: Performs centralized detection to the OTU board at the transmit end of the
system in terms of the wavelength precision. The WMU board reports the wavelength
deviation to the SCC.
l TN11OPM8: Monitors in service the
– Power value
analysis for four channels.
4.2.3.15 Variable Optical Attenuator Board
The variable optical attenuator units include:
l VA1: 1-channel variable optical attenuator unit

l VA4: 4-channel variable optical attenuator unit
The functions of the variable optical attenuator units are as followed:

l TN12VA1: Adjusts the optical power of one optical channel according to the control
command sent by the SCC.
l TN12VA4: Adjusts the optical power of four optical channels according to the control
command sent by the SCC.
4.2.3.16 Optical Power and Dispersion Equalizing Board
The optical power and dispersion slope equalizing unit is used to adjust the optical power and
dispersion and includes:
l DCU: dispersion compensation unit
l GFU: gain flatness unit
l TDC: single-channel tunable-dispersion compensation board
The functions of the optical power and dispersion equalizing units are as followed:
l TN11DCU: The DCU board compensates for the dispersion which is accumulated in the
fiber during transmission and compresses optical signal pulse. In this way, the optical
signals transmitted can be restored at the output end. In addition, when used together with
an amplifier board, the DCU board can realize long haul optical transmission.
l TN11GFU: Applies to the scenario where the Raman amplifier is used. Uses the gain
flattening filter (GFF) for static compensation on uneven gains caused by optical Raman
amplifier concatenation.
l TN11TDC: The TDC is used for C-band optical signals. Compensates for the dispersion
in the single channel. The dispersion is adjustable.
4.2.4 Small Form-Factor Pluggable (SFP) Module

There are four types of pluggable optical modules: the enhanced small form-factor pluggable
(eSFP), the small form-factor pluggable plus (SFP+), the tunable 10 Gbit/s small form-factor
pluggable (TXFP) and the 10 Gbit/s small form-factor pluggable (XFP). Because they are
pluggable, when you need to adjust the type of accessed services or replace a faulty optical
module, you can directly replace it without replacing its dominant board.

4.3 Software Architecture

The system software includes the board software, NE software and the network management
system.
4.3.1 Overview
The system software is of a modular design. Each module provides specific functions and works
with the other modules.
The entire software is distributed in three modules including board software, NE software and
NM system.
The system software is designed with a hierarchical structure. Each layer performs specific
functions and provides service for the upper layer.
The system software architecture is shown in Figure 4-21.
In the diagram, all the modules are NE software except the "Network Management System" and
"Board Software" modules.
Figure 4-21 Software architecture
Network Management
System
High Level
Communication Module
Real-time Network side Module

multi-task Database
operating Equipment Management Management
system Module Module
Communication Module
NE software
Board Software
4.3.2 Communication Protocols and Interfaces

The Qx interface is used for communication. Complete protocol stack and messages of the Qx
interface are described in ITU-T G.773, Q.811 and Q.812.

The Qx interface is mainly used to connect the mediation device (MD), Q adaptation (QA) and
NE (NE) equipment with the operating system (OS) through local communication network
(LCN).
At present, QA is provided by the NE management layer. MD and OS are provided by the NM
layer. They are connected to each other through the Qx interface.
According to the Recommendations, the Qx interface provided by the system is developed on
the basis of TCP/IP connectionless network layer service (CLNS1) protocol stack.
In addition, to support remote access of the NM through Modem, the IP layer uses serial line
internet protocol (SLIP).

Product Description 5 Functions and Features
5 Functions and Features
About This Chapter
5.1 Electrical Layer Grooming

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the integrated grooming of electrical layer signals.
5.2 Optical Layer Grooming
5.3 Transmission System
5.4 Protection
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides various types of equipment-level protection and network-
level protection.
5.5 Data Characteristics
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the Ethernet features and mainly supports the following
Ethernet services: EPL, EVPL (QinQ), and EPLAN.
5.6 Optical Power Management
The optical power management includes IPA, IPA of Raman System, IPA of PID, ALC, APE
, EAPE, OPA and AGC.
5.7 OTN Technologies
OTN technologies cover electrical-layer access, optical-layer access, mapping, multiplexing,
cross-connection, and protection.
5.8 WDM Technologies
This chapter describes the WDM technologies and functions implemented on the OptiX OSN
8800 T16.
5.9 Clock Synchronization Solutions
This section describes the clock synchronization solutions used by the OptiX OSN 8800in
different scenarios.
5.10 ASON Management
An automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new-generation optical transmission
network.
5.11 Transmission of Network Management Information
There are three communication modes: HWECC, OSI over DCC, IP over DCC.

5.12 Network Management Tools and Protocols

The NM system manages alarm, performance, configuration, communication, security, and
topology of the entire optical transmission system.
5.13 License Control
When creating the NE or the slave subrack on the U2000, you need to configure license. The
U2000 distributes the license files to the corresponding NEs. In this manner, the management
of service capacity and service types is realized.
5.14 Features of Upgrade and Maintenance

5.1 Electrical Layer Grooming

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the integrated grooming of electrical layer signals.
5.1.1 OTN Centralized Grooming

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides cross-connect boards to achieve centralized cross-
connections and supports full cross-connections between slots IU1-IU8, IU11-IU18 with a cross-
connect capacity of 40 Gbit/s for each slot. The equipment has a cross-connect capacity of 640
Gbit/s and supports centralized cross-connections of ODUflex, ODU0, ODU1, ODU2, and
ODU3 signals.
Centralized Grooming
Table 5-1 lists the services supported by the tributary board and the line board centralized
grooming.
Table 5-1 Services supported by the tributary board and the line board centralized grooming
Board Centralized Grooming
TN52ND2 ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals, ODU2/

ODU2e signals
TN53ND2 ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals, ODU2/

ODU2e signals, ODUflex signals
TN53NS2 ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals, ODU2/

TN54NS3 ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals, ODU2/

ODU2e signals, ODU3 signals
TN54NQ2 ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals, ODU2/

ODU2e signals
TN53NQ2 ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals, ODU2/

TN52TDX ODU2/ODU2e signals
TN53TDX ODU2/ODU2e signals, ODUflex signals
TN52TQX ODU2/ODU2e signals

TN53TQX
TN55TQX ODU2/ODU2e signals, ODUflex signals
TN52TOM ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals
TN54TOA ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals

, ODUflex signals
TN54THA ODU0 signals, ODU1 signals

Board Centralized Grooming
TN52TOG ODU0 signals
TN53TSXL ODU3 signals
Application of Electrical-Layer Grooming

Three types of typical application are supported by electrical grooming, for detail, see Figure
5-1.
l Passing through on the client side: The services are input from a client-side port of the local
station and are output through another client-side port. This is, the services are not
transmitted through the fiber line.
l Adding and dropping on the client side: The services of the other stations are transmitted
through the fiber to a WDM-side port of the local station, and then are output through a
client-side port, or the client services are input from the local station and are transmitted to
the other station through the fiber.
l Passing through on the line side: The services are not added or dropped at the local station.
The local station functions as a regeneration station and sends the services from one side
of the fiber line to the other side.

TOG
TQX
TOM
ND2 NQ2
MUX/
DMUX ND2 ND2 MUX/
Cross-Connect
DMUX
Unit
ND2 NS3
TSXL
TOM
TDX
:Adding and dropping on the client side

:Passing through on the client side
:Passing through on the line side
5.2 Optical Layer Grooming

Distribution solutions of medium wavelength resource of WDM equipment are as follows:

l Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer (FOADM)

l Reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM)
The FOADM solution cannot adjust the distribution of wavelength resource according to the
service development.
The ROADM solution realizes reconfiguration of wavelengths by blocking or cross-connecting
of wavelengths. This ensures that the static distribution of the wavelength resource is flexible
and dynamic. ROADM with U2000 can remotely and dynamically adjust the status of
wavelength adding/dropping and passing through. A maximum of 80 wavelengths can be
adjusted.
In the case where one link, fiber or dimension fails in the ROADM solution, other links, fibers
and dimensions remain unaffected. This is attributed to three factors: gain locking of optical
amplifiers, service separation and wavelength blocking of the ROADM solution.
The ROADM solution has the following advantages:
5.2.1 Grooming Ability

This section describes the optical-layer service grooming capability of ROADM sites as shown
in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Optical-Layer grooming capability

Item Description
Number of Grooms a maximum of 80 wavelengths.

wavelengths
Rate Supports grooming of wavelengths at the rate of 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s,

40 Gbit/s, and 100 Gbit/s.
Dimension Supports service grooming of two to nine dimensions.

NOTE
Dimensions refer to transmission directions.
Scenario l Colored & Directioned

l Colored & Directionless
l Colorless & Directionless
5.2.2 Basic Concept

ROADM application scenarios include colored&directioned, colored&directionless, and
colorless&directionless. For concepts about colored, colorless, directioned, and directionless,
see Table 5-3.

Table 5-3 Basic Concept

Concep Description Application
t
Colored The M40, D40, and M40V boards are l Colored add/drop ports(fixed
used to add and drop wavelengths. Each wavelength) have the advantages
add port or drop port can add or drop of lower insertion loss and lower
fixed wavelengths only. cost. If new wavelengths need to
replace the existing wavelengths, a
ROADM
site visit is necessary to connect the
line card/OTU colored port to the
matching add/drop port.
D40 M40
l On an ASON network, the services
can be rerouted only on the same
O O wavelength, so the wavelengths
T T may be blocked.
U U
Colorles The WSM9 and WSD9 boards are used l Colorless add/drop ports(tunable)
s to add and drop wavelengths. Any allow remotely provisioned
wavelengths can be added at a port on the reconfigurability of the ROADM.
board and dropped at the port. However, the OTU/line boards
ROADM must be installed in the subrack in
order to automatically provision
WSM9 WSD9
new services. If the OTU/line
boards are not physically present in
WSM9 WSM9 WSD9 WSD9
the subrack, a site visit is necessary
O O O O O O O O to install the required boards for
T T T
T
U U
T
U
T
U U
T
U U
T
U
the new services.
l On an ASON network, if a
wavelength-tunable OTU or line
board is used in the colorless
scenario, service wavelengths can
be flexibly converted during
rerouting to avoid a wavelength
congestion.
Directio A local wavelength carrying services can l In a directioned scenario, the

ned be transmitted to a specific direction. current path cannot be adjusted
To Direction 1 flexibly. If the current path must be
adjusted, a site visit is required to
adjust the fiber connections for the
IN OUT network.
ROADM l A directioned scenario applies to
DMx AMx non-ASON networks.
Local Service

Concep Description Application

t
Directio A local wavelength carrying services can l On a non-ASON network, the

nless be transmitted to any directions. current path cannot be
To direction 1 To direction x automatically adjusted in the
directionless scenario. When
services are adjusted or the
AM1 DM1 AMx DMx protection path is used in case of a
faulty working path, manually
ROADM
configure optical cross-
OUT IN connections to achieve flexible
service grooming.
Local Service l On an ASON network, the
rerouting function automatically
finds a path and automatically
creates an optical cross-
connection.
5.2.3 1-Degree ROADM

This configuration generally applies to a terminal node. Services are not interrupted during
expansion.
NOTE
The WSMD4 in the figure below can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, WSMD2 , or
WSMD9.
The WSMD2 board supports only a 40-channel system, and other board groups support 80-channel systems.
Figure 5-2 1-degree ROADM application


On a 2-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in two directions. To smoothly
upgrade a network to one with over four degrees, configure RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, or
WSMD9.
NOTE
The WSMD4 in the figure below can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9, WSMD2 , or
WSMD9.
The WSMD2 supports only a 40-channel system, and other board groups support 80-channel systems.
Colored & Directioned Scenario
Figure 5-3 Colored & directioned scenario of the 2-degree ROADM application

Colored & Directionless Scenario
Figure 5-4 Colored & directionless scenario of the 2-degree ROADM application

On a 3-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in three directions. To smoothly
WSMD9.
NOTE
The WSMD4 in the figure below can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9 , or WSMD9.

Local services are added to the WSMD4 through the AM1 port and then transmitted to the south
through the OUT port. Services from the west and east pass through the AM2 and AM4 ports
on the WSMD4 and head south.
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions west, south, and east, three groups
of M40+D40 must be configured, so each group corresponds to one direction.


Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, or east.
l To adjust the current path (for example, when services are adjusted or the protection path
is used in case of a faulty working path), manually configure optical cross-connections to
achieve flexible service grooming.
l On an ASON network, the rerouting function automatically finds a path and automatically
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure proper service transmission on NE1. In the
colored scenario, only the same wavelength can be used for service rerouting.
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction west, north, or east, only
one group of M40+D40 is required.

Colorless & Directionless Scenario

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, or east.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure proper service transmission on NE1. If a
wavelength-tunable OTU or line board is used in the colorless scenario, service
wavelengths can be flexibly converted during rerouting to avoid a wavelength congestion.

Figure 5-7 Colorless & directionless scenario of the 3-degree ROADM application

On a 4-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in four directions. To smoothly
WSMD9.
NOTE
The WSMD4 in the figure below can be replaced with the RDU9+WSM9, WSD9+WSM9 , or WSMD9.

Local services are added to the WSMD4 board through the AM1 port and then transmitted to
the south through the OUT port. Services from the west, east, and north pass through the AM2,
AM3, and AM4 ports on the WSMD4 board, heading for the south.
In this scenario, to cross-connect services on NE1 in directions west, north, east, and south, four
groups of M40+D40 must be configured, so each group corresponds to one direction.


Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, east, or south.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service transmission on NE1. In the
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction west, north, east, or south,
only one group of M40+D40 is required.


Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in direction west, north, east, or south.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service transmission on NE1. If a


On a 9-degree ROADM network, services can be transmitted in nine directions. Each node must
use RDU9+WSM9 boards, WSD9+WSM9 boards, or WSMD9 boards

Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in nine directions.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service transmission on NE1. In the
In this scenario, to cross-connect local services on NE1 in direction 1 to direction 9, only one
group of M40+D40 is required.


Services on NE1 can be transmitted along paths in nine directions.
creates an optical cross-connection to ensure correct service transmission on NE1. If a

5.3 Transmission System
5.3.1 Integrated System and Open System Compatibility

The OptiX OSN 8800 can realize the compatibility of the integrated and open DWDM systems.
The open DWDM system is configured with OTUs to convert non-standard wavelengths into
ITU-T G.694.1-compliant wavelengths.
The integrated DWDM system does not need OTUs when its client-side equipment (for example,
the SDH equipment) has optical transmitter interfaces that comply with ITU-T G.694.1.

l In the integrated DWDM system, if the optical specifications of the accessed signals of the
client equipment comply with the system specifications for the OptiX OSN 8800, the VOA
board, the MUX board with the built-in EVOA, or the ROADM board can be used to
equalize the optical power of the accessed signals.
l In the integrated DWDM system, the dispersion tolerance of the accessed signals of the
client equipment should not be smaller than the dispersion tolerance of the OTU board used
in the OptiX OSN 8800 to meet the requirement of the system dispersion compensation for
the transmission fiber.
l The integrated DWDM system is not recommended in view of factors such as equipment
operation, maintenance, and fault locating.
5.3.2 40 Gbit/s
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides a 40/80 x 40 Gbit/s transmission solution.
l 40 Gbit/s non-coherent transmission solution
Figure 5-13 shows the a typical application of the 40 Gbit/s non-coherent transmission
solution.
Figure 5-13 Typical application of the 40 Gbit/s transmission solution
OTU 40/80x40 Gbit/s OTU

M M
U DCM DCM DCM U ODU3
ODU3
X X
Client / / Client
services T N N T services
D D
M M
U U
T N X X N T
ODU2/ODU1/ODU0 ODU2/ODU1/ODU0
T: Tributary boards N: Line boards
5.3.3 3.1.5 10 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, 100 Gbit/s Hybrid Transmission

With the emergence of service requirements, the existing 10 Gbit/s WDM transmission system
may be gradually upgraded to the 40 Gbit/s transmission system. When this occurs, the hybrid
transmission of the 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals becomes very important.
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports hybrid transmission of 10 Gbit/s signals, 40 Gbit/s non-coherent
signals, 40 Gbit/s coherent signals, and 100 Gbit/s coherent signals, and any of their
combinations. Thanks to this feature, the incumbent networks can be upgraded to ones with
larger capacity based on proper system designs of system performance parameters, protecting
operators' investments while addressing the increasing bandwidth demands. Figure 5-14 shows
hybrid transmission of 100 Gbit/s, 40 Gbit/s, and 10 Gbit/s signals.

Figure 5-14 Hybrid transmission of 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals in the non-coherent system
10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s
T N N T
10 Gbit/s M M 10 Gbit/s
OTU U DCM DCM DCM U OTU
X X
/ / Client
Client D D services
services M M
40 Gbit/s U U 40 Gbit/s
OTU OTU
X X
40 Gbit/s 40 Gbit/s
T N N T
T: Tributary boards N: Line boards
5.3.4 Transmission Distance

l For 40 Gbit/s rate in the 40-wavelength system, a maximum of 20 x 22 dB transmission
without electrical regenerator is supported.
l For 2.5 Gbit/s rate, a maximum of 25 x 22 dB transmission without electrical regenerator
is supported.
l For 10 Gbit/s rate system, supports a maximum of 1 x 82 dB single-span ultra long-distance
transmission.
l For the CWDM systems, a maximum of 80 km transmission distance is supported.
Huawei OSN series WDM equipment supports various links or spans based on different
modulation schemes for systems with diversified channel spacing.
Table 5-4 2.5 Gbit/s system span
Channel Spacing Modulation Scheme 22 dB Span
100 GHz NRZ 25 x 22 dB
Table 5-5 10 Gbit/s system span
100 GHz DRZ 32 x 22 dB

NRZ 27 x 22 dB
NRZ (XFP) 27 x 22 dB
50 GHz DRZ 25 x 22 dB
NRZ 22 x 22 dB
NRZ (XFP) 22 x 22 dB
Table 5-6 40 Gbit/s system span

100 GHz DQPSK 20 x 22 dB
50 GHz ODB 8 x 22 dB
DQPSK 18 x 22 dB
5.4 Protection
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides various types of equipment-level protection and network-
level protection.
5.4.1 Equipment Level Protection

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides 1+1 Protection for cross-connect, SCC, and clock units,
DC input protection, redundancy protection for fans and inter-subrack communication
protection.
5.4.1.1 1+1 Protection for Cross-Connect, SCC, and Clock Boards

The cross-connect boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 integrate the cross-connect, clock, and
SCC units, and they support 1+1 protection.
l Cross-Connect 1+1 Protection: Service boards receive signals and process overheads.
Then, the boards transmit the signals to the active and the standby XCHs. The active and
the standby XCHs send the data after cross-connection to service boards. Service boards
select the data from the XCHs. Configuration of the active XCH is the same as the
configuration of the standby XCH. The two boards are independent of each other. Forcible
switching can be performed between the two boards without affecting the existing services.
The cross matrix of the active XCH is the same the cross matrix of the standby XCH. When
the standby XCH receives information about abnormal active XCH or when the NM system
issues a switching command, the standby XCH takes over the work from the active XCH,
sets itself to be in working status, and reports a switching event.
l SCC 1+1 Protection: The service boards receive signals and process overheads. Then, the
boards transmit the overheads to both the active and the standby SCCs. The active and the

standby SCCs send the data after overhead processing to service boards. The service boards
select the data according to the status of SCCs. Configuration of the active SCC is the same
as the configuration of the standby SCC. The two boards are independent of each other.
The communication between SCCs and other boards is performed mainly through Ethernet.
When the status is normal, the data on service boards and the standby SCC is from the
active SCC. There is no inter-board communication between the standby SCC and service
boards. Only when the standby SCC is in the working mode, it has inter-board
communication with other boards.
l STG 1+1 Protection: The two STGs serve as mutual backups. When both of them are
normal, one of them functions as the active board, and the other functions as the standby
board. Service boards select the clock source according to the status of the two STGs. When
the active STG is faulty, a active/standby switching occurs. Then, the standby STG becomes
active, and the services boards select the clock from the current active STG according to
the status of the two STGs.
When a cross-connect, SCC, or clock unit undergoes switching, the entire cross-connect board
also undergoes switching. That is, these units must undergo switching at the same time.
There are two types of switching for the 1+1 protection switching:
l Automatic switching
The STG detects its own status through hardware or software. If it is in the abnormal status,
a switching is performed automatically. The switching is performed by the board and no
manual operation is required.
l Manual switching
When a switching is required in a test during the normal running of the active and the
standby STGs, the switching can be performed manually.
5.4.1.2 SCC Board 1+1 Protection
The SCC adopts 1+1 backup.
The service boards receive signals and process overheads. Then, the boards transmit the
overheads to both the active and the standby SCCs. The active and the standby SCCs send the
data after overhead processing to service boards. The service boards select the data according
to the status of SCCs. Configuration of the active SCC is the same as the configuration of the
standby SCC. The two boards are independent of each other.
The communication between SCCs and other boards is performed mainly through Ethernet.
When the status is normal, the data on service boards and the standby SCC is from the active
SCC. There is no inter-board communication between the standby SCC and service boards. Only
when the standby SCC is in the working mode, it has inter-board communication with other
boards.
When the active SCC is in normal status, the standby SCC is in backup status. When the standby
SCC receives information about abnormal active SCC or when the NM system issues a switching
command, the standby SCC takes over the work from the active SCC, sets itself to be in working
status, and reports a switching event.
There are two types of switching for the 1+1 protection switching of SCCs:
l Automatic switching

The SCC detects its own status through hardware or software. If it is in the abnormal status,
a switching is performed automatically. The switching is performed by the board and no
manual operation is required.
l Manual switching
When a switching is required in a test during the normal running of the active and the
standby SCCs, the switching can be performed manually.
5.4.1.3 DC Input Protection
The power supply system supports two -48 V DC power inputs for mutual backup. Therefore,
the equipment remains normal when any of the two DC inputs is faulty.
5.4.1.4 Redundancy Protection for Fans
In the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 system, the speed of fans in each partition is regulated independently
and the failure of any fan does not affect the other fans.
5.4.1.5 Inter-Subrack Communication Protection
Subracks of an NE can be cascaded in various modes. When subracks are cascaded to form a
ring, the NE provides working and protection Ethernet communication channels for
communication between the master and slave subracks. In this case, when the working channel
is faulty, services are switched to the protection channel, achieving protection for inter-subrack
communication.
5.4.2 Network Level Protection

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides various network protection schemes, including WDM protection
schemes and a great variety of data service protection schemes.
For principles of the protections, refer to the Feature Description.
The security and survivability of a network can be further enhanced through an automatic
switched optical network (ASON), which is generally referred to as intelligent optical network.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. On a mesh
network, to make the interrupted services available, you can immediately restore the services
through the rerouting mechanism in addition to the traditional protection scheme such as 1+1
protection and shared protection scheme such as ODUk SPRing. That is, the mesh network can
support traditional protection schemes, dynamic restoration of services, and service restoration
mechanisms in case of protection failures. In this manner, services are not interrupted if the
resources are available.
For principles of the ASON protections, refer to the ASON User Guide.
5.4.2.1 WDM Protection

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides various types of WDM protection, as listed in Table 5-7.
For principles of the protections, refer to the Feature Description.

Table 5-7 WDM protection
Category Sub-Category Description
Optical line Optical line It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the
protection protection OLP board to protect line fibers between adjacent stations
by using diverse routing.
Optical Client-side 1+1 It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the
channel protection OLP/DCP/SCS board to protect the OTU and the OCh
protection fibers.
Intra-board 1+1 It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the
protection OTU/OLP/DCP board to protect the OCh fibers by using
diverse routing.
SNCP SW SNCP The intra-board cross-connections on the TOM board

Protection implement the dual fed and selective receiving function.
In this manner, the SW SNCP protection protects the OCh
fiber.
ODUk SNCP It uses the dual fed and selective receiving function of the
protection electrical layer grooming to protect the line board and the
OCh fibers. The cross-connect granularity is ODU0
signals, ODU1 signals, ODU2 signals and ODU3 signals.
Tributary Protects the tributary service by using the dual-fed and

SNCP selectively-receiving function at the electrical cross-
connect layer. The cross-connect granularity is ODU0
signals, ODU1 signals, ODU2 signals and ODU3 signals.
VLAN SNCP Uses the dual-fed selective receiving function of a L2

protection module to protect Ethernet services. The protection
granularity is the service with VLAN.
ODUk ODUk SPRing It applies to the ring network with distributed services.
SPRing protection This protection uses two different ODU1 or ODU2
protection channels to achieve the protection of multiple services
between all stations.
OWSP OWSP It applies to the ring networks. This protection uses two
different wavelengths to achieve the protection of one
wavelength of service between all stations.
ASON Optical-layer Protects services of OCh wavelength level.

protection ASON
Electrical-layer Protects services of ODUk wavelength level.

ASON
5.4.2.2 Data Protection

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides various types of data protection, as listed in Table 5-8.
For details on the working principle of each type of protection, see the Feature Description.

Table 5-8 Data protection
Protect Description
ion
DBPS DBPS protection works with Ethernet ring protection to protect the links between
protecti Ethernet boards and BRAS, and also protect services at 10GE and GE ports on
on Ethernet boards.
Etherne Based on the traditional Ethernet mechanism and APS protocol specific to a ring
t ring network, Ethernet ring protection achieves fast protection switching of an Ethernet
protecti ring network.
on
LAG An LAG binds multiple links on the same equipment, increasing the bandwidth
and improving link reliability.
STP and When the STP or RSTP is running, it modifies the logical network topology to
RSTP avoid a broadcast storm. The RSTP can achieve link protection by restructuring
the network topology.
MSTP In the case of a user Ethernet network with a loop, MSTP can generate a tree
topology by VLAN IDs of Ethernet packets to avoid a broadcast storm, and can
also achieve load sharing by VLAN IDs of user packets.
LPT The link state pass through (LPT) is used to detect and report the faults that occur
at the service access node and in the intermediate transmission network. The LPT
notifies the equipment at two ends in the transmission network of starting the
backup network at the earliest time for communication, thus making sure the
normal transmission of the important data.
5.5 Data Characteristics

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the Ethernet features and mainly supports the following
Ethernet services: EPL, EVPL (QinQ), and EPLAN.
5.5.1 Service
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the Ethernet private lien (EPL), Ethernet private local area
network (EPLAN), and Ethernet virtual private line (EVPL, or QinQ) services. It saves
bandwidth resources while achieving dynamic sharing of Ethernet services among multiple
points.
EPL Service
The EPL services can also be classified into the EPL service based on port and the EPL service
based on port plus VLAN.
l EPL service based on port is intended for point-to-point transparent transmission of
Ethernet services. As shown in Figure 5-15, the Ethernet services from different NEs are
transmitted to the destination node through separate VCTRUNKs. Then the data from
different NEs can be transmitted in a reliable and secure manner.

Figure 5-15 EPL service based on port
l EPL service based on port plus VLAN is intended for convergence of Ethernet services.
For this type of an EPL service, a specific port or VCTRUNK can be shared. When a specific
port is shared by multiple services, the port resources can be saved, as shown in Figure
5-16. When a specific VCTRUNK is shared by multiple services, the VCTRUNK resources
can be saved, as shown in Figure 5-17.
NOTE
On the NE, the number of VLAN services cannot exceed 32768.
Figure 5-16 Port-shared EPL service
Figure 5-17 VCTRUNK-shared EPL service
EPLAN Service
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports Layer 2 switching of Ethernet data, that is, EPLAN.

The concept of virtual bridge or various bridge (VB) is originally presented by Huawei.
According to the definition, each VB adopts an independent configuration mode. Each VB uses
one VLAN but different VBs may use the same VLAN.
In the system, one or more VBs can be set up on each NE and a MAC address table can be
created on each VB. The MAC address table for each VB can be updated through system self-
learning. Then the accessed data can be transmitted through different VCTRUNKs according to
the destination MAC addresses.
The EPLAN service is intended to dynamically share Ethernet services at multiple points. The
EPLAN service conforms to the dynamic feature of data services and saves the bandwidth
resources. For details, see Figure 5-18.
NOTE
On the NE, the number of VLAN services cannot exceed 32768.
Figure 5-18 EPLAN service
EVPL (QinQ) Service

The EVPL (QinQ) service is intended to achieve "VLAN ID in VLAN ID". As the number of
network users continues to increase, the original VLAN IDs are not sufficient. The EVPL (QinQ)
service can solve this problem by identifying users with multi-layer VLAN IDs, and extending
VLAN IDs.
As a LAN technology, VLAN develops with the Ethernet switch technology. As the Ethernet
technology is widely used on networks (MAN Ethernet) of operators, using IEEE 802.1q VLAN
IDs to identify users and isolate the data is restricted. According to IEEE 802.1q, the VLAN tag
field contains only 12 bytes, which can indicate a maximum of 4,000 VLANs. In the MAN
Ethernet, however, the number of users far exceeds this maximum number.
To increase the number of VLANs, the QinQ technology is developed. According to the QinQ
technology, an IEEE 802.1q tag is attached to an IEEE 802.1q packet to increase the number of
VLAN IDs to 4,000 x 4,000. With the development of the MAN Ethernet and the requirements
of operators on elaborate operation, the QinQ technology can be used in more scenarios. The
inner and outer tags indicate different information. The inner tag (the C-VLAN) indicates the
client, and the outer tag (the S-VLAN) indicates the service. For details, see Table 5-9.

Table 5-9 EVPL (QinQ) service
Operation Description Illustration
Sticking (and The SVLAN tag is stuck (and

stripping) the stripped) based on thr port. Data Data S-VLAN
SVLAN tag
Sticking (and The SVLAN tag is stuck (and

Data C-VLAN Data C-VLAN S-VLAN
stripping) the stripped) based on the port
SVLAN tag and CVLAN.
Transparently The CVLAN tag is

transmitting the transparently transmitted. Data C-VLAN Data C-VLAN
CVLAN tag
Transparently The SVLAN is transparently

Data S-VLAN Data S-VLAN
transmitting the transmitted.
SVLAN tag
Switching the The CVLAN tag is switched

Data C-VLAN1 Data C-VLAN2
CVLAN tag based on the port.
Switching the The SVLAN tag is switched

SVLAN tag based on the port. Data S-VLAN1 Data S-VLAN2
Transparently The CVLAN+SVLAN tag is Data C-VLAN S-VLAN

Data C-VLAN S-VLAN
transmitting the transparently transmitted.
CVLAN+SVLAN
taga
Switching the The SVLAN tag is switched Data C-VLAN S-VLAN2

Data C-VLAN S-VLAN1
SVLAN taga based on port+CVLAN
+SVLAN.
a: The EGSH board does not support this type of service.
Transit EVPL (MPLS) Service

Transit EVPL (MPLS) service is the service with MPLS tag switching and forwarding.
The service packets that are forwarded by the router should pass through the network that consists
of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 equipment. To transparently transmit the service packets that are
transmitted from the PE router, the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 equipment create an end-to-end tunnel
on the PE routers. In details, the PE routers function as the ingress and egress nodes, and the
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 equipment functions as transit node.

5.5.2 QoS
Quality of service (QoS) defines the expected class of service, in terms of bandwidth, delay,
delay variation, and packet loss ratio, which should be guaranteed under all circumstances in a
communication network. This ensures that the request and response of an application meets the
expected class of service.
On a traditional IP network, all packets are treated the same way. Every router uses the first in
first out (FIFO) policy to process packets, and makes its best effort to transmit packets to the
destination; however, packet transmission performance, such as reliability and delay, are not
ensured.
To support voice, video, and data services that have different service requirements, a network
must be able to differentiate communication types and provide relevant service.
For a transmission where prioritized queues are used to support QoS, one of the egress queues
is set as a strict-priority (SP) queue, so that packets in this queue are always groomed with the
highest priority. This setting meets the requirements of key service packets. The other egress
queues adopt the weighted round robin (WRR) grooming algorithm so that packets in each queue
can obtain a certain period of service.
The Ethernet service processing boards provide the QoS function. By providing dedicated
bandwidths, lowering the packet loss ratio, and reducing the packet transmission delay and delay
jitter, the QoS function helps provide different classes of service for different customers.
The QoS function complies with the following standards: IETF RFC2697, RFC2698, RFC2309,
RFC2597, RFC2598, and IEEE802.1p.
5.5.3 OAM
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 provides rich OAM functions to monitor services, detect faults, and
identify faults at each service layer.
5.5.3.1 ETH-OAM
ETH-OAM improves the Ethernet Layer 2 maintenance method and provides powerful
maintenance functions for service connectivity verification, deployment commissioning, and
network fault location.
The ETH-OAM is a protocol based on the MAC layer. It checks Ethernet links by transmitting
OAM protocol packets. The protocol is independent from the transmission medium. The OAM
packets are processed only at the MAC layer, having no impact on other layers on the Ethernet.
In addition, as a low-rate protocol, the ETH-OAM protocol occupies low bandwidth. Therefore,
this protocol does not affect services carried on the link.
Comparison between ETH-OAM and the maintenance and fault locating method on the existing
network:
l The current frame test method is based on only the encapsulation format where the same
type of data is contained. This test method is not applicable to other encapsulation formats
(such as GFP encapsulation format and HDLC encapsulation format) where different types
of data is contained.
l The current port loopback function focuses on all packets at the port. The loopback cannot
be performed for a specific service selectively.

l ETH-OAM can detect hardware faults.

l ETH-OAM can detect and locate faults automatically.
Huawei Ethernet service processing boards realize the ETH-OAM function that complies with
IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah. The combination of IEEE 802.1ag and IEEE 802.3ah provides
a complete Ethernet OAM solution.
The IEEE 802.1ag OAM function can be achieved through the continuity test, loopback test,
link trace test, and OAM_Ping test.
l The link trace (LT) test is used to locate the faulty point.
l The loopback (LB) is used to test the link state bidirectionally.
l The continuity check (CC) is used to test the link state unidirectionally.
l The OMA_Ping test is used to test the in-service packet loss ratio and hold-off time.
IEEE 802.3ah OAM is realized through the OAM auto-discovery, link performance detection,
fault locating, remote loopback, self-loop test, and loop port shutdown.
l The OAM auto-discovery is used to check whether the opposite end supports the IEEE
802.3ah OAM protocol.
l The link performance monitoring is used to monitor the BER performance.
l The fault detection is used to detect faults and inform the opposite end of the detected faults.
l The remote loopback is used to locate fault test the link performance.
l The self-loop test is used to test the self-loop ports.
l The loop port shutdown is used to block self-loop ports to solve the port loop problems.
5.5.3.2 RMON
Remote monitoring (RMON) is intended to monitor performance of Ethernet ports (ports and
VCTRUNK) and collect performance data for fault detection and performance reporting.
RMON supports Ethernet statistics groups and history Ethernet groups as follows:
l Ethernet statistics group: supports real-time statistics and query of packet length and packet
status at an Ethernet port.
l History Ethernet group: supports statistics and query of history performance data such as
packet length and packet status at an Ethernet port. This enables a user to query the history
statistics data at an Ethernet port in a given period.
5.5.3.3 Test Frame

Test frames are data packets used to test connectivity of a network that carries Ethernet services.
Test frames are mainly used to commission Ethernet services during deployment and identify
faults of Ethernet services.
Test frames can be encapsulated in GFP packets. The test frames on interconnected boards must
be encapsulated in the same format.
l GFP packets: GFP management frame format. The packets are sent along the same path as
GFP management frames.

5.6 Optical Power Management

The optical power management includes IPA, IPA of Raman System, IPA of PID, ALC, APE
, EAPE, OPA and AGC.
With the IPA, IPA of Raman System, IPA of PID, ALC, APE, EAPE, OPA and AGC functions,
the WDM equipment of Huawei OSN series provides optical power equalization of all channels,
groups of channels and a particular channel.
For details of the optical power management, see the Feature Description.
5.6.1 Introduction to IPA

The system provides the intelligent power adjustment (IPA) function. When there is a fiber break
on the line, the upstream optical amplifier is shutdown to prevent exposed optical fibers hurting
human body. After the system is recovered, the optical amplifier works normally again.
In a DWDM system, optical fiber break, equipment failure or optical connector removal may
lead to the loss of optical signals. The system provides the IPA function to prevent exposed
optical fibers from harming the human body, especially the eyes, and to avoid a surge on an
optical amplifier. The system can locate and detect where the loss of optical power signals
happens on one or more optical sections on the main optical channel and the optical supervisory
channels. When this occurs it instantly shuts down the upstream optical amplifier. When optical
signals of the system are recovered, normal operation of the optical amplifier is restored.
5.6.2 Introduction to IPA of the Raman System

The power of the pump light from Raman amplifiers is very high. In a system configured with
Raman amplifiers, it is suggested that you configure and enable the IPA function before you
turn on a Raman amplifier. After a fiber cut is detected, shut down the Raman amplifier. As a
result, there is not a strong pump light sent from the LINE interface on the amplifier and the
optical power of the entire line remains at a safe level.
In a DWDM system, optical fiber break, equipment failure or optical connector removal may
lead to the loss of optical signals. The system provides the IPA function to prevent exposed
optical fibers from harming the human body, especially the eyes, and to avoid a surge on an
optical amplifier. The system can locate and detect where the loss of optical power signals
happens on one or more optical sections on the main optical channel and the optical supervisory
channels. When this occurs it instantly shuts down the upstream optical amplifier. When optical
signals of the system are recovered, normal operation of the optical amplifier is restored.
5.6.3 Introduction to ALC

The system provides the automatic level control (ALC) function. When the ALC function is
enabled, the increase in the line attenuation in a section causes a decrease in the input power of
the amplifier in that section. Its output power remains the same. The input and output power of
the downstream amplifiers remains the same.
Optical fiber aging, optical connector aging, or manual factors may lead to abnormal loss of
transmission lines in a DWDM system. When the loss on a line segment increases, all input and
output power is reduced on all downstream amplifiers. The system OSNR deteriorates. At the
same time, the received optical power will also be reduced, and the receiving performance will
be greatly affected. The closer the attenuated segment is to the transmission end, the greater is

the influence on OSNR. Figure 5-19 shows the power changes on optical line amplification
regenerators in case of abnormal loss on optical fiber lines.
If the system power with ALC function, this effect can be minimized. As the loss on a line
segment is increased, the input power on the amplifier is reduced. Due to ALC, the output power
as well as the input and output powers of other downstream amplifiers is not changed, which
result in less influence on the OSNR. The optical power received by the receiver is not changed.
Figure 5-20 shows the power changes on the optical line amplification regenerators in ALC
mode when there is abnormal loss on optical fiber lines.
Figure 5-19 System power without ALC

High line losses
Normal output
Attenuated output
Attenuated input
Figure 5-20 System power with ALC

High line losses
Normal output
Normal input
Attenuated input
NOTE
Normally, two elements might cause the input power change in the optical amplifier:
l The addition and reduction of access channels (multiple channels might be added or dropped at the
same time).
l The abnormal loss in the physical media.
5.6.4 Introduction to APE

The automatic power equilibrium (APE) function automatically detects and adjusts the optical
power along channels on WDM-side ports to ensure the required channel optical power flatness.
If the channel optical power varies and flatness is not maintained to a specified requirement, the
OSNR of the optical transmission line will deteriorate, which will degrade and possibly interrupt
the communication.
In practical applications of a WDM system, the channel optical power flatness at the receive end
may differ greatly from the channel optical power flatness achieved during the deployment
process when there is a change in fiber conditions, as shown in Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21 Change in the channel optical power flatness at the receive end (APE not applied)
Optical power
flatness
Transmit end OLA OADM Receive end OTM
When the optical power of channels at the receive end is unbalanced, the optical power of the
channels must be adjusted to ensure the required optical power flatness. However, manually
adjusting the optical power is not only complex but also has high requirements on users.
The APE function can be used to automatically balance optical power to ensure a certain flatness
of the channel optical power, as shown in Figure 5-22.
Figure 5-22 Change in the channel optical power flatness at the receive end (APE applied)
Adjusts channel Optical power
optical power flatness
Transmit end OLA OADM Receive end OTM

(Adjustment site) (Detection site)
Detects channel
optical power
Communication
channel between NEs
As shown in the figure above, the APE function applies to both the transmit and receive ends of
the signal. The transmit and receive ends exchange APE protocol frames using an NE
communication channel to deliver APE instructions and advertise APE execution results.
l At the receive end (detection site), the detection unit automatically detects the optical power
of each channel. If the optical power does not meet the requirement, the detection unit
delivers an instruction to the adjustment site requesting the adjustment site to adjust the
channel optical power.
l At the transmit end (adjustment site), the adjustment unit automatically adjusts channel
optical power after receiving the optical power adjustment instruction and informs the
detection site of the power adjustment result.
5.6.5 Introduction to EAPE

The system provides the enhanced automatic power pre-equilibrium (EAPE) function. EAPE
adjustment can be enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality of each channel meets
the preset requirement and that the services are available.
During the operation of a DWDM system, when service signals travel over a certain distance,
the OSNR of each channel of the DWDM system declines. As a result, the quality of the signals
at the receive end does not meet the design requirement. In this case, EAPE adjustment can be
enabled to ensure that the receive-end signal quality of each channel meets the preset requirement
and that the services are available.

5.6.6 Introduction to OPA

The optical power adjustment (OPA) technology is available in the commissioning phase.
In the commissioning phase, after the boards work normally, set the rated optical power values
of OA boards, create the optical cross-connections, and set Power Adjustment Mode to
Auto on the U2000. The software makes calculations, and the internal variable attenuator of the
adjustable board in the cross-connection path is adjusted automatically. The automatic
adjustment ensures that the input power of the OTU board and OA board meet the commissioning
requirements.
Figure 5-23 shows the principle of the OPA function. In the figure, 1 shows that the internal
variable attenuator of the adjustable board is adjusted, and 2 shows that the input power of the
OTU board and OA board meets the commissioning requirements.
Figure 5-23 Principle of the OPA function

2
Optical power
meet the
requirements of
boards
OA OA
ROADM boards
OA OA
1
Adjust optical MUX/ DEMUX boards
power
automatically
OTU boards
5.6.7 Introduction to AGC

The system uses the automatic gain control (AGC) function to implement per-channel gain so
that the gain of a channel is locked regardless of how many optical wavelengths are transported
in a fiber. In this manner, the gain of a channel remains unchanged after one or more channels
are added or dropped, or when optical signal fluctuation occurs in one channel.
The Erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) used by the system works in the gain locking mode.
In this mode, the output optical power of the amplifier changes with the input optical power and
the gain is maintained. When the number of wavelengths changes, the power adjustment time
is within 1 ms in the gain locking mode so that the optical power of other channels remains
unaffected, and a burst bit error can be avoided during the process of adding or dropping
wavelengths.
The EDFA adopted by the system works in the gain locking mode. The amplifier is embedded
with the forward and backward feedback control loops, which dynamically respond to the change

of input optical power. When the change is less than 1 dB, the backward feedback control loop
is enabled to control the power precisely. When the change is more than 1 dB, the forward
feedback control loop is enabled to adjust the power rapidly.
By virtue of the gain locking mode, the system can transmit a single wavelength of signals and
also add or drop wavelengths without affecting services. Due to the embedded suppression
mechanism of the amplifier, if the services suddenly change or the amplifier degrades over a
certain hop, the services over other hops are not affected.
In the extreme situation where only one wavelength is normal and other wavelengths disappear
in the system, the AGC function can ensure that the services over this wavelength are not
affected.
l In the 40-wavelength system, the transmitting optical power of each channel is +4 dB.
When 39 of the 40 wavelengths disappear, the remaining one is not affected.
l In the 80-wavelength system, the transmitting optical power of each channel is +1 dB.
When 79 of the 80 wavelengths disappear, the remaining one is not affected.
The gain locking mode is more effective than the power locking mode in terms of power
efficiency because the pump optical power is always exported according to the utmost capacity
of the system, regardless of the actual number of working wavelengths.
When the number of wavelengths is changing, AGC would ensure the optical power of remain
channels is not affected. It helps to avoid an outburst of bit errors when adding or dropping
channels from the main stream. As shown in Figure 5-24.
Figure 5-24 AGC function implementation
Gain
add Gain is
wavelength Gain
unchanged
drop Gain is
wavelength Gain
unchanged
All optical amplifier boards of OptiX WDM equipment work in AGC mode. The AGC function
is automatically enabled. You do not need to configure it on the U2000.
5.7 OTN Technologies

OTN technologies cover electrical-layer access, optical-layer access, mapping, multiplexing,
cross-connection, and protection.

5.7.1 Frame Format

This section describes the basic structure of an OTN interface and inclusion relationships on
OTN information structure.
Basic Structure of the OTN Interfaces

Figure 5-25 shows the basic structure of the OTN interfaces.
Figure 5-25 Basic structure of the OTN interfaces

Client signal (for example, STM-N, ATM, IP,
Ethernet, OTN ODUk)
OPUk: Optical channel payload unit-k

OPUk
ODUk: Optical channel data unit-k
ODUkP ODUkP: ODUk which provides end-to-end path supervision
ODUk
ODUkT ODUkT: ODUk which provides tandem connection monitoring
OTUk: Completely standardized optical channel transport unit-k
OTUkV OTUk OTUkV OTUk OTUkV: Functionally standardized optical channel transport unit-
k
OCh OChr Och: Optical channel with full functionality
Ochr: Optical channel with reduced functionality
OMS: Optical multiplex section
OMSn OTS: Optical transmission section
OPSn OPS: Optical physical section
OTM: Optical transport module
OTSn
OTM-n.m Full OTM-0.m, OTM-nr.m

functionality OTM Reduced functionality
interface OTM interface
OTM Principal Information Containment Relationships

The optical transport module (OTM-n[r].m) is the information structure of the OTN. The indexes
n and m define the number of supported wavelengths and bit rates at the OTN interfaces. The
index r represents reduced function. Two OTM structures are defined: OTM with full
functionality (OTM-n.m) and OTM with reduced functionality (OTM-0.m, OTM-nr.m).
l OTM with full functionality: OTM-n.m, consists of up to n multiplexed optical channels
and an OTM overhead signal (OOS). The OOS, including the optical channel overhead,
optical multiplexing section overhead, and optical transmission section (OTS) overhead,
is transmitted through the optical supervisory channel (OSC). The OTM-n.m information
structure is used to the OTS layer connections in the OTN. Figure 5-26 shows the principal
containment relationships of the OTM-n.m.

Figure 5-26 OTM-n.m principal containment relationships
Client signal
OPUk OPUk
OPUk
OH payload
ODUk path ODUk OPUk

PMOH
ODUk
ODUk tandem connection ODUkP
TCMOH
OTUk[V] OTUk[V]
OTUk[V] section ODUkT
OH FEC
Och
Och Och payload
OH
OCCo
OCCo
OCCo
OCCo
OCCo
OCG-n.m OCCp OCCp OCCp OCCp OCCp
OMSn
OTM COMMs
OMU-n.m OMSn payload

OH
OTSn
OTM-n.m
OH OTSn payload
OOS
OPUk OH: OPUk overhead OCCo: Optical channel carrier – overhead
ODUk PMOH: ODUk PM overhead OCCp: Optical channel carrier – payload
ODUk TCMOH: ODUk TCM overhead OMSn OH: OMSn overhead
OTUkV OH: OTUkV overhead OTSn OH: OTSn overhead
OTUk OH: OTUk overhead OTM COMMS: OTM general management
OOS: OTM overhead signal communications overhead
l The OTM with reduced functionality does not support the OOS overhead. The information
structure is used to support the optical physical section (OPS) layer connections in the OTN.
The OTM with reduced functionality has two types of structures:
– OTM-0.m: consists of a non-colored optical channel on a single optical span. Figure
5-27 shows the principal containment relationships of the OTM-0.m.

Figure 5-27 OTM-0.m principal containment relationships
Client signal
OPUk OPUk
OPUk
OH payload
ODUk path ODUk OPUk

PMOH
ODUk
TCMOH
OTUk[V] OTUk[V]
OH FEC
Ochr Och payload
OTM-0.m OPS0
OPUk OH: OPUk overhead

ODUk PMOH: ODUk PM overhead
ODUk TCMOH: ODUk TCM overhead
OTUkV OH: OTUkV overhead
OTUk OH: OTUk overhead
– OTM-nr.m: consists of up to n multiplexed optical channels. Figure 5-28 shows the

principal containment relationships of the OTM-nr.m.

Figure 5-28 OTM-nr.m principal containment relationships
Client signal
OPUk OPUk
OPUk
OH payload
ODUk path ODUk OPUk

PMOH
ODUk
TCMOH
OTUk[V] OTUk[V]
OH FEC
Ochr Och payload
OCG-nr.m OCCp OCCp OCCp OCCp OCCp
OTM-nr.m OPSn
OPUk OH: OPUk overhead

ODUk PMOH: ODUk PM overhead
ODUk TCMOH: ODUk TCM overhead
OTUkV OH: OTUkV overhead
OTUk OH: OTUk overhead
OCCo: OCC overhead
5.7.2 OTN Packet Encapsulation

This section describes the mapping paths on the OTN information structure and the OTN signal
transmission mechanism.
OTM Multiplexing and Mapping

Figure 5-29 shows the multiplexing structures and mappings (including wavelength and time
division multiplexing) of various information structures for the OTM of OptiX OSN 8800.

Figure 5-29 OTM multiplexing and mapping of OptiX OSN 8800

Client signal
x 1 ODU3(L) x 1
OTU3[V] OPU3(L) x 16 ODTU13
x1 x4
ODTU23
ODU3(H) OPU3(H) x 1 ODTUG3 x 12
X1 ODTU3.1
x3 ODTU3.9
OTM- X1 x 32/ts
0.m ODTU3.ts
OCCr Ochr x4
Xi ODTU13
1≤i+j+k≤n ODTUG3
X1 ODTU23
OTM- OCG- Xj
OCCr Ochr X1
nr.m nr.m
X1
Xk
OCCr Ochr Client signal
X1 ODU2e(L) x 1 OPU2e(L)
x1
OTU2[V] ODU2(L) x 1 OPU2(L) x4 Client signal
X1 x1 ODTU12
x 1 ODU2(H) x8
X1 OPU2(H) ODTU2.1
OCC Och ODTUG2
x 8/ts
X1 ODTU2.ts
Xi X1 x1
1≤i+j+k≤n Xj OCC Och ODTUG2
x4
ODTU12
OTM- OCG- X1
n.m n.m Xk OCC Och X1 x1 ODU1(L) x 1 Client signal
OTU1[V] OPU1(L)
X1 X1 x 1ODTUG1 x2
x1 ODU1(H) ODTU01
OSC OOS OPU1(H)
OTS, OMS, OCh, COMMS overhead x1 x1 Client signal

ODU0(L) OPU0(L)
x1 x1 Client signal
ODUflex(L) OPUflex(L)
ODTUG: Optical channel Data Tributary Unit Group OCC: Optical channel carrier
OChr: Optical channel with reduced functionality OCCr: Optical channel carrier with reduced
OCh: Optical channel with full functionality functionality
OCG: Optical Carrier Group OSC: Optical supervisory channel
OOS: OTM overhead signal
OTN Types and Bit Rates

Table 5-10 lists the types and bit rates of the OTU.
Table 5-10 OTU types and bit rates

OTU type OTU nominal bit rate OTU bit rate tolerance
OTU1 255/238 × 2 488 320 kbit/s ±20 ppm
OTU2 255/237 × 9 953 280 kbit/s ±20 ppm
OTU3 255/236 × 39 813 120 kbit/s ±20 ppm

NOTE
The nominal OTUk rates are approximately: 2 666 057.143 kbit/s (OTU1), 10 709 225.316 kbit/s
(OTU2) and 43 018 413.559 kbit/s (OTU3).

NOTE
In Table 5-10, each OTUk consists of 4080*4 bytes. Each OPUk payload consists of 3808*4 bytes. The
255/238, 255/237, and 255/236 of the OTUk nominal rates indicate the ratio of the bytes after the FEC
check to the bytes before the FEC check. The supplementary description is as follows:
l OTU1: The ratio of the bytes after the FEC check to the bytes before the FEC check is as follows:
(4080*4)/(3808*4) = 255/238.
l OTU2: 16 columns of stuffing information are added when the STM-64 is mapped to the OPU2 as
payload. Therefore, the ratio of the bytes after the FEC check to the bytes before the FEC check is as
follows: (4080*4)/[(3808-16)*4] = 255/237.
l OTU3: 32 columns of stuffing information are added when the STM-256 is mapped to the OPU3 as
payload. Therefore, the ratio of the bytes after the FEC check to the bytes before the FEC check is as
follows: (4080*4)/[(3808-32)*4] = 255/236.
Table 5-11 lists the types and bit rates of the ODU.
Table 5-11 ODU types and bit rates
ODU type ODU nominal bit rate ODU bit rate tolerance
ODU0 1 244 160 kbit/s ±20 ppm
ODU1 239/238 × 2 488 320 kbit/s ±20 ppm
ODU2 239/237 × 9 953 280 kbit/s ±20 ppm
ODU3 239/236 × 39 813 120 kbit/s ±20 ppm
ODUflex for 239/238 × client signal bit rate client signal bit rate tolerance, with a
CBR client maximum of ±100 ppm
signals
NOTE
The nominal ODUk rates are approximately: 2 498 775.126 kbit/s (ODU1), 10 037 273.924 kbit/s
(ODU2) and 40 319 218.983 kbit/s (ODU3).
NOTE
The value "n" represents the number of tributary slots occupied by the ODUflex(GFP). .
NOTE
In Table 5-11, each ODUk consists of 3824*4 bytes. Each OPUk payload consists of 3808*4 bytes. The
239/238, 239/237, and 239/236 of the ODUk nominal rates indicate the ratio of the ODUk bytes to the
OPUk payload excluding the stuffing information. The supplementary description is as follows:
l ODU1: No stuffing information is added when the STM-16 is mapped to the OPU1 as payload.
Therefore, the ratio of the ODU1 bytes to the OPU1 payload is as follows: (3824*4)/(3808*4) =
239/238.
l ODU2: 16 columns of stuffing information are added when the STM-64 is mapped to the OPU2 as
payload. Therefore, the ratio of the ODU2 bytes to the OPU2 payload excluding the stuffing information
is as follows: (3824*4)/[(3808-16)*4] = 239/237.
l ODU3: 32 columns of stuffing information are added when the STM-256 is mapped to the OPU3 as
payload. Therefore, the ratio of the ODU3 bytes to the OPU3 payload excluding the stuffing information
is as follows: (3824*4)/[(3808-32)*4] = 239/236.
Table 5-12 lists the types and bit rates of the OPU.

Table 5-12 OPU types and bit rates
OPU type OPU Payload nominal bit OPU Payload bit rate tolerance
rate
OPU0 238/239 × 1 244 160 kbit/s ±20 ppm
OPU1 2 488 320 kbit/s ±20 ppm
OPU2 238/237 × 9 953 280 kbit/s ±20 ppm
OPU3 238/236 × 39 813 120 kbit/s ±20 ppm
OPUflex for client signal bit rate client signal bit rate tolerance, with a
CBR client maximum of ±100 ppm
signals
NOTE
The nominal OPUk Payload rates are approximately:1 238 954.310 kbit/s (OPU0), 2 488 320.000 kbit/s
(OPU1 Payload), 9 995 276.962 kbit/s (OPU2 Payload) and 40 150 519.322 kbit/s (OPU3 Payload).
NOTE
In Table 5-12, the ODUk consists of 3824*4 bytes. Each OPUk payload consists of 3808*4 bytes. The
238/239 of the OPU0 payload nominal rates indicate the ratio of the OPU0 payload to the ODU0 bytes.
The 238/237 and 238/236 of the OPUk payload nominal rates indicate the ratio of the OPUk payload to
the OPUk payload excluding the stuffing information. The supplementary description is as follows:
l OPU0: The ratio of the OPU0 payload to the ODU0 bytes is as follows: (3808*4)/(3824*4) = 238/239.
l OPU1: No stuffing information is added when the STM-16 is mapped to the OPU1 as payload.
l OPU2: 16 columns of stuffing information are added when the STM-64 is mapped to the OPU2 as
payload. Therefore, the ratio of the OPU2 payload to the OPU2 payload excluding the stuffing
information is as follows: (3808*4)/[(3808-16)*4] = 238/237.
l OPU3: 32 columns of stuffing information are added when the STM-256 is mapped to the OPU3 as
payload. Therefore, the ratio of the OPU3 payload to the OPU3 payload excluding the stuffing
information is as follows: (3808*4)/[(3808-32)*4] = 238/236.
5.7.3 ODUflex
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the flexible optical data unit flexible (ODUflex) technique. Using
the ODUflex technique, the OptiX OSN 8800 can adapt itself to various services such as video,
storage, and data services, and is able to provide future IP services.
Introduction to ODUflex
OptiX OSN 8800 T64/T32/T16 of earlier versions supports only four types of ODUk mappings:
ODU0 (1.25G), ODU1 (2.5G), ODU2 (10G), and ODU3 (40G). Services can be mapped only
to fixed bandwidth. Therefore, service mapping is not flexible and bandwidth waste may result.
ITU-T defines ODUk with flexible bandwidth (ODUflex for short) to avoid bandwidth waste
caused by service mapping.
ODUflex has the following features:
l The bandwidth required for ODUflex is about N x bandwidth of each ODTUk timeslot (1
≤ N ≤ 8).

l The ODTUk timeslot is the basic unit of ODUk frames and each ODTUk timeslot has the
bandwidth of 1.25Gbit/s.
NOTE
l ODTUk timeslots are basic units of ODUk frame signals. That is, ODUflex signals consist of multiple
ODTUk timeslots. Each ODTUk timeslots provides 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth. One ODU0 signal equals one
ODTUk timeslot and ODU1 signal equals two ODTUk timeslots.
For example, when a 3G-SDI service at a rate of 2.97 Gbit/s is received on the client side, the
bandwidth usage is as follows:
l When ODUflex is not used for service mapping, the mapping path is 3G-SDI -> ODU2 -
> OTU2. In this case, the service occupies all the bandwidth (10 Gbit/s) of ODU2 and
wastes about 7 Gbit/s bandwidth.
l When ODUflex is used for service mapping, the mapping path is 3G-SDI -> ODUflex ->
ODU2 -> OTU2. Only three ODTUk timeslots are occupied and the left five ODTUk
timeslots are available for other services. Each ODTUk timeslot provides 1.25 Gbit/s
bandwidth; therefore, 6.25 Gbit/s (5 x 1.25 Gbit/s) bandwidth is saved.
ODUflex Applications
l Transport of generic CBR signals
ODUflex can be used to transmit constant bit rate (CBR) services on an optical transport
network (OTN). The services whose CBRs are higher than 2.48832 Gbit/s are mapped to
an ODUflex (CBR) container in bit synchronization mode. Functions such as end-to-end
performance monitoring and protection switching are feasible on the ODUflex (CBR)
container. The overheads and monitoring management modes of ODUflex services and
traditional ODUk (k= 0, 1, 2, 3) are the same. For the application scenarios, see Figure
5-30 and Figure 5-31.
Figure 5-30 shows how ODUflex is used to transport generic CBR signals. An FC400
service occupies four ODTUk timeslots and is mapped to an ODUflex container; a 3G-SDI
service occupies three ODTUk timeslots and is mapped to an ODUflex container. In this
way, the FC400 and 3G-SDI services share the same OTU2 wavelength.
Figure 5-31 shows how ODU2 is used to transport generic CBR signals. The FC400 and
3G-SDI services are mapped to different ODU2 containers, and therefore they occupy
different OTU2 wavelengths.
Figure 5-30 Transport of generic CBR signals (ODUflex)

FC400 and 3G-SDI share a same OTU2 wavelength
FC400 FC400
(4 x ODTUk TS) (4 x ODTUk TS)
ODUk XC
ODUk XC
ODUflex ODUflex
HO ODUk
HO ODUk
OTU2 OTU2
OTN Network
3G-SDI 3G-SDI
(3 x ODTUk TS) (3 x ODTUk TS)
ODUflex ODUflex
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side

Figure 5-31 Transport of generic CBR signals (ODU2)
FC400 and 3G-SDI each occupy a OTU2 wavelength

Client Line Line Client
HO ODUk
HO ODUk
FC400 OTU2 OTU2 FC400
ODUk XC
ODUk XC
ODU2 ODU2
OTN Network
HO ODUk
HO ODUk
3G-SDI OTU2 OTU2 3G-SDI
ODU2 ODUflex
ODU2
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
ODUflex Implementation
Figure 5-32 shows how an ODUflex signal is mapped and multiplexed.
Figure 5-32 ODUflex mapping and multiplexing method
Client ODUk.t + ODUk

Overhead
ODUk
Service s MUX
3
BMP Mapping + ODUflex GMP Mapping
1 into OPUflex Overhead 2 into ODUk.ts
1. The client signals are mapped into an OPUflex frame using the bit-synchronous mapping
procedure (BMP) or GPF-F mapping method. The OPUflex frame changes into an ODUflex
frame after it carries an ODUflex frame header.
2. The ODUflex frame is mapped into N ODTUk timeslots by using the generic mapping
procedure (GMP).
3. Multiple ODTUk timeslots are multiplexed into a standard ODUk frame after an ODUk
frame header is inserted.
ODUflex Signal Types

Table 5-13 lists the current boards that support transmission of signals through ODUflex frames.
Table 5-13 ODUflex signal transmission
Applicable Board Encapsulation Client Signal Type ODUflex

Mode Mapping Path
TN11LOA ODUflex(CBR) FC400/FC800/3G- Client signal-

SDI >ODUflex->ODU2-
>OTU2

Applicable Board Encapsulation Client Signal Type ODUflex

Mode Mapping Path
TN54TOA FC400/3G-SDI Client signal-

>ODUflex
TN53TDX, FC800
TN55TQX
TN53NQ2, - ODUflex->ODU2-
TN53ND2, >OTU2
TN53NS2
5.7.4 Mapping and Multiplexing

This section describes how client signals are mapped and multiplexed on Huawei transport
equipment in addition to the mapping paths and required timeslots.
H-L Multiplexing Hierarchy

In the high-order (H) and low-order (L) multiplexing hierarchy, client signals in an OTN system
are sent to the line for transmission after the H-L multiplexing processes. For low-order
multiplexing, a client signal is multiplexed into a low order (LO) ODUk signal. For high-order
multiplexing, an LO ODUk signal is multiplexed into a high order (HO) ODUk signal, which
is then transmitted on the line. Before OptiX OSN 8800 V100R005, client signals are mapped
and multiplexed level by level. For example, to map a client signal into an ODU2 signal, the
client signal must go through the client->ODU0->ODU1->ODU2 process. However, in OptiX
OSN 8800 V100R005 and later versions, which support the H-L multiplexing hierarchy, the
mapping process is simplified as client->ODU0->ODU2.
The following describes how the TN52TOG and TN52ND2 boards map and multiplex client
signals level by level using a GE signal as an example. To map the GE signal into an ODU2
signal before sending the signal into the cross-connect board, the equipment of a version earlier
than V100R005 must perform the client-> ODU0 ->ODU1->ODU2 process, which is marked
as red in Figure 5-33.
Figure 5-33 Level-by-level mapping and multiplexing
OTU3 ODU3 OPU3
x4
OTU2 ODU2 OPU2
x4
OTU1 ODU1 OPU1
x2
OTU0 ODU0 Client
Mapping
Multiplexing

For the equipment of V100R006C01 or a later version, boards such as the LOA board support
H-L multiplexing and can map a client signal into an ODU2 signal according to the client-
>ODU0->ODU2 process. Then the equipment sends the ODU2 signal to the cross-connect
board. The H-L multiplexing process is marked as red in Figure 5-34.
Figure 5-34 H-L mapping and multiplexing

x32
OTU3 ODU3 OPU3
x8
OTU2 ODU2 OPU2
x2
OTU1 ODU1 OPU1
OTU0 ODU0 Client
Mapping
Multiplexing
Mixed Mapping and Multiplexing

The equipment supports mapping and multiplexing of lower order ODUk signals into higher
order ODUk signals. For example, the equipment can map and multiplex a mixture of ODU0
and ODU1 signals into an ODU2 frame.
Each ODUk frame occupies some TS sub-timeslots. TS sub-timeslots may be occupied in the
following modes:
l Completely fixed consecutive occupation: Each ODUk signal occupies a fixed TS sub-
timeslot if hybrid mapping or multiplexing is not supported. For example, the second ODU1
channel occupies TS3 and TS4.
ODU2
ODU1
TS1-TS2
(First channel)
ODU1
TS3-TS4
(Second channel)
ODU1
TS5-TS6
(Third channel)
ODU1
TS7-TS8
(Fourth channel)

l Initially fixed consecutive occupation: The fixed occupation relationships will be changed
after hybrid mapping and multiplexing are supported. For example, ODU1 may occupy
TS5 and TS6.
ODU2
ODU1 (first channel) TS1-TS2
ODU0 (first channel) TS3
ODU0 (second channel) TS4
ODU1 (second channel) TS5-TS6
ODU1 (third channel) TS7-TS8
l Flexible and inconsecutive occupation: Timeslots are assigned more flexibly. For example,
the first ODU1 channel occupies TS2 and TS4, which are inconsecutive timeslots.
ODU2
ODU0 (first channel) TS1

ODU1 (first half of the first
TS2
channel)
ODU0 (second channel) TS3

ODU1 (second half of the
first channel) TS4
ODU1 (second
TS5-TS6
channel)
ODU1 (third channel) TS7-TS8
5.7.5 TCM
Tandem connection monitoring (TCM) is used mainly when the network scale is relatively large
or when network resources are leased to different network carriers. In this case, the TCM is used
to monitor the quality of the transmission channels in a specific network area, for example, a
leased transmission network.
The TCM provides section monitoring for the ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, 3) channel. The main functions
of TCM are as follows:
l Monitoring the tandem connection between optical UNI and UNI, and monitoring the
ODUk connection that traverses public transport network. Users monitor the quality of the
provider network with TCM, which is enabled at the interface nearest to the provider
network.
l Monitoring the tandem connection between optical NNI and NNI, and monitoring the
ODUk connection that passes through carrier network. The network provider monitors the

quality of local network with TCM, which is located at the interfaces on both ends of the
provider network.
l Monitoring the tandem connection of optical channels for fault location or verification of
service delivery quality.
TCM overheads are allocated in three ways: concatenation, embedding, and overlaying. OTU
frame overheads include six levels of TCM overheads, from TCM1 to TCM 6, providing the
following subfields:
l Trial trace identifier (TTI)

l bit interleaved parity 8 (BIP-8)
l Backward defect indication (BDI)
l Backward error indication and backward incoming alignment error (BEI/BIAE)
l Status bits STAT, such as LTC and LCK
The functions of TCM in the network are shown in Figure 5-35. When client services are carried
by different carrier networks, TCM overheads can be used to monitor the network quality.
Figure 5-35 Example of TCM functions
Operator B
network
Operator A Operator A
network network
Domain and domain interconnect supervision (TCM3)

User User
network Lead operator QoS supervision (TCM2) network
User QoS supervision (TCM1)
In this example, three levels of TCM overheads are used to supervise different networks.
l The user uses TCM1 to achieve QoS supervision between optical UNI and UNI.
l The lead operator uses TCM2 to achieve QoS supervision over operator networks.
l Operator A and Operator B use TCM3 to achieve QoS supervision over the local domain
and domain interconnection.
5.7.6 FEC Function

Certain OTUs, tributary boards and line boards have forward error correction (FEC) function
and advanced forward error correction (AFEC) function.
With the FEC and AFEC functions, the OSNR requirements of the system are less at the receive
end. This extends the transmission distance between the optical amplifier section and the
regenerator section.
In addition, the FEC and AFEC help to reduce bit error rate during the transmission. It also
enhances the transmission quality of DWDM networks.

l Standard FEC technology of the OTN network increases the FEC overheads by 7% and
realizes encoding gain 6.2 dB (BER = 1E–15).
l AFEC technology of the OTN network increases the FEC overheads by 7% and realizes
encoding gain more than 8 dB (BER = 1E–15).
NOTE
Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
5.8 WDM Technologies

This chapter describes the WDM technologies and functions implemented on the OptiX OSN
8800 T16.
5.8.1 DWDM and CWDM Technical Specifications

The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports two wavelength division multiplexing technologies: dense
wavelength division multiplexing (DWDM) and coarse wavelength division multiplexing
(CWDM) technologies. This section describes the technical specifications and transmission
capacity of the product using the two technologies.
There are no limits for wavelengths transmitted over G.652, G.654, and G.655 fibers used with
the OptiX OSN 8800 T16. To realize 40-wavelength transmission, the wavelengths transmitted
over G.653 fiber should be within 196.05 THz to 194.1 THz.
l DWDM includes 40-wavelength system and 80-wavelength system. The wavelengths are
in the C band compliant with ITU-T G.694.1.
– Each C-band 40-wavelength system with a channel spacing of 100 GHz can transmit a
maximum of 40 wavelengths. It supports services of 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/
s.
– Each C-band 80-wavelength system with a channel spacing of 50 GHz can transmit a
maximum of 80 wavelengths. It supports services of 10 Gbit/s and 40 Gbit/s.
– C-band 80-wavelength systems consist of even and odd wavelengths. The information
about odd and even wavelengths is provided below:
– C_EVEN: indicates even-numbered wavelengths. In total there are 40 even
wavelengths. The center frequency of the even wavelengths is within the range of
192.100 THz to 196.000 THz (center wavelength is within the range of 1529.55 nm
to 1560.61 nm) and the frequency spacing is 100 GHz.
– C_ODD: indicates odd-numbered wavelengths. In total there are 40 odd
wavelengths. The center frequency of the odd wavelengths is within the range of
192.150 THz to 196.050 THz (center wavelength is within the range of 1529.16 nm
to 1560.20 nm) and the frequency spacing is 100 GHz.
– The 40-wavelength system can be upgraded to the 80-wavelength system smoothly.
l CWDM with a channel spacing of 20 nm can access up to eight wavelengths. It only applies
to services rated at 2.5 Gbit/s. The wavelengths are in the C band compliant with ITU-T
G.694.2.
DWDM wavelengths can be transported in the window of CWDM 1531 nm to 1551 nm to
expand the CWDM system capacity. Figure 5-36 shows the expansion of wavelength allocation.
With this expansion scheme, a CWDM system can transmit a maximum of 26 DWDM
wavelengths at 100 GHz channel spacing. If the DWDM wavelength is 50 GHz in channel
spacing, a CWDM system can transmit a maximum of 50 DWDM wavelengths.

Figure 5-36 DWDM wavelength expansion and allocation in the CWDM system
CWDM DWDM over CWDM DWDM

wavelengths wavelengths
1471nm 1529.55nm
1471nm
1530.33nm
1531.12nm
1491nm 1491nm 1531.90nm

1532.68nm
1533.47nm
1511nm 1511nm 1534.25nm
1529.55nm
- 1535.04nm
1536.61nm 1535.82nm
1531nm 10λ 1535.61nm
1545.32nm
1551nm 16λ
1546.12nm
1545.32nm 1546.92nm
- 1547.72nm
1571nm 1571nm 1557.36nm 1548.51nm
1549.32nm
1550.12nm
1591nm 1591nm 1550.92nm
1551.72nm
1552.52nm
1553.33nm
1611nm 1611nm
1554.13nm
1554.94nm
1555.75nm
1556.55nm
1557.36nm
Figure 5-37 shows the equipment configuration in which DWDM wavelengths are transported
in the window of CWDM 1531 nm to 1551 nm. The DWDM wavelengths need to pass through
the DWDM MUX/DEMUX and CWDM MUX/DEMUX. Hence, the optical amplifier unit
needs to be configured in between.

Figure 5-37 Application of the DWDM wavelength in the CWDM system
OTU
OTU OA
MUX/ MUX/
DEMUX DEMUX
OTU OA
MO M1
OTU MO M1
CWDM
DWDM
5.8.2 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of the DWDM

System
Table 5-14 Wavelengths and frequencies of a C-band 80-channel (spacing of 50 GHz) system
Wavele Central Central Wavele Central Central

ngth Frequency Wavelength ngth Frequency Wavelength
No. (THz) (nm) No. (THz) (nm)
1 196.05 1529.16 41 194.05 1544.92
2 196.00 1529.55 42 194.00 1545.32
3 195.95 1529.94 43 193.95 1545.72
4 195.90 1530.33 44 193.90 1546.12
5 195.85 1530.72 45 193.85 1546.52
6 195.80 1531.12 46 193.80 1546.92
7 195.75 1531.51 47 193.75 1547.32
8 195.70 1531.90 48 193.70 1547.72
9 195.65 1532.29 49 193.65 1548.11
10 195.60 1532.68 50 193.60 1548.51


11 195.55 1533.07 51 193.55 1548.91
12 195.50 1533.47 52 193.50 1549.32
13 195.45 1533.86 53 193.45 1549.72
14 195.40 1534.25 54 193.40 1550.12
15 195.35 1534.64 55 193.35 1550.52
16 195.30 1535.04 56 193.30 1550.92
17 195.25 1535.43 57 193.25 1551.32
18 195.20 1535.82 58 193.20 1551.72
19 195.15 1536.22 59 193.15 1552.12
20 195.10 1536.61 60 193.10 1552.52
21 195.05 1537.00 61 193.05 1552.93
22 195.00 1537.40 62 193.00 1553.33
23 194.95 1537.79 63 192.95 1553.73
24 194.90 1538.19 64 192.90 1554.13
25 194.85 1538.58 65 192.85 1554.54
26 194.80 1538.98 66 192.80 1554.94
27 194.75 1539.37 67 192.75 1555.34
28 194.70 1539.77 68 192.70 1555.75
29 194.65 1540.16 69 192.65 1556.15
30 194.60 1540.56 70 192.60 1556.55
31 194.55 1540.95 71 192.55 1556.96
32 194.50 1541.35 72 192.50 1557.36
33 194.45 1541.75 73 192.45 1557.77
34 194.40 1542.14 74 192.40 1558.17
35 194.35 1542.54 75 192.35 1558.58
36 194.30 1542.94 76 192.30 1558.98
37 194.25 1543.33 77 192.25 1559.39
38 194.20 1543.73 78 192.20 1559.79
39 194.15 1544.13 79 192.15 1560.20


40 194.10 1544.53 80 192.10 1560.61
5.8.3 Nominal Central Wavelengths of the CWDM System
Table 5-15 Nominal central wavelengths of the CWDM system

Wavelengt Wavelength (nm) Wavelength Wavelength (nm)
h No. No.
11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611
5.8.4 Chromatic Dispersion Compensation

The system provides different dispersion compensation solutions to different applications.
For the system that transmits 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, and 40 Gbit/s signals over G.652, G.653 and
G.655 fibers, the fixed dispersion compensation fibers, such as DCM module and DCU board,
can be used to realize whole spectrum compensation with full dispersion slope match.
For the 40 Gbit/s system, the tunable dispersion compensation module embedded in the receive
unit can control residual dispersion compensation automatically.
5.8.5 SBS Suppresses

The spectral width of signals borne on the laser bias in the OptiX OTN product series is increased
to suppress stimulated Brillouin scattering (SBS).
The 2.5 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s, and 40 Gbit/s signals have the same SBS threshold, which is 18 dBm.
The 40 Gbit/s signal is sensitive to nonlinear effects, the maximum launched optical power of
the laser that launches the 40 Gbit/s signal should be limited to 14 dBm. That is:
l In the case of the 2.5 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s signals, the per-channel maximum launched
optical power is 18 dBm.
l In the case of the 40 Gbit/s signal, the per-channel maximum launched optical power is 14
dBm.
5.8.6 Supervisory Channel

The supervisory information between NEs is transmitted over supervisory channels. Supervisory
channels are as follows:

l Optical supervisory channel (OSC)

l Electric supervisory channel (ESC)
In OSC Mode
In OSC mode, the OSC unit (HSC1/SC1/SC2/ST2) needs to work with the FIU/SFIU board.
The wavelength of the supervisory channel is 1491/1510/1511 nm. The OSC, which adopts the
E1 frame structure, can directly transmit two channels of voice signals at the rate of 64 kbit/s.
The external IP management information can be accessed through the 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s
Ethernet ports and can be carried by the OSC.
In a ring or mesh network, when a fiber cut occurs in a certain direction of transmission, the
supervision and management information is automatically switched to the supervisory channel
in another direction. Thus the management of the entire network is not affected.
For the details about the OSC, see 5.11.1.1 Optical Supervisory Channel Administration.
In ESC Mode
In ESC mode, the OTU board, tributary board, and line board multiplex the supervisory
information into the service channel for transmission, requiring no optical supervisory channel
units (HSC1/SC1/SC2/ST2). The OTU board, tributary board, and line board realize the ESC
transmission by using the DCC byte or the associated GCC byte compliant with ITU-T G.709.
The external IP supervisory information can be sent to the system through the 10 Mbit/s or 100
Mbit/s Ethernet port and then carried by the ESC.
The ESC reduces the investment of the OSC. It also avoids the insertion loss of the FIU/SFIU.
This lowers the cost and the power budget of optical channels.
The OptiX OSN 8800 realizes the ESC with GCC0 byte or GCC1 and GCC2 bytes. The
bandwidth occupied by GCC bytes varies according to the line rate (OTU rate level). Table
5-16 lists the specific bandwidths occupied by GCC bytes at different OTU rate levels.
Table 5-16 Bandwidth occupied by GCC bytes at different OTU rate levels
OTU Rate Level GCC Byte Bandwidth
OTU1 GCC0 192 kbit/s
OTU1 GCC1+GCC2 576 kbit/s
OTU2/OTU2e/ GCC0 192 kbit/s

OTU3
OTU2/OTU2e/ GCC1+GCC2 1152 kbit/s

OTU3
5.8.7 DRZ Coding Scheme

The differential phase return to zero (DRZ) coding scheme is highly capable of suppressing the
nonlinearity in a 50 GHz channel-spaced 80-channel system.
In the DRZ coding scheme, input differential signals are used to generate positive and negative
return to zero (RZ) coded pulses. These pulses drive the phase regulator to adjust the phase

difference between every two adjacent RZ pulses to 180º before the signals enter the fiber line
for transmission. This effectively reduces the intersymbol interference of DRZ coding to a degree
that parallels the intersymbol interference tolerance of non return to zero (NRZ) coding.
Therefore, the pulse quality is ensured even in the case of large accumulated dispersion, and the
signals are effectively prevented from distortion caused by dispersion.
The chirping feature is introduced to the DRZ coding scheme. Therefore, the DRZ-coded signals
are highly tolerant of nonlinear effects such as SBS, FWM, SPM, and SRS in the fiber.
5.8.8 ODB Technology

The OTU adopting the optical duobinary (ODB) coding has a narrow optical spectrum, and it
can be used in the system with 50 GHz channel spacing.
The input signals are provided with pre-coding, and the three status code (-1, 0, 1) sequence is
output. The code sequence drive modulator is used to convert electrical signals to optical signals.
On the receive side, a common light intensity detector is used to receive the signals.
The 3 dB bandwidth of ODB is about 25% of the 3 dB bandwidth of NRZ. The spectral efficiency
of ODB is higher than that of NRZ. Therefore, it is suitable for WDM transmission with high
density.
5.8.9 DQPSK Technology

DQPSK is used to transport 40 Gbit/s signal.
DQPSK is a new modulation format. On the transmit side, the input electrical signals are
differentially encoded. Then, the modulator performs quadrature phase shift keying modulation
and outputs the optical signals in four phases: 0, π/2, π, and 3π/2. On the receive side, the modem
differentially decodes the optical signals; the signals are received in an equalized manner. The
receiver sensitivity of the DQPSK modulation format is 3 dB higher than that of the amplitude
modulation format.
DQPSK is a multilevel modulation format in which the bit rate is two times of the baud rate.
Hence, DQPSK is highly suitable for the 40G high-speed transmission system. In the DQPSK
modulation format, the spectrum width is narrow and the output spectrum is smooth. As a result,
the DQPSK modulation format can effectively suppress various nonlinear effects of the fiber.
The phase shift helps reduce the phase-related nonlinear effects (such as SPM, XPM, and FWM)
and enhance the tolerance to chromatic dispersion and polarization mode dispersion. Hence,
DQPSK is a critical modulation format used in the long-haul, high-speed, and large-capacity
optical transmission.
Enhanced DQPSK further elevates the nonlinearity tolerance of the system, and is currently the
best coding technology for 40G ultra long haul transmission.
5.8.10 Tunable Wavelengths

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports tunable wavelengths. It adopts 40 Gbit/s, 10 Gbit/s and 2.5 Gbit/
s OTUs that support tunable wavelengths.
l The 40 Gbit/s and 10 Gbit/s OTUs support tunable wavelengths in up to 80 channels with
50 GHz spacing in C band.
l The 2.5 Gbit/s OTUs support tunable wavelengths in up to 40 channels with 100 GHz
spacing in C band.

In addition, the tunable wavelength OTUs can also function as spare parts to substitute OTUs
of different wavelengths. This reduces the number of OTUs and lowers the cost. When the
wavelength-tunable OTUs work with dynamic optical add/drop multiplexing units, the dynamic
wavelength grooming is realized.
5.8.11 EDFA Technology

The OptiX OTN product series use advanced Erbium-Doped Fibre Amplifier (EDFA)
technology, with varying optical power output and gain to suit different applications related to
long haul transmission, reducing the need for regeneration.
EDFA adopts gain locking technology and transient control technology to make the gain of each
channel independent of the number of channels. Adding or dropping channels does not cause
burst bit error in the existing channels.
The optical amplifiers adopted by the system are capable of amplifying the signals that are spaced
at 100 GHz and 50 GHz in the C band and comply with ITU-T G.694.1.
5.8.12 Raman Amplification

The combination of Raman amplifier and Erbium-doped fiber amplifier (EDFA) realizes
wideband flat gain. The interference of system noise and non-linear effect on the system is
effectively decreased and the transmission distance is increased.
Raman amplifier works 20 to 30 km away from Raman pump laser. If there is optical power loss
higher than 7 dB within a 20-kilometer distance from Raman pump laser, the optical power gain
realized by Raman amplifier decreases and Raman amplifier cannot work normally. If there is
optical power loss higher than 7 dB beyond a 30-kilometer distance from Raman pump laser,
the optical power gain realized by Raman amplifier remains unaffected.
The LSH/APC (E2000/APC) connectors for the RAMAN amplifier are recommended.
5.8.13 Jitter Suppression Function
With a jitter suppression unit between the optical receive module and the optical transmit module,
the OptiX OSN 8800 has excellent jitter suppression function.
5.8.14 Automatic Laser Shutdown
The OTU board and tributary board provide the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
With the ALS function, the OTU board and tributary board can automatically shut down or turn
on the laser based on the condition of the input optical signals to prevent personal injury.
The ALS function applies to the client side of the OTU board and tributary board. This function
can be enabled or disabled through the network management system. The configuration of
optical interface is shown in Figure 5-38 (a).
NOTE
The WDM-side optical interface of the LWXS also supports the ALS function.
The ALS function is realized through the following way:

l When no optical signals are input to the receive optical interface on the client side of the
opposite OTU board, the local OTU board automatically shuts down the laser for the output
optical interface on the corresponding client side, as shown in the Figure 5-38 (b).
l When no optical signals are input to the receive optical interface on the WDM side of the
OTU board, the OTU board automatically shuts down all the lasers for the output optical
interface on the client side with the ALS function enabled, as shown in Figure 5-38 (c).
NOTE
Figure 5-38 shows the ALS function realization of the OTU board with service convergence function. The
ALS function of the OTU board without service convergence function is realized in the same way.
NOTE
The ALS and LPT functions of a board cannot be enabled at the same time.
Figure 5-38 ALS function diagram

Tx
Tx
ALS enabled IN
Tx
Tx
OTU
Rx ALS enabled
Rx OUT
Rx
Rx
client side WDM side
(a)Configuration of optical interfaces
Tx
Rx
Tx
ALS enabled Rx
Tx IN OUT
Rx
Tx Rx
OTU OTU
Rx Tx
Rx Tx
OUT IN ALS enabled
Rx Tx
Rx Tx
Automatic laser
No input optical client side WDM side WDM side client side
shutdown
signals
(b) No signals received on the
client side of the far end
Tx
Rx
Tx
ALS enabled Rx
Tx IN OUT
Rx
Tx Rx
No input optical
OTU signals OTU
Rx Tx
Rx IN ALS enabled Tx
OUT
Rx Tx Automatic laser
Rx Tx
shutdown
client side WDM side WDM side client side
(c) No signals received

on the WDM side

NOTE
The ALS function provided by the OptiX WDM products does not refer to the ALS mentioned in ITU-T
G.664, only that the acronyms of the two are the same.
The ALS function does not support the scenario of service broadcasting.
5.9 Clock Synchronization Solutions

This section describes the clock synchronization solutions used by the OptiX OSN 8800in
different scenarios.
5.9.1 Clock Network Models

This section describes a typical clock network model used by an OTN network.
As shown in Figure 5-39, a complete clock synchronous network consists of frequency/phase

sources, a transport network, and base stations.
Figure 5-39 Typical clock network model

Frequency/Phase Sources Transport Network Base Stations
Slave 1 2
BITS
A
6
1 2 Client Network
Node B
Master
BITS
B OTN Network D 7
4 C
8
3 5 Node B
G
Input of clock signals Transmission Method Output of clock signals

1 2M 4 OSC 6 2M
2 1PPS+TOD 7 1PPS+TOD
3 GE 5 ESC 8 GE/10GE
Optical Cables Cables
BITS OptiX OTN product series Node B
Input of clock signals
Table 5-17 Physical clock synchronization
Mar Frequency source Board Description

k
2M external clock TN16XCH, TN16ATE This method is recommended.

1
signals

GE clock signals TN52TOG, The OptiX OSN 8800 supports

3
over service TN11LEM24, through the GE ports to implement
TN54THA, TN54TOA frequency synchronization.
Table 5-18 IEEE 1588v2 synchronization

Mar Phase source Board Description
k
1PPS+TOD time TN16XCH, TN16ATE This method is recommended.

2
signals
GE clock signals TN52TOG, The OptiX OSN 8800 supports

3
over service TN54THA, TN54TOA through the GE ports to implement
phase synchronization.
Transmission of clock signals over the OTN network
Table 5-19 Physical clock synchronization or IEEE 1588v2 synchronization

Mar Clock Board
k Synchronization
Description
Implementation
Method
OSC channels TN11ST2

4
ESC channels TN52ND2, TN54NQ2,

5
TN54NPO2,
TN55NPO2,
TN54NS3,
TN55NPO2E, The OptiX OSN 8800 supports
TN53NQ2, TN53ND2, receive frequency signals using an
TN53NS2, TN55TQX, ESC or OSC channel.
TN53TDX,
TN54THA,
TN54TOA,
TN52TOG,
TN11LEM24,
TN11LEX4

Output of clock signals
Table 5-20 Physical clock synchronization

Ma Frequency source Board
Description
rk
6 2M external clocks TN16XCH, TN16ATE This method is recommended.
8 GE or 10GE clock l GE: TN52TOG, The OptiX OSN 8800 supports

signals over services TN11LEM24, through the GE or 10GE ports to
TN54THA, implement frequency
TN54TOA synchronization.
l 10GE:
TN11LEM24,
TN11LEX4,
TN55TQX,
TN53TDX
Table 5-21 IEEE 1588v2 synchronization

Ma Phase source Board
Description
rk
7 1PPS+TOD time TN16XCH, TN16ATE This method is recommended.

signals
8 GE or 10GE clock l GE: TN52TOG, The OptiX OSN 8800 supports

signals over services TN54THA, through the GE or 10GE ports to
TN54TOA implement phase synchronization.
l 10GE: TN55TQX,
TN53TDX
NOTE
Figure 5-39 shows that various methods can be used to transmit clock signals over an OTN network. In
practical application, however, it is recommended that only one method be used to transmit clock signals
over the same OTN network.
5.9.2 Methods and Typical Applications of Frequency

Synchronization
This section describes the implementation methods and the typical applications of frequency
synchronization.
Methods of Obtaining Frequency Sources

Frequency sources can be obtained by:
l Acquiring 2M external clock signals

l Acquiring clock signals over GE/10GE services

For details about the methods of obtaining a frequency source, see Methods of Obtaining Clock
Sources.
NOTE
When an OptiX OSN 8800 is used to obtain 2M external clocks from a BITS or OptiX PTN and other
device, the cable connecting them must be shorter than 200 m.
Frequency Synchronization Implementation Methods

Two methods are available for implementing frequency synchronization.
l Frequency synchronization is implemented based on physical clocks, which are extracted
from line data streams.
Physical clock synchronization does not consume service bandwidth and is independent of
packet delay variation (PDV). However, physical clock synchronization can be
implemented only when equipment supports physical clocks. Therefore, every node on the
network must support physical clocks for this method to be used networkwide. For more
information, see Introduction.
l Frequency synchronization is implemented based on the received and transmitted
timestamps in Sync messages defined by the IEEE 1588v2 protocol.
IEEE 1588v2-compliant frequency synchronization involves two actions: frequency
gauging and frequency correction. This method provides a synchronization precision close
to that of frequency synchronization based on physical clocks. For more information, see
IEEE 1588v2-Compliant Frequency Synchronization.
NOTE
An OptiX OSN 8800 supports the following methods for frequency synchronization: IEEE 1588v2 and
physical layer clock synchronization. Synchronous Ethernet is one approach to physical layer clock
synchronization. At one time, the OptiX OTN product series can use either IEEE 1588v2 or synchronous
Ethernet for frequency synchronization. It is recommended that only one method be used to transmit clock
signals over the same OTN network.
Typical Application of Frequency Synchronization

Physical clock synchronization is used as an example to describe two application scenarios
corresponding to the two methods of obtaining frequency sources from a BITS. Figure 5-40
shows the application where frequency sources are obtained from clock signals carried over GE
services, and Figure 5-41 shows the application where frequency sources are obtained from 2M
external clocks.
Application 1: Clock transmission based on physical clocks carried over GE services
As shown in Figure 5-40, the other device (such as the OptiX PTN device) obtains clock signals
from the BITS device and transmits the clock signals to the connected OptiX OSN 8800 on the
OTN network. On the other side of the OTN network, another OptiX OSN 8800 transmits the
clock signals to the two other devices (such as OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800) over
GE services. After receiving the clock signals, the two other devices (such as OptiX PTN devices
or OptiX OSN 1800) transmit them to the Node Bs. For details about the configurations, see
Example Description.

Figure 5-40 Clock transmission based on physical clocks carried over GE services (using ESC
channels over the OTN network)
GE East West
Slave
BITS
H West A
East GE
GE F
Master
B OTN Network D
BITS
E West G
East C
West East
Optical Cables
Sites Direction Board
Cables
East 12-52ND2-1
Physical synchronization route A,B,C,D
West 12-52ND2-2
Physical synchronization protection route
BITS OptiX OTN product series Other devices Node B
Application 2: Clock transmission based on physical clocks from 2M external clocks

As shown in Figure 5-41, on one side of the OTN network, two OptiX OSN 8800 obtain 2M
clock signals from the master and slave BITS devices and transmit them to other OptiX OSN
8800 on the network. On the other side of the network, after processing the clock signals by
using the OSC boards, the egress OptiX OSN 8800 transmits them to the connected other devices
(such as OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800). Then, the other devices (such as OptiX PTN
devices or OptiX OSN 1800) transmit the clock signals to the Node Bs. For details about the
configurations, see Example Description.
Figure 5-41 Clock transmission based on physical clocks from 2M external clocks (using OSC
channels over the OTN network)
2M Clock East West

Slave
BITS
A
West GE
2M Clock East
OTN E
Master
B Network D
BITS
F
East West
C
West East
Optical Cables
Cables
East 1-11ST2-1
A,B,C,D
Physical synchronization route West 1-11ST2-2
BITS OptiX OTN product series Other devices Node B

5.9.3 Methods and Typical Applications of Phase Synchronization

This section describes the implementation methods and the typical applications of phase
synchronization.
Methods of Obtaining Phase Sources

Phase sources can be obtained by:
l Acquiring 1PPS+TOD time signals
l Acquiring clock signals over GE/10GE services
For details about the methods of obtaining a phase source, see Methods of Obtaining Clock
Sources.
NOTE
When an OptiX OSN 8800 is used to obtain a phase source from 1PPS+TOD external time signals, the
cable connecting them must be shorter than 200 m.
Phase Synchronization Implementation Methods

Two methods are available for implementing phase synchronization.
l Time transmission based on IEEE 1588v2-compliant frequency and phase synchronization
– IEEE 1588v2-compliant frequency synchronization: Clock frequencies of clock boards
are corrected based on the offsets between t1 and t2 to ensure that clock frequencies of
NEs are synchronized to each other.
– IEEE 1588v2-compliant phase synchronization: Clock boards collect timestamps t1, t2,
t3, and t4 and compute the offsets and delays based on the timestamps. Then, the boards
correct the times based on the offsets and delays.
l Time transmission based on physical clock frequency synchronization and IEEE 1588v2-
compliant phase synchronization
– Physical clock frequency synchronization: Frequency synchronization is implemented
by acquiring 2M external clock signals or by extracting clock signals from service
signals.
– IEEE 1588v2-compliant phase synchronization: Clock boards collect timestamps t1, t2,
t3, and t4 and compute the offsets and delays based on the timestamps. Then, the boards
correct the times based on the offsets and delays.
For details about the methods of implementing phase synchronization, see Overview.
NOTE
l For more information regarding the offset between t1 and t2, see IEEE 1588v2-Compliant Frequency
Synchronization.
l For more information regarding the timestamps t1, t2, t3, and t4, see IEEE 1588v2 Packet and
Synchronization Mechanism.
Typical Application of Phase Synchronization

Figure 5-42 shows an example in which frequency and phase signals are transmitted over GE
services and phase synchronization is implemented using the first method (physical clock
frequency synchronization + IEEE 1588v2-compliant phase synchronization).

Application 1: Time transmission based on IEEE 1588v2-compliant frequency

synchronization and phase synchronization
As shown in Figure 5-42, the other device (such as the OptiX PTN device) obtains frequency
and phase signals from the BITS device and transmits the frequency and phase signals to the
connected OptiX OSN 8800 on the OTN network. On the other side of the OTN network, another
OptiX OSN 8800 transmits the frequency and phase signals to the two other devices (such as
OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800) over GE services. After receiving the frequency and
phase signals, the two other devices (such as OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800) send the
frequency and phase signals to the Node Bs over GE services. For details about the
configurations, see Example Description.
Figure 5-42 IEEE 1588v2-compliant time transmission over GE services (using OSC channels
over the OTN network)
GE East West
Slave
BITS
West
A GE
East
GE
Master E
BITS B OTN Network D
F
East
C West GE
Optical Cables West East
Cables
1588v2 frequency synchronization route
1588v2 phase synchronization route Sites Direction Board
1588v2 frequency synchronization protection route East 1-11ST2-1
1588v2 phase synchronization protection route A,B,C,D
West 1-11ST2-2
OptiX OTN
BITS Other devices Node B
product series
Figure 5-43 shows an example in which frequency and phase signals are received using 2M
external clocks and 1PPS+TOD and phase synchronization is implemented using the second
method (IEEE 1588v2-compliant frequency synchronization + IEEE 1588v2-compliant phase
synchronization).
Application 2: Time transmission based on physical clock frequency synchronization and

IEEE 1588v2-compliant phase synchronization
As shown in Figure 5-43, on one side of the OTN network two OptiX OSN 8800 obtain 2M
clock signals and 1PPS+TOD time signals from the master and slave BITS devices and send the
frequency and phase signals to other OptiX OSN 8800 on the network. On the other side of the
OTN network, after processing the frequency and phase signals using the ESC boards, the egress
OptiX OSN 8800 sends the frequency and phase signals to the connected other devices (such as
OptiX PTN devices or OptiX OSN 1800). Then, the other devices (such as OptiX PTN devices
or OptiX OSN 1800) send the frequency and phase signals to the Node Bs through their 2M
external ports and external time ports (1PPS+TOD ports). For details about the configurations,
see Example Description.

Figure 5-43 Physical clock frequency synchronization + IEEE 1588v2-compliant phase

synchronization using 2M clock and 1PPS+TOD ports (using ESC channels over the OTN
network)
2M/1PPS
East West
+TOD
West GE
A East E
E
B OTN Network D
2M/1PPS F
+TOD East GE
C West
West East
Optical Cables
Cables
Physical synchronization route
1588v2 phase synchronization protection route
East 12-52ND2-1
1588v2 frequency synchronization protection route A,B,C,D
West 12-52ND2-2
OptiX OTN
BITS Other devices Node B
product series
5.10 ASON Management

An automatically switched optical network (ASON) is a new-generation optical transmission
network.
With integration of SONET/SDH functionality, effective IP technology, large-capacity WDM/
OTN, and revolutionary network control software, ASON lays a foundation for flexible and
scalable next generation optical networks, which are easy to operate and manage, and less
expensive to operate.
Introducing ASON into WDM networks brings the following benefits:
l High reliability: Protection and restoration together improve network reliability and service
security.
l Easy to use: Network resources and topologies are easy to discover and end-to-end services
can be quickly created.
l Easy to manage: Trail resources are manageable and predictable, and services can be
automatically reverted to their original trails.
l Investment saving: A mesh network ensures higher resource usage and enables quick
expansion (plug-and-play).
l New service types: Service level agreement (SLA) ensures differentiated services.
WDM/OTN equipment is an effective service carrier. However, only the capability of carrying
services (on the transport plane) does not qualify WDM/OTN equipment as advanced and future-
oriented equipment, which also requires outstanding performance in bandwidth usage,
flexibility, manageability, maintainability, reliability, and protection capability. It has become
a trend to implement a control plane over the transport plane of the WDM/OTN equipment.
The limitations on the WDM/OTN equipment are removed after the ASON technology is
implemented on the WDM/OTN equipment. Because of the ASON technology, the WDM/OTN

equipment features high reliability, flexibility, bandwidth utilization, maintainability, and

manageability and supports different service levels and quick deployment of services. Further,
the operability of a WDM/OTN network is highly improved because of the features supported
by the ASON technology, such as automatic discovery of resources, traffic engineering, dynamic
bandwidth adjustment, and interconnection and communication technologies.
5.11 Transmission of Network Management Information

There are three communication modes: HWECC, OSI over DCC, IP over DCC.
l HWECC: The management information is transmitted by using the HWECC protocol
sharing method.
l IP over DCC management information is transferred by using the IP protocol sharing
method.
l OSI over DCC: The management information is transferred by using the OSI protocol
sharing method.
5.11.1 DCN Composition

DCNs are classified as internal and external DCNs.
Both the U2000 and NEs are nodes of a DCN. The DCN between the U2000 and NEs is called
the external DCN, and the DCN between NEs is called the internal DCN, as shown in Figure
5-44.

Figure 5-44 DCN composition
Primary Secondary
NMS NMS
External DCN
Internal DCN
NG WDM Ethernet
Router
equipment switch
Network Fiber
cable
l External DCN
On an actual network, the U2000 and NEs may be located on different floors of a building,
in different buildings, or even in different cities. Hence, an external DCN that is comprised
of the data communication equipment, such as LAN switches and routers, is required to
connect the U2000 and the NEs. As the external DCN involves knowledge of data
communication, no detailed description is provided in this document. The DCN mentioned
in this document refers to the internal DCN, unless otherwise specified.
l Internal DCN
On an internal DCN, the equipment supports the optical supervisory channel (OSC) and
the electrical supervisory channel (ESC) technologies to implement the DCN.

5.11.1.1 Optical Supervisory Channel Administration

The management information of the stations in the system is transmitted through the optical
supervisory channel (OSC).
Functions of the OSC

The optical supervisory channel (OSC) transmits the monitoring and management information
among the stations. The channel of the OSC is at 1491/1510/1511 nm.
The OSC boards include the HSC1, SC1, SC2 and ST2.
The OSC adopts CMI coding. If the signal rate is 2 Mbit/s before the coding, the signal rate is
4 Mbit/s after the coding. If the signal rate is 8 Mbit/s before the coding, the signal rate is 16
Mbit/s after the coding.
Working of the OSC

Figure 5-45 shows the signal flow of the OSC between three stations. The signals of the OSC
and the service signals are independent of each other. The supervisory signals are not amplified.
They are terminated and regenerated at a station.
The following takes the communication between the optical terminal multiplexer (OTM) and
the optical line amplifier (OLA) for example to describe the communication process of the OSC.
Figure 5-45 Signal flow of the OSC between three stations in chain networking
O
O
T OM OA T
U OA OA OD
F F F F U
SC1 I I I I
SC2 SC1
U U U U
O
T O
OD OA OA OA OM T
U
U
OTM1 OLA OTM2
In the eastward direction, the HSC1/SC1 at OTM1 receives the overhead data frames from the
SCC. Then, the optical transmit module performs E/O conversion to the frames before the
supervisory data frames is modulated to the OSC wavelength (1510 nm). The multiplexer of the
FIU multiplexes the wavelength of the OSC with the service signals and sends them to the optical
regeneration station OLA.
The demultiplexer of the FIU at the OLA station demultiplexes the signals into service signals
and OSC signals. The service signals are transmitted to the east after they are regenerated and
amplified by the OAU.
The west optical receive module of the SC2 at the OLA performs O/E conversion to the OSC
signals. The supervisory data frames are recovered and processed before they are sent to the
SCC for data exchange. The east optical transmit module of the SC2 performs E/O conversion
for the processed supervisory signals. The OSC signals and the service signals are multiplexed
by the FIU and sent to the line for transmission.
The demultiplexer of the FIU at the OTM2 station demultiplexes the signals into service signals
and OSC signals. The west optical receive module of the HSC1/SC1 performs O/E conversion

to the OSC signals. The supervisory data frames are recovered and processed before they are
sent to the SCC for data exchange.
In the westward direction, the SCC performs the same process to transmit the required data.
Channel Types
Chan Description Bandwidth Applicable Board
nel
Type
D1– When receiving 12 x 64 kbit/s DAS1/HSC1/SC1/SC2/

D3, supervision information ST2
D4– from the SCC board, the
D12 OSC board encapsulates
the information into E1
frames defined in ITU-T
G.703 for further
transmission.
OSC_ OSC_18 is a newly 18 x 64 kbit/s TN12SC1/TN12SC2

18 developed DCN channel
to improve the OSC
communication capacity.
FE_D FE electrical ports are 10.24 Mbit/s (shared by ST2/DAS1a

CN used to transmit DCN the OSC and ASON
information. channels, each assigned
about 5 Mbit/s bandwidth)
a: The WSC port on the board is used to transmit DCN information.
5.11.1.2 Electrical Supervisory Channel Administration

The electrical supervisory channel (ESC) deletes the insertion loss of the FIU. This lowers the
cost and power budget of optical channels.
Functions of the ESC

In the OptiX OSN 8800 system, the monitoring and management information of each station
can be transmitted and communicated through the ESC. The OTU board, tributary board, and
line board realize the ESC transmission by using the DCC bytes or the associated GCC0/1/2
bytes compliant with ITU-T G.709. The external IP management information can be sent to the
system through the 10 Tbit/s or 100 Tbit/s Ethernet port and then carried by the ESC.
The OptiX OSN 8800 uses the GCC0 or GCC1+GCC2 bytes to achieve the ESC communication.
In this case, the bandwidth varies with the line rate, which is the rate of the OTU.
Working Mode of the ESC

Figure 5-46 shows the signal flow of the ESC for two stations. As shown in the figure, all the
OTUs that support data communication network (DCN) communication at the transmit end
receive the DCN data from the SCC and then send the DCN data to the opposite station. At the

receive end, the SCC selects the DCN data automatically from one route according to the actual
situation. If the route is abnormal, the SCC automatically receives the DCN data from another
route.
The following uses the communication between two OTM stations as an example to describe
the communication of the ESC.
Figure 5-46 ESC signal flow in the chain networking

O O
T T
U U
OM OA OA OM
O O
S T F F T S
U U
C I I C
C O U U O C
T T
U U
OD OA OA OD
O O
T T
U U
OTM1 OTM2
In the east, the SCC at OTM1 inserts the supervisory information into the DCN channel in the
overhead serial port according to a specific protocol such as the High-level Data Link Control
(HDLC) protocol. Then the supervisory information is sent to the OTN overhead processing
unit of the OTU through the 2M overhead serial port between the SCC and the OTU. The OTN
overhead is then sent to the line side.
The OTU at OTM2 extracts the overhead from the line side and sends the overhead to the OTN
overhead processing unit through the overhead serial port. The overhead is finally sent to the
SCC.
In the east, the SCC performs the reverse process.
5.11.2 Huawei DCN Solution

Huawei OptiX transmission equipment provides multiple DCN solutions, which will fit various
networks.
DCN Classification by NMS Access Mode

l Indirect access to the NMS: A non-gateway NE accesses the NMS through a gateway NE.
l Direct access to the NMS: An NE accesses the NMS as a gateway NE.
DCN Classification by Protocol

l HWECC Solution: When the networking is comprised of only the OptiX transmission
equipment, the HWECC solution is preferred. In this solution, NEs transmit the data that
supports the HWECC protocol through DCCs. The solution features easy configuration
and convenient application. As the HWECC protocol is a proprietary protocol, the
management problems cannot be solved when the networking is comprised of both the
OptiX equipment and the third-party equipment.
l IP over DCC Solution: When the networking is comprised of both the OptiX transmission
equipment and the third-party equipment that supports the IP over DCC function, the IP
over DCC solution is preferred. The IP over DCC solution can also be applied when the

networking is comprised of only the OptiX transmission equipment. In the IP over DCC
solution, NEs transmit the data that supports the TCP/IP protocol through DCCs. As the
TCP/IP protocol is a standard protocol, the management problems are solved when the
networking is comprised of both the OptiX equipment and the third-party equipment. The
configuration of the IP over DCC solution is more complicated than that of the HWECC
solution.
l OSI over DCC Solution: When the networking is comprised of both the OptiX transmission
equipment and the third-party equipment that supports the OSI over DCC function, the OSI
over DCC solution is preferred. In the OSI over DCC solution, NEs transmit the data that
supports the OSI protocol through DCCs. As the OSI protocol is a standard protocol, the
management problems are solved when the networking is comprised of both the OptiX
equipment and the third-party equipment. The configuration of the OSI over DCC solution,
however, is more complicated than the configurations of the HWECC solution and the IP
over DCC solution.
DCN Classification by Physical Resource

l Inband port: A DCN is built on service channels provided by equipment under management.
l Outband port: An outband port is a port (usually an Ethernet port) used for data transmission
between NEs on an ASON network. Without using a service path, data transmission can
be achieved by connecting this port to data communication equipment such as an Ethernet
switch or router.
l NMS port: An NMS port refers to the management network port on an NE.
l Transparent transmission: A transparent channel is provided on OTN equipment so that it
does not detect the intermediate network or link.
Table 5-22 lists details on the preceding DCN classifications.
Table 5-22 DCN solutions
Protocol Indirect Direct Inband Outband NMS Port

Classificati NMS NMS Port Port
on Access Access
HWECC Supported Not Supporteda Supported Supporteda

solution supported
IP over DCC Supported Supported Supported Supported Supported

solution
OSI over Supported Supported Not Supported Supported

DCC supported
solution
l a: POS ports are not supported.

l b: Extended ECC is supported.
5.11.2.1 DCN Solution Classification by NMS Access Mode

Indirect NMS Access

In this mode, the NMS sends data to gateway NEs by running the IP or OSI protocol. When
receiving the data, the gateway NEs query the core route table at the application layer by NE ID
and then forward the data to NEs accordingly. Gateway NEs and non-gateway NEs can run the
HWECC, IP, or OSI protocol between themselves.
Direct NMS Access

In this mode, all forwarding NEs on the NMS access path query the IP route table or OSI route
table at the network layer by NE IP address or NSAP address and then forward data from the
NMS accordingly. This mode requires that the NMS and NEs are reachable to each other at the
network layer. That is, a ping test on the NE that is initiated on the NMS is successful.
NOTE
IP and OSI are applicable to the scenarios where Huawei WDM/OTN equipment is interconnected with third-
party equipment.
5.11.2.2 DCN Solution Classification by Protocol
HWECC Protocol
ITU-T G.784 defines the architecture of the ECC protocol stack based on the OSI seven-layer
reference model. The HWECC protocol stack is based on the ECC protocol stack.
The HWECC protocol consists of four layers: physical layer (DCC), media access layer, network
layer, and transmission layer. See Figure 5-47.
Figure 5-47 Architecture of the HWECC protocol stack
Application layer
Presentation layer
Session layer
Transport layer Transport layer
Network layer Network layer
Media access
Data link layer
layer
Physical layer Physical layer
HW ECC
protocol stack OSI model
l Physical layer

The main function of the physical layer is to control physical channels. The physical layer
performs the following functions:
– Receives and sends data over the physical channels, including receiving data from
physical channels and transferring the data to the upper layer.
– Receives the data frames transferred from the upper layer and sends them to physical
channels.
The channels at the physical layer include DCC channels and extended ECC channels. The
physical layer can process the data frame with a maximum of 1024 bytes.
l Media access layer
The media access layer is also called the medium access control (MAC) layer. The main
function of the MAC layer is to activate or close physical DCCs between the physical layer
and the network layer. The MAC layer shields the diversity of the physical networks and
provides the uniform service upwards (point-to-point physical channel). The MAC layer
– Establishes and maintains the MAC connection between adjacent NEs.
When there is a reachable physical channel between two adjacent NEs, the MAC layer
establishes a MAC connection between the NEs. Each MAC connection includes the
address of the opposite NE, the ID of the physical channel, the connection timer, and
other information.
– Provides the data communication service.
The MAC layer receives the data frame transferred from the physical layer. If the
destination address is the local station, the MAC layer transfers the data frame to the
network layer. Otherwise, the MAC layer discards the data frame.
The MAC layer sends the data frame from the network layer. If the destination address
of the data frame has a MAC connection, the MAC layer sends the data frame to the
corresponding physical channel in the physical layer through the MAC connection.
Otherwise, the MAC layer discards the data frame.
l Network layer
The main function of the network layer is to provide the route addressing for data frames
and the route management for the DCC communication network. The network layer
– Establishes and maintains ECC routes.
Each route item includes the following information: address of the destination NE,
address of the transfer NE, transfer distance (the number of passed transfer NEs), route
priority (The priority value ranges from 1 to 7. The priority of an automatically
established route is 4 by default. The system always selects the route with the highest
priority.), and mode (0 represents the automatic route and 1 represents the manual route).
– Provides the data communication service.
The network layer receives the packet transferred from the MAC layer. If the destination
address of the packet is the local station, the network layer transfers the packet to the
transport layer. Otherwise, the network layer requests the MAC layer to transfer the
packet to the transfer station according to the route item that matches the destination
address in the network layer routing table.
The network layer sends the packet from the transport layer. The network layer requests
the MAC layer to transfer the packet to the transfer station according to the route item
that matches the destination address of the packet in the network layer routing table.
l Transport layer

The main function of the transport layer (L4 layer) is to provide the end-to-end
communication service for the upper layer. As the communication between the OptiX
equipment and the U2000 is controlled by the end-to-end connection-oriented service in
the application layer, the L4 layer provides only the end-to-end connectionless
communication service, that is, transparent data transfer service.
NOTE
In the HWECC protocol stack, the NE address used by each layer is the ID of the NE. The NE ID has 24
bits. The highest eight bits represent the subnet ID (or the extended ID) and the lowest 16 bits represent
the basic ID. For example, if the ID of an NE is 0x090001, the subnet ID of the NE is 9 and the basic ID
is 1.
Extended HWECC
The physical layer of the ECC is DCC, whose data is transmitted based on the fiber. In certain
cases, the network or NE may be independent and there is no DCC channel to the gateway NE
(no fiber connection). The extended ECC refers to the ECC protocol stack that is loaded on the
TCP/IP protocol stack. That is, the HWECC protocol stack is carried through the extended
channel (such as Ethernet) instead of the DCC channel to meet the requirements of special
scenarios. The difference between the extended ECC and the ECC is that the physical layer of
the ECC is the DCC channel and that of the extended ECC is an extended channel (such as
Ethernet channel). Figure 5-48 shows the networking environment with the extended ECC. The
communication protocol between NE6 and NE7 is extended ECC.
Figure 5-48 Networking environment with the extended ECC
GNE1 NE6 NE7 NE12

NM HUB1 HUB2
NE2 NE5 NE8 NE11
Network cable NE9 NE10

NE3 NE4
Fiber
Subnet 1 Subnet 2
IP over DCC Protocol Stack

The IP over DCC protocol consists of five layers, as shown in the following figure.

Figure 5-49 Architecture of the IP over DCC protocol stack
Routing protocol OSPF/RIP
Transport layer TCP/UDP
Network layer IP
Data link layer PPP

Ethernet
Physical layer DCC
l Physical layer
The main function of the physical layer is to provide channels for data transmission for the
data end equipment.
Physical channels are classified into the following two categories:
– DCC channel: The SDH-frame DCC bytes or the OTN-frame GCC bytes are used as
the channels for the communication between NEs.
– Ethernet physical channel: The NE provides the Ethernet physical channel through the
Ethernet NM port or the NE cascading port.
l Data link layer
The main function of the data link layer is to provide reliable data transmission on physical
links.
In the case of DCCs, the NE adopts the PPP protocol to realize the data link layer function.
The PPP protocol complies with RFC 1661.
l Network layer
– The main function of the network layer is to specify the network layer address for a
network entity and to provide the transferring and addressing functions.
– The NE adopts the IP and the matching ARP and ICMP to realize the network layer
functions.
l Transport layer
The main function of the transport layer is to provide the end-to-end communication service
for the upper layer. The NE supports the connection-oriented TCP and the connectionless-
oriented UDP.
l Routing protocols
Routing protocols belong to the scope of the application layer. The NE supports the two
routing protocols, open shortest path first (OSPF) and routing information protocol (RIP).
By default, the NE uses the OSPF protocol. The RIP protocol is used only when the
interconnected third-party equipment does not support the OSPF protocol.
The OSPF protocol is a dynamic routing protocol that is based on the link status. The OSPF
protocol divides an autonomous system into several areas. Route nodes exchange routing
information in an area. The route nodes at the edge of an area make summary and exchange
information with the routers in other areas. Areas are identified by area IDs. The area ID
has the same format as the IP address.

Currently, the OSPF protocol of the OptiX equipment supports only the routes within an
area and does not support the routes between areas. Hence, the gateway NE and all its
managed non-gateway NEs must be in the same OSPF area. By default, the line port of the
OptiX equipment is enabled with the OSPF protocol but the Ethernet port is not enabled
with the OSPF protocol. Hence, to form a network through the Ethernet port, you need to
modify the OSPF setting of the NE.
In addition to the dynamic routing protocol, the NE supports static routes. Static routes are
manually configured routes. Static routes have a higher priority than dynamic routes. When
there is a route conflict, the equipment selects static routes.
OSI over DCC Protocol Stack

The OSI over DCC protocol consists of five layers, in which the session layer, representation
layer, and application layer are unified as the application layer and use proprietary protocols, as
shown in Figure 5-50.
Figure 5-50 Architecture of the OSI over DCC protocol stack
Application layer Qx/MML/SWDL
Transport layer TP4
Network layer IS-IS/ES-IS/CLNP
Data link layer LAPD

Ethernet
DCC
Physical layer
5.11.2.3 DCN Solution Classification by Physical Resource
Inband port
When inband DCN is used, the network management messages are encapsulated in data service
frames and are transmitted with packet services over service channels. In the transmission
process, special VLAN tags or MPLS labels are used. This means that interconnection with
third-party equipment at the network layer is not feasible (except when the transparent
transmission solution is used).
Outband Port
Outband port can be used for ASON based on the split of optical and electrical NEs; The Huawei
WDM/OTN equipment can be interconnected with third-party equipment at the network layer.
NMS Port
NMS ports enable WDM/OTN equipment to access the NMS, provide an extended ECC
channel, or interconnect to third-party equipment at the network layer.

Transparent transmission
This solution is applicable to the scenario where NG WDM equipment is networked with other
WDM equipment (For example: NG WDM equipment lets signals from OptiX BWS 1600G
pass through), and the scenario where WDM/OTN equipment lets signals from third-party
equipment pass through.
5.11.3 Huawei DCN Management Capability

This chapter describes the DCN management capabilities of Huawei equipment and the rules
for planning DCN on Huawei equipment.
This following generally describes the DCN management capabilities and DCN planning rules
specific to each DCN solution. For more details, see the Feature Description.
HWECC Solution
l There should not be too many gateway NEs on a network. Otherwise, the network
performance may be affected. It is suggested that the number of gateway NEs managed by
an NMS does not exceed 2000. If the number exceeds 2000, use extended ECC to combine
the gateway NEs.
l In the actual networking, the gateway NE has the largest traffic volume. To ensure stable
communication, select the equipment with strong ECC processing capability as the gateway
NE. The gateway NE and other NEs should form a star network, to reduce the traffic volume
of other NEs.
l The number of HWECC subnet NEs should not exceed 50 and the number of NEs for each
gateway NE should not exceed 200. Each GNE is suggested to manage no more than 100
NEs.
l In the hybrid networking of different OptiX equipment, the number of HWECC subnet
NEs should not exceed 50 and the number of NEs for each gateway NE should not exceed
50.
l Do not enable the ECC communication between different HWECC subnets. That is,
– Do not use network cables or fibers to establish the direct physical connection between
any NEs in two HWECC subnets.
– Use the U2000 to disable the ECC communication between NEs in different HWECC
subnets.
l In the application where the extended ECC communication is required, the manually
extended ECC is recommended. Do not use the automatically extended ECC, so that the
bandwidth between NEs using extended ECC for communication is saved.
l When the number of Huawei equipment that uses the extended ECC communication
exceeds eight, the manually extended ECC communication must be used.
l When configuring the manually extended ECC, configure one or more NEs as the server
and other NEs as the client. One server NE can have a maximum of seven client NEs. If
the number of client NEs managed by a server NE exceeds eight, select a client NE as the
server NE for the remaining client NEs. In this case, the client NE functions as a client and
a server at the same time. The rest may be deduced by analogy. The port numbers of the
server NEs must be different.

IP over DCC Solution

l When the U2000 is used to manage NEs, the number of non-gateway NEs accessed through
one gateway NE cannot exceed 64.
l The gateway NE and the non-gateway NEs that are managed by the gateway NE must be
in the same OSPF area.
l The number of NEs in an OSPF area cannot exceed 64.
l Plan static routes when the U2000 and the gateway NE or the NEs that need to be directly
accessed by the U2000 cannot be interconnected through the dynamic route at the network
layer.
l If the network is comprised of only the OptiX equipment, it is recommended that you use
bytes D1 to D3 in SDH frames as DCCs.
l If the network is comprised of both OptiX equipment and the third-party SDH equipment,
use the DCC bytes that are used by the third-party equipment (for example, bytes D1 to D3
or D4 to D12) as DCCs.
OSI over DCC Solution

l Only the node at the end of a network can be configured as an ES. The limited route
resources of an ES affect the network expansion. Therefore, it is not suggested to configure
the equipment as an ES. The U2000 works as an ES.
l L1-IS is the default node type of Huawei products. It supports only intra-area routing (Level
1 routing).
l If inter-area routing (Level 2 routing) is required, set the network node type of the equipment
to L2-IS. L2-IS maintains two routing tables at the same time: one is used for intra-area
routing and the other for inter-area routing.
l The OptiX equipment supports IS-IS Level 2 routing. When the OSI communication
protocol is used, you need to divide the network into areas according to the network size.
The number of areas, also the number of Level 2 NEs, on the entire DCN cannot exceed
32. A gateway NE is a Level 2 NE. The number of Level 1 NEs that a gateway NE have
cannot exceed 32.
l If the number of NEs in a network is smaller than 32, you do not need to divide the network
into areas. In this case, set the node type of all NEs to L1-IS, and set the AREA IDs in the
NSAP area addresses of all NEs to the same value. In the case of a large-scale network,
comply with the following principles to divide the network:
– Divide the DCN into several areas to manage.
– Set several NEs in each area to L2-IS. Two NEs in each area are recommended because
the two can be of mutual backup.
– In the DCN, all L2 equipment must be arranged in a continuous manner.
l When all nodes in the DCN network run the OSI protocol stack, do not configure all NEs
as gateway NEs. Configure certain NEs as gateway NEs. Configure the other NEs as non-
gateway NEs and specify a gateway NE for a non-gateway NE. The number of non-gateway
NEs under one gateway NE cannot exceed 32. Otherwise, the gateway NE is overloaded,
and the performance of the U2000 is decreased.
l When dividing a network to support layered routes, configure one or several NEs in each
area as gateway NEs. When creating a non-gateway NE, specify a gateway NE in the local
area for the NE.
l If the network is comprised of only the OptiX equipment, it is recommended that you use
bytes D1 to D3 in SDH frames as DCCs.

l If the network is comprised of both OptiX equipment and the third-party SDH equipment,
use the DCC bytes that are used by the third-party equipment (for example, bytes D1 to D3
or D4 to D12) as DCCs.
l For the two ends of a DCC, set the LAPD role to User at one end and to Network at the
other end.
5.12 Network Management Tools and Protocols

The NM system manages alarm, performance, configuration, communication, security, and
topology of the entire optical transmission system.
The NM system also provides end-to-end management according to the requirements of the user.
The NM system improves the network quality, lowers the maintenance cost, and ensures
reasonable utilization of the network resource.
The NM system provides user friendly interfaces and comprehensive functions. Its software
system adopts component technology and object-oriented technology so that the application sub-
systems can be tailored according to the requirements of the user. This facilitates system
expansion.
5.12.1 U2000
The iManager U2000 (U2000) is Huawei's major and future-proof network management product
and solution.
The U2000 is an integrated management platform for all Huawei equipment. It can centrally
manage transport equipment, access equipment, and IP equipment (including routers, security
equipment, and Metro Ethernet equipment). The U2000 is designed as the management system
for Huawei equipment and provides powerful management functions at the NE and network
layers.
In the TMN, the U2000 is located on the element management layer and network management
layer, and thus it supports all functions of the NE and network layers.
5.12.2 Web LCT

The iManager U2000 Web local craft terminal is abbreviated as Web LCT.
The Web LCT uniformly manages Huawei OptiX series optical transmission equipment, such
as the SDH and WDM equipment. Based on the browser/server architecture, the Web LCT
provides the ability to configure and maintain individual NEs. It also provides the ability to
manage alarms, configuration, performance and security.
5.12.3 Simple Network Management Protocol

The system provides the simple network management protocol (SNMP).
The SNMP is a standard protocol based on user datagram protocol (UDP). With an SNMP
compatible management interface, any NM system can query the alarms and performance of the
equipment.
5.12.4 NTP Protocol

Basic Concept
The system supports the Network Time Protocol (NTP). The NTP is used to synchronize the
distributed time server and the client.
The NTP defines the data formats, algorithms, entities and protocols used during the realization
of the protocol:
l The NTP is based on Internet Protocol (IP) and User Datagram Protocol (UDP). It can also
be used by other protocols.
l The NTP develops from time protocol and Internet Control Message Protocol (ICMP)
timestamp message. It has special design for correctness and robustness.
l The NTP defines the mechanism of time synchronization. In theory, the accuracy can reach
a billionth of a second.
l The NTP specifies the features of the local clock, time server, and the method used to
estimate the time difference between the local clock and time server.
l The NTP describes the clock-filter algorithm and clock select algorithm during the
realization of the protocol. When there are multiple time servers in the network, the system
selects the algorithm to calculate the time offset of each time server to improve the accuracy
of the local clock.
Function Implementation
For the working principle of the NTP, see Figure 5-51.
Figure 5-51 Principle of the NTP

NTP 10:00:00
message am
Network
Client Server
NTP 10:00:00 10:00:05

message am am
Network
Client Server
NTP 10:00:00 10:00:05 10:00:08

message am am am
Network
Client Server
NTP 10:00:00 10:00:05 10:00:08 10:00:14

message am am am am
Network
Client Server

The process of the system synchronization is as follows:

l The client sends an NTP message to the server. The message capsule has a timestamp that
records the time when the capsule leaves the client. The timestamp is 10:00:00 am.
l When the NTP message capsule reaches the server, the server adds its own timestamp to
the message capsule. This timestamp is 10:00:05 am.
l When the NTP message capsule leaves the server, the server adds its own timestamp to the
message capsule once again. This timestamp is 10:00:08 am.
l Receiving the returned message capsule, the client adds a new timestamp. This timestamp
is 10:00:14 am.
After this process, the client has enough information to calculate two important parameters:
l Round-trip delays of an NTP message
l Clock offsets between the client and the server
The client can set its own clock and keep synchronization with the server based on this
information.
Application
For the synchronization of the network, see Figure 5-52.
Figure 5-52 Synchronization of the network
The highest level

time server
Other time server
The middle level

time server
NM server
NE 2
Clients
NE 1
NE 3
NE 5
NE 4
As shown in Figure 5-52, the equipment in the synchronized network can be classified into three
categories:
l The highest level time server, referring to the 0-level time server.
l The middle level time server, referring to the 1- or 2-level time server that obtains time
from the higher-level time server and provides time services for the lower-level time server.
l Clients, obtaining time without providing time services.

In application, choose the server and the client in the following way:
l Choose the network management server as the time server for the NE equipment. The
network management server can be set as the highest-level time server or set to obtain time
from other time servers.
l The 8800 NE can be only the client, obtaining time from the specified time server.
5.13 License Control

When creating the NE or the slave subrack on the U2000, you need to configure license. The
U2000 distributes the license files to the corresponding NEs. In this manner, the management
of service capacity and service types is realized.
5.13.1 Service Capacity License

When creating the OptiX OSN 8800 NE or the slave subrack on the U2000, you need to configure
license. The U2000 distributes the license files to the corresponding NEs. In this manner, the
management of service capacity and service types is realized.
License and Service Capacity Management

According to the electrical cross-connect capacity and the service type in a subrack, the license
authorizes electrical cross-connect capacity and electrical cross-connect service type for each
subrack. You need to configure the service type and service capacity for every subrack.
For more information, refer to Table 5-23.
Table 5-23 License information table
Subrack Type Service Service Capacity Cross-Connect

Type Granularity
OptiX OSN 8800 OTN 360G, 640G ODU0, ODU1, ODU2,

T16 ODU3, ODUflex
None 0G -
If the subrack has no electrical cross-connections, set the service type to None and the service
capacity to 0G.
The OptiX OSN 8800 T16 supports the cross-connection of ODU3/ODU2/ODU1/ODU0/

ODUflex (maximum rate of 640 Gbit/s).
When the cross-connection of ODU3/ODU2/ODU1/ODU0/ODUflex is required, set the service

type to OTN. Set the service capacity according to the service planning and the electrical cross-
connection service for each subrack.
5.14 Features of Upgrade and Maintenance

5.14.1 Software Package Loading

The system supports software package loading to load, upgrade, activate, and manage the NE-
level software in a centralized manner. This simplifies operations when upgrading the NE-level
software.
You can check whether the board software versions match when the board is in service. Once a
board is in service, the board software versions can be automatically updated.
The software package loading has the following features:
l Users load the software in a uniform operation interface.
l After the package loading, the complete software package is stored on the SCC board. The
NE software is directly placed in the target directory while the board software is buffered
in the CF. In this way, the board software can be automatically updated after a new board
is inserted. If the board software files are lost, these files can be restored from the SCC
board.
l The NE can be automatically managed. If the board that is newly inserted does not match
the software of the NE, an auto-update is performed.
l The software package loading is an incremental scheme and is performed to load only the
required files.
l The software package loading supports automatic rollback. When the software or hardware
of the system is faulty, the loading fails and the system restores the original NE software.
The software package loading also supports manual rollback. When errors occur during
the software loading, manual rollback can be performed to restore the original NE software.
The software package loading is applied in the following scenarios:
l Upgrading NE software
l Replacing service boards
l Replacing the SCC board
5.14.2 PRBS Error Detection Function

Certain OTUs of the OptiX OSN 8800 provide the pseudo random bit sequence (PRBS) error
detection function. On the U2000, the meter board can be configured to send PRBS signals, and
the client side and WDM side of the auxiliary board to transparently transmit the PRBS signals.
In this manner, you can perform the bit error test on the transmission link without attaching a
test meter to the equipment during the deployment.
Function Description
In the PRBS test, the OTU can function as either a meter board or an auxiliary board. The meter
board generates and transmits the PRBS signal to the client side of the auxiliary board at the
near end. Then, the auxiliary board at the near end transparently transmits the PRBS signal to
the auxiliary board at the far end. The auxiliary board at the far end loops back the PRBS signal
by configuring a WDM-side or client-side loopback or by applying a physical fiber loopback
on the board.
Application
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports PRBS test on the WDM side and the client side. Figure 5-53
and Figure 5-54 show the networking of the two applications.

As shown in Figure 5-53, one OTU board functions as a test meter. In this case, the OTU board
is called meter board. The meter board generates PRBS signals and sends the signals to the client
side of the auxiliary board at the near end. The signals are looped back by configuring a WDM-
side or client-side loopback or by applying a physical fiber loopback on the auxiliary board at
the far end.
As shown in Figure 5-54, one OTU board functions as a test meter. In this case, the OTU board
is called meter board. The meter board generates PRBS signals and sends the signals to the WDM
side of the auxiliary board at the far end. The signals are looped back on the WDM side of the
auxiliary board at the far end.
Figure 5-53 Schematic diagram of the client-side PRBS test
TX RX OUT IN
Near Far
Meter end 1 end 2
WDM network
board auxiliary auxiliary
board board
RX TX IN OUT
1: Loopback on the WDM side/fiber loopback

2: Loopback on the client side/fiber loopback
Figure 5-54 Schematic diagram of the WDM-side PRBS test
OUT IN
Far
Meter 1 end
board WDM network
auxiliary
board
IN OUT
1: Loopback on the WDM side
NOTE
The LEM24 and LEX4 boards are applicable to this scenario (PRBS test on the WDM side) and function
only as meter boards. When the LEM24 and LEX4 boards are used in this scenario, other OTU boards
must be used as auxiliary boards at the far end.
5.14.3 Hot Patch

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the hot patch technique.
Certain equipment requires long-term uninterrupted operation. When a defect is found or a new
requirement need be applied to the equipment software, old codes need to be replaced with new
codes to rectify the defect or realize the new requirement without interrupting the existing
services. These new codes are referred to as a hot patch.
The hot patch technique has the following features:

l Solves most software problems without affecting services.

l Effectively decreases the number of software versions and avoids frequent software version
upgrade.
l Can be installed, locally or remotely, without affecting the existing services. The hot patch
also supports rollback. This helps to effectively reduce the upgrade cost and to avoid
upgrade risks.
l Can be used as an effective method of locating faults, which improves problem solving
efficiency.

Product Description 6 NE Type and Signal Flow
6 NE Type and Signal Flow
About This Chapter
6.1 OTM in a DWDM System

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides OTM equipment for a DWDM system.
6.2 OLA in a DWDM System
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides OLA equipment for a DWDM system.
6.3 FOADM in a DWDM System
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides FOADM equipment.
6.4 ROADM in a DWDM System
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides ROADM equipment.
6.5 REG in a DWDM System
The REG equipment is an electrical regenerator and is used to further extend the optical
6.6 OTM in a CWDM System
The OptiX OSN 8800 provides OTM equipment.
6.7 FOADM in a CWDM System

6.1 OTM in a DWDM System

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides OTM equipment for a DWDM system.
6.1.1 OTM Node with Optical Multiplexer Board and Optical

Demultiplexer Board (40-Wavelength)
Functions
The DWDM OTM node is used at the terminal station, and logically divided into
l Transmit direction
l Receive direction
In the transmit direction, the OTM amplifies client-side signals after converging/converting the
signals. Then, the signals are multiplexed with the supervisory channel signals before line
transmission. In the receive direction, the reverse process is performed at the OTM.
This OTM node type applies to stations whose initial wavelengths are more than 16. It supports
expansion of up to 40 wavelengths without interrupting services.
Functional Units
An OTM consists of:
l Optical transponder unit (OTU)

l Optical amplifier unit (OA)
l Optical multiplexer unit (OM)
l Optical demultiplexer unit (OD)
l Unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit (SC1)
l Fiber interface unit (FIU)
For the boards used in each unit, see 4.2 Hardware Architecture.
Signal Flow
In the transmit direction, through the OTU, the OTM node converges/transforms the accessed
signals into signals with ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths. Then, the signals are
multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit into the main optical path. Then, these main path
optical signals are amplified and multiplexed with the optical supervisory signal. Finally, the
multiplexed signals are sent to the line for transmission.
In the receive direction, the optical supervisory signal and the main path optical signals are
separated. Then, the optical supervisory signal is sent to the optical supervisory channel (OSC)
unit for processing, and the main path optical signals are demultiplexed by the optical
demultiplexer unit into signals of different wavelengths, and finally sent to the corresponding
client equipment after being transformed/divided by the OTUs.
The schematic diagram of this OTM node type is shown in Figure 6-1.

Figure 6-1 Schematic diagram of DWDM OTM node with the optical multiplexer unit and the
optical demultiplexer unit
OTU
OTU
OM OA
Line-side ODF
OTU
SC1 FIU
OTU
OTU
OD OA
OTU
ODF: Optical distribution frame
6.1.2 OTM Node with Optical Multiplexer Board, Optical

Demultiplexer Board, and Interleaver Board (80-Wavelength)
Functions
The DWDM OTM node is used at the terminal station, and logically divided into
l Transmit direction
l Receive direction
In the transmit direction, the OTM amplifies client-side signals after converging/converting the
signals. Then, the signals are multiplexed with the supervisory channel signals before line
transmission. In the receive direction, the reverse process is performed at the OTM.
This OTM node type applies to stations whose initial wavelengths are more than 40. It supports
expansion of up to 80 wavelengths without interrupting services.
Functional Units
An OTM consists of:
l Unidirectional optical supervisory channel unit (SC1)
l Interleaver Board (ITL)
l Wavelength monitor unit (WMU)


Signal Flow
In the transmit direction, through the OTU, the OTM node converges/transforms the accessed
signals into signals with ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM wavelengths. Then, the signals are
multiplexed by the optical multiplexer unit. Then, the two channels of multiplexed signals (odd-
numbered wavelengths and even-numbered wavelengths) are sent to the ITL for wavelength
multiplexing. As a result, one channel of multiplexed signals of 80 wavelengths in C band is
formed. The frequency spacing is 50 GHz. Then, these main path optical signals are amplified
and multiplexed with the optical supervisory signal. Finally, the multiplexed signals are sent to
the line for transmission.
In the receive direction, the optical supervisory signal and the main path optical signals are
separated. Then, the optical supervisory signal is sent to the optical supervisory channel (OSC)
unit for processing. After amplification, the optical signals in the main channel are demultiplexed
into two channels of multiplexed signals (odd-numbered wavelengths and even-numbered
wavelengths) with the frequency spacing of 100 GHz by the ITL. Then, each channel of
multiplexed signals is demultiplexed into a single channel of optical signals, and finally sent to
the corresponding client equipment after being transformed/divided by the OTUs.
NOTE
l The channel spacing within each group is 100 GHz, that is, the channel spacing at each multiplexer/
demultiplexer is 100 GHz. The spacing between two adjacent channels, for example channel 1 and
channel 2, however, is 50 GHz. Therefore, the interleaver can be used to realize 50 GHz channel
spacing.
l For example, the frequencies of a multiplexed signal are 192.1 THz, 192.2 THz...196.0 THz, totally
40 channels. The frequencies of another multiplexed signal are 192.15 THz, 192.25 THz...196.05 THz,
totally 40 channels. After passing through the interleaver, the output frequencies change to 192.1 THz,
192.15 THz, 192.2 THz, 192.25 THz...196.05 THZ, totally 80 channels with channel spacing of 50
GHz. In this way, the interleaver multiplexes or demultiplexes odd channels and even channels.
The schematic diagram of this OTM node type is shown in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 Schematic diagram of DWDM OTM node with the optical multiplexer unit, the
optical demultiplexer unit and ITL board (80-wavelength)
OTU
OTU
OM
(C-ODD)
OTU
OTU
WMU
OTU
OM
OA
(C-EVEN)
Line-side ODF
OTU
ITL FIU
SC1
OTU
OTU OA
OD
(C-ODD)
OTU
OTU
OTU
OD
(C-EVEN)
OTU
ODF: optical distribution frame WMU: wavelength monitor unit ITL: interleaver board
C-ODD: ODD channels in C band C-EVEN: EVEN channels in C band
6.2 OLA in a DWDM System

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides OLA equipment for a DWDM system.
Functions
The DWDM OLA equipment is used for amplification of optical signals from two transmission
directions.
Functional Units
An OLA consists of:

l Bidirectional optical supervisory channel unit (SC2)

Signal Flow
The FIU board separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and
sends the former to the OSC unit for processing.
The main path optical signals are amplified by the amplifier unit and multiplexed with the OSC
that has already been processed, and then sent to the line fiber for transmission.
The schematic diagram of DWDM OLA equipment is shown in Figure 6-3.
Figure 6-3 Schematic diagram of DWDM OLA equipment
OA
West East
line-side line-side
FIU SC2 FIU
ODF ODF
OA
FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit

SC2: bidirectional OSC unit ODF: Optical distribution frame
6.3 FOADM in a DWDM System

6.3.1 FOADM Node with Optical Multiplexer Unit and Optical

Demultiplexer Unit
Functions
FOADM adds/drops fixed wavelengths to/from the multiplexed signals. This FOADM node
type is usually applied to central sites. It consists of two back-to-back OTMs. Its advantage is
that it can be expanded without interrupting the services.
Functional Units
An FOADM consists of:


Signal Flow
The DWDM FOADM node is responsible for processing the optical signals in two transmission
directions.
It separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and sends the former
to the OSC unit for processing.
Main path signals are sent into the OADM demultiplexer after amplification. Certain
wavelengths are dropped and enter the OTU before being sent to the local client equipment. The
other wavelengths are not demultiplexed locally. They pass through and are multiplexed with
the locally added wavelengths by the multiplexer before the optical amplification. Finally, the
signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.
When the optical transmission distance is long, it may prevent the line extension by one or more
than one affecting factors of system transmission performance, such as dispersion, power, optical
noise, non-linear effect, or polarization mode dispersion. In this case, regeneration OTU can be
configured to perform the 3R (reshaping, retiming, and regenerating) of electrical signals.
The schematic diagram of this FOADM node type is shown in Figure 6-4.
Figure 6-4 Schematic diagram of DWDM FOADM node with the optical multiplexer unit and
the optical demultiplexer unit
SC2
West East
line-side OA OD OM OA
OTU OTU line-side
ODF FIU FIU ODF
OTU OTU
OA OM OD OA
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU: optical transponder unit OM: optical multiplexer unit SC2: bidirectional OSC unit
ODF: Optical distribution frame

6.3.2 FOADM Node with OADM Units
Functions
FOADM adds/drops fixed wavelengths to/from the multiplexed signals. This FOADM node
type is usually applied to edge sites. It has the following features:
l Small insertion loss
l Flexible expansibility
l Low initial investment
Functional Units
An FOADM consists of:
l Optical add/drop multiplexer (OADM)
Signal Flow
The DWDM FOADM node is responsible for processing the optical signals in two transmission
directions.
The FIU separates the optical supervisory signal from the main path optical signals and sends
the former to the OSC unit for processing.
Main path signals are sent into the OADM demultiplexer after amplification. Certain
wavelengths are dropped and enter the OTU before being sent to the local client equipment. The
other wavelengths are not demultiplexed locally. They pass through and are multiplexed with
the locally added wavelengths by the multiplexer before the optical amplification. Finally, the
signals are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.
This type of FOADM node does not support the C-ODD band.
The schematic diagram of this FOADM node type is shown in Figure 6-5.

Figure 6-5 Schematic diagram of DWDM FOADM node with OADM boards
SC2
FIU OA OA FIU
West OADM OADM East
line-side Unit Unit
OA OA line-side
ODF
ODF
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
OTU: optical transponder unit FIU: fiber interface unit SC2: bidirectional OSC unit
OA: optical amplifier unit OADM unit: OADM unit(s) ODF: Optical distribution frame
6.4 ROADM in a DWDM System

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides ROADM equipment.
6.4.1 ROADM Node with WSD9 Board and WSM9 Board (40-
Wavelength)
Functions
The reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with WSS technology can add
and drop channels dynamically within a ring network. It supports up to eight-dimensional
grooming and extensions between ring networks.
The WSD9 realizes dynamic and configurable demultiplexing of any wavelength to any port.
The board can output any wavelength group at any node in ring networks and chain networks.
After that, it can distribute any output wavelength to any port to achieve genuine dynamic
wavelength distribution.
The WSM9 realizes dynamic and configurable multiplexing of any wavelength to any port. The
board can input any wavelength group at any node in ring networks and chain networks. Any
wavelength can be input through any port of the WSM9. It can achieve genuine dynamic
The ROADM formed by the WSD9 and the WSM9 can be adopted in center sites or edge sites.
It has the following advantages:
l Flexible expansion without service interruption

l Low operation cost

l Adjustment of wavelength adding/dropping and passing through status by NM software to

achieve remote dynamic adjustment of wavelength status
Functional Units
An ROADM system with 40 wavelengths, which consists of WSD9 and WSM9 boards, has the
following units:
l Optical add/drop multiplexer or optical multiplexer and demultiplexer (OADM/OM/OD)
l 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board (WSM9)
l 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board (WSD9)
Signal Flow
ROADMs process optical signals in two transmission directions.
The FIU board separates optical supervisory signals and the main path signals from the received
line signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory units for
processing. The main path signals are amplified and sent to the WSD9 board.
The wavelengths that need to be dropped locally are output from the specified ports according
to the configuration. The multiplexed signals output from the WSD9 board are demultiplexed
to single wavelengths by the demultiplexer or OADM unit before entering the OTU and the local
client equipment. The single wavelengths output from the WSD9 board are sent to the client
equipment directly through the OTU board.
The other wavelengths are not added/dropped locally. They pass through and are multiplexed
with the wavelength input by the WSM9 before optical amplification. Then they are multiplexed
with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.
Figure 6-6 shows the functional modules of this type of ROADM.

Figure 6-6 Schematic diagram of ROADM node with the WSM9 board and WSD9 board
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
OD OM
West OA WSD9 WSM9 OA East

line-side line-side
ODF FIU FIU
SC2 ODF
OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
OM OD
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit SC2: bidirectional OSC unit
OD: optical demultiplexer OM: optical multiplexer OTU: optical transponder unit
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective ODF: optical distribution frame
switching demultiplexing board switching multiplexing board
6.4.2 ROADM Node with WSD9 Board and WSM9 Board (80-
Wavelength)
Functions
The reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with WSS technology can add
and drop channels dynamically within a ring network. It supports up to eight-dimensional
grooming and extensions between ring networks.
The board can output any one of the wavelength groups at any node in ring networks and chain
networks. After that, it can distribute any output wavelength to a port to achieve genuine dynamic
board can input any one of the wavelength groups at any node in ring networks and chain
networks. After that, it can distribute any input wavelength to a port to achieve genuine dynamic
The ROADM formed by the WSD9 and the WSM9 can be adopted in center sites or edge sites.
It has the following advantages:



realize remote dynamic adjustment of wavelength status
Functional Units
An ROADM system with 80 wavelengths, which consists of WSD9 and WSM9 boards, has the
following units:
l Fixed optical add/drop multiplexer or optical multiplexer and demultiplexer (OADM/OM/
OD)
l Interleaver unit (ITL)
l 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board (TN13WSM9)
l 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board (TN13WSD9)
Signal Flow
The FIU board separates optical supervisory signals and the main path signals from the received
line signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory units for
processing. The main path signals are amplified and sent to the TN13WSD9 board.
In Figure 6-7, the ITL board shown inside the dashed line frame is optional.
l If the ITL board is configured, the wavelengths that need to be dropped locally are output
to the ITL board through an interface on the TN13WSD9 board. The ITL board splits the
multiplexed signals into two groups: odd-numbered wavelength signals and even-
numbered wavelength signals. These two groups of signals are output to the OD (C-ODD)
and OD (C-EVEN) boards respectively.
l If the ITL board is not configured, the odd and even-numbered wavelengths that need to
be output locally are output to the OD (C-ODD) and OD (C-EVEN) boards respectively
through two interfaces on the TN13WSD9 board.
The OD (C-EVEN) board (or an OADM board) demultiplexes the group of multiplexed even-
numbered wavelengths into single even-numbered wavelengths that are sent to the local client
equipment through the OTU board. The OD (C-ODD) board demultiplexes the group of
multiplexed odd-numbered wavelengths into single odd-numbered wavelengths that are sent to
the local client equipment through the OTU board. The single wavelengths output from the
TN13WSD9 board are sent to the local client equipment directly through the OTU board.
The wavelengths that are not added/dropped locally pass through to the TN13WSM9 board.
The OM (C-EVEN) board (or an OADM board) multiplexes the locally added even signals into
one channel of even signals, and the OM (C-ODD) board multiplexes the locally added odd
signals into one channel of odd signals. These two channels of multiplexed signals are sent to
the TN13WSM9 board through two ports respectively, or are sent to the TN13WSM9 board
after being further multiplexed into one channel of signals by the ITL board. The locally added
signals can also be input to the TN13WSM9 board through the OTU board.

The wavelength input by the TN13WSM9 board is multiplexed with the pass-through
wavelength before optical amplification occurs. Then they are multiplexed with the processed
optical supervisory signals for line transmission.
Figure 6-7 Schematic diagram of ROADM node with the WSM9 board and WSD9 board
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U U U
(C-ODD) (C-EVEN) (C-ODD) (C-EVEN)

OD OD OM OM
ITL ITL
OA WSD9 WSM9 OA
West East
line-side FIU FIU line-side
ODF SC2 ODF
OA WSM9 WSD9 OA
ITL ITL
OM OM OD OD
(C-EVEN) (C-ODD) (C-EVEN) (C-ODD)
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U U U
ITL: interleaver board OD: optical demultiplexer OM: optical multiplexer
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective OTU: optical transponder unit
switching demultiplexing board switching multiplexing board
ODF: optical distribution frame C-ODD: ODD channels in C band C-EVEN: EVEN channels in C
band
6.4.3 ROADM Node with WSD9 Board and RMU9 Board (40-
Wavelength)
Functions
The reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with WSD9 board and RMU9
board can add and drop channels dynamically within a ring network. It supports up to eight-
dimensional grooming and extensions between ring networks.

networks. After that, it can distribute any output wavelength to any port to achieve genuine
dynamic wavelength distribution.
The RMU9 adds wavelengths. Its adding port can cooperate with the wavelength-tunable OTU
to achieve all dynamic input of eight wavelengths. Each adding port of the RMU9 can be
connected to the multiplexer. Client-side signals are multiplexed by the multiplexer and input
through the adding port of the RMU9.
The ROADM formed by the WSD9 and the RMU9 board can be adopted in center sites or edge
sites. It has the following advantages:
Functional Units
An ROADM system, which consists of WSD9 and RMU9 boards, has the following units:
l Optical add/drop multiplexer or optical multiplexer and demultiplexer (OADM/OM/OD)
l 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board (WSD9)
l 9-port ROADM multiplexing board (RMU9)
Signal Flow
It separates optical supervisory signals and the main path signals from the received line signals.
The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory units for processing. The main
path signals are amplified and sent to the WSD9.
The wavelengths that need to be dropped locally are output from the specified ports according
to the configuration. The multiplexed signals output from the WSD9 board are demultiplexed
to single wavelengths by the demultiplexer or OADM unit before entering the OTU and the local
client equipment. The single wavelengths output from the WSD9 board are sent to the client
equipment directly through the OTU board.
The wavelengths that are not added/dropped locally pass through to the RMU9 board.
The OM board multiplexes the locally added signals into one channel of signals, and the
multiplexed signals are sent to the RMU9 board. The locally added signals can also be input to
the RMU9 through the OTU board.
The wavelengths coming from the RMU9 are multiplexed with the pass-through wavelength
before optical amplification. Then they are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory
signals for line transmission.

NOTE
The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface of the RMU9 can be cascaded with an optical
amplifier board. If no cascading is required, connect the TOA optical interface and the ROA optical
interface of the RMU9 directly.
Figure 6-8 Schematic diagram of ROADM node with WSD9 board and RMU9 board
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
OD OM
OA WSD9 RMU9 OA East

West
line-side line-side
FIU FIU
ODF SC2 ODF
OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
OM OD
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective RMU9: 9-port ROADM ODF: optical distribution frame
switching demultiplexing board multiplexing board
6.4.4 ROADM Node with WSD9 Board and RMU9 Board (80-
Wavelength)
Functions
The reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with WSD9 board and RMU9
dimensional grooming and extensions between ring networks.
The WSD9 achieves dynamic and configurable demultiplexing of any wavelength to any port.
networks. After that, it can distribute any output wavelength to any port to achieve genuine
The RMU9 adds wavelengths. Its adding port can cooperate with the wavelength-tunable OTU
to achieve all dynamic input of eight wavelengths. Each adding port of the RMU9 can be
connected to the multiplexer. Client-side signals are multiplexed by the multiplexer and input
through the adding port of the RMU9.

The ROADM formed by the WSD9 and the RMU9 board can be used in center sites or edge
Functional Units
An ROADM system, which consists of WSD9 and RMU9 boards, has the following units:
l OADM or optical multiplexer and demultiplexer (OADM/OM/OD)
l 9-port wavelength selective switching demultiplexing board (TN13WSD9)
l 9-port ROADM multiplexing board (RMU9)
Signal Flow
It separates optical supervisory signals and the main path signals from the received line signals.
The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory units for processing. The main
path signals are amplified and sent to the TN13WSD9.
In Figure 6-9, the ITL board shown in the dashed line frame is optional.
to the ITL board through an interface on the TN13WSD9 board. The ITL board splits the
through two interfaces on the TN13WSD9 board.
The OD (C-EVEN) board (or an OADM board) demultiplexes the group of multiplexed even-
numbered wavelengths into single even-numbered wavelengths that are sent to the client
equipment through the OTU board. The OD (C-ODD) board demultiplexes the group of
multiplexed odd-numbered wavelengths into single odd-numbered wavelengths that are sent to
the client equipment through the OTU board. The single wavelengths output from the
TN13WSD9 board are sent to the client equipment directly through the OTU board.
The wavelengths that are not added/dropped locally pass through to the RMU9.

the RMU9 board through two ports respectively, or are sent to the RMU9 board after being
further multiplexed into one channel of signals by the ITL board. The locally added signals can
also be input to the RMU9 through the OTU board.
The wavelength input by the RMU9 is multiplexed with the pass-through wavelength before
optical amplification. Then they are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals
for line transmission.
NOTE
The optical signals output through the TOA optical interface of the RMU9 can be cascaded with an optical
amplifier board. If no cascading is required, connect the TOA optical interface and the ROA optical
interface of the RMU9 directly.
Figure 6-9 Schematic diagram of ROADM node with WSD9 board and RMU9 board
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U U U

OD OD OM OM
ITL ITL
OA WSD9 RMU9 OA
West East
ODF SC2 ODF
OA RMU9 WSD9 OA
ITL ITL
OM OM OD OD
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U U U
WSD9: 9-port wavelength selective RMU9: 9-port ROADM OTU: optical transponder unit
switching demultiplexing board multiplexing board
ODF: optical distribution frame C-ODD: ODD channels in C band C-EVEN: EVEN channels in C
band

6.4.5 ROADM Node with RDU9 Board and WSM9 Board (40-
Wavelength)
Functions
The reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with RDU9 board and WSM9
dimensional grooming and extension between ring networks.
The RDU9 drops wavelengths. Each dropping port of the RDU9 can be connected to the
demultiplexer. The broadcasting signals are demultiplexed by the demultiplexer and output to
the OTU board.
networks. Any wavelength can be input through any port of the WSM9. It can achieve genuine
The ROADM formed by the RDU9 and the WSM9 boards can be adopted in center sites or edge

Functional Units
An ROADM system, which consists of RDU9 and WSM9 boards, has the following units:

l 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board (RDU9)
l 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board (WSM9)
Signal Flow
The FIU separates optical supervisory signals and the main path signals from the received line
signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory units for processing.
The main path signals are amplified and sent to the RDU9.
The signals are broadcasting to the dropping ports of the RDU9. The wavelengths that need to
be dropped locally are demultiplexed to single wavelengths by the demultiplexer or OADM unit.
Then the single wavelengths are sent to the client equipment through the OTU board.

The wavelengths that are not added/dropped locally pass through to the WSM9 board.
The OM board multiplexes the locally added signals into one channel of signals, and the
multiplexed signals are sent to the WSM9 board. The locally added signals can also be input to
the WSM9 through the OTU board.
The wavelengths coming from the WSM9 are multiplexed with the pass-through wavelength
before optical amplification. Then, they are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory
Figure 6-10 Schematic diagram of ROADM node with RDU9 board and WSM9 board
O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U
OD OD OM
OA RDU9 WSM9 OA
West East
ODF SC2 ODF
OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
OM OD OD
O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U
WSM9: 9-port wavelength selective RDU9: 9-port ROADM ODF: Optical distribution frame
switching multiplexing board demultiplexing board
6.4.6 ROADM Node with RDU9 Board and WSM9 Board (80-
Wavelength)
Functions
The reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with RDU9 board and WSM9
dimensional grooming and extension between ring networks.

The RDU9 drops wavelengths. Each dropping port of the RDU9 can be connected to the
demultiplexer. The broadcasting signals are demultiplexed by the demultiplexer and output to
the OTU board.
networks. Any wavelength can be input through any port of the WSM9. It can achieve genuine
The ROADM formed by the RDU9 and the WSM9 boards can be adopted in center sites or edge
Functional Units
An ROADM system, which consists of RDU9 and WSM9 boards, has the following units:
l 9-port ROADM demultiplexing board (RDU9)
l 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing board (TN13WSM9)
Signal Flow
The FIU separates optical supervisory signals and the main path signals from the received line
signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory units for processing.
The main path signals are amplified and sent to the RDU9.
In Figure 6-11, the ITL board shown in the dashed line frame is optional.
to the ITL board through an interface on the RDU9 board. The ITL board splits the
l If the ITL board is not configured, the wavelengths that need to be output locally are output
to the OD (C-ODD) and OD (C-EVEN) boards through two interfaces on the RDU9 board.
The OD (C-EVEN) board (or an OADM board) demultiplexes the even-numbered wavelengths
into single even-numbered wavelengths that are sent to the client equipment through the OTU
board. The OD (C-ODD) board demultiplexes the odd-numbered wavelengths into single odd-
numbered wavelengths that are sent to the client equipment through the OTU board.

The wavelengths that are not added/dropped locally pass through to the TN13WSM9.
the TN13WSM9 board through two ports respectively, or are sent to the TN13WSM9 board
after being further multiplexed into one channel of signals by the ITL board. The locally added
signals can also be input to the TN13WSM9 through the OTU board.
The wavelength input by the TN13WSM9 is multiplexed with the pass-through wavelength
before optical amplification. Then, they are multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory
Figure 6-11 Schematic diagram of ROADM node with RDU9 board and WSM9 board
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U

OD OD OM OM
ITL ITL
OA RDU9 WSM9 OA
West East
ODF SC2 ODF
OA WSM9 RDU9 OA
ITL ITL
OM OM OD OD
O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T
U U U U U U U U
WSM9: 9-port wavelength RDU9: 9-port ROADM OTU: optical transponder unit
selective switching multiplexing demultiplexing board
board
ODF: Optical distribution frame C-ODD: ODD channels in C band C-EVEN: EVEN channels in C
band

6.4.7 ROADM Node with WSMD4 Boards

Functions
The reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with WSMD4 boards can add
and drop channels dynamically within a ring network. It supports up to four-dimensional
grooming and extension between ring networks.
WSMD4 board achieves the dynamic and configurable multiplexing and demultiplexing of any
wavelengths to any ports. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths at
the local station through any ports. It also can transmit any wavelength combination to any ports,
so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. The ROADM node uses two WSMD4s
to add or drop any service in any even-numbered wavelength and odd-wavelength channel of
the two directions in the C band.
The ROADM formed by the WSMD4 boards can be adopted in center sites or edge sites. It has
the following advantages:
Functional Units
An ROADM system, which consists of WSMD4 boards, has the following units:
l 4-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing and demultiplexing board (WSMD4)
Signal Flow
An ROADM node consists of four WSMD4s. The signal grooming from west to east, south, and
north is taken for example. The signal grooming from east, south, and north to the other three
of the four directions is the same as that from west to east, south and north.
Initially, the optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals are separated from the
line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory
unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the WSMD4 board after being
amplified.
The WSMD4 board splits the main path optical signals into four equal optical signals. The optical
demultiplexing unit demultiplexes the main path signals into single wavelengths that need be
output from the local station.
If the service signals need be output eastward, the signals from west WSMD4 board are input
through the east WSMD4 board. The added wavelengths that need be output eastward are added

through an input port on the east WSMD4 board. The added wavelengths are multiplexed with
the wavelengths groomed from west. The multiplexed wavelengths are amplified and are further
multiplexed with the processed optical supervisory signals for line transmission.
The signal flow of the services to be output southward or northward is the same as that eastward.
The ITL board is optional in an ROADM system, which consists of WSMD4 boards.
to the ITL board through an interface on the WSMD4 board. The ITL board splits the
through two interfaces on the WSMD4 board.
Figure 6-12 Schematic diagram of ROADM node with WSMD4 boards
F F
West I East
I
line-side WSMD4 WSMD4 line-side
U U
ODF ODF
South F F
WSMD4 WSMD4 North
line-side I I
line-side
ODF U U
ODF
South client-side North client-side
FIU: fiber interface unit WSMD4: 4-port wavelength selective switching ODF: Optical distribution frame
multiplexing and demultiplexing board
6.4.8 ROADM Node with WSMD9 Boards
Functions
The reconfigurable optical add or drop multiplexer (ROADM) with WSMD9 boards can add
and drop channels dynamically within a ring network. It supports up to nine-dimensional
grooming and extension between ring networks.

WSMD9 board achieves the dynamic and configurable multiplexing and demultiplexing of any
wavelengths to any ports. A node on the ring or chain network can receive any wavelengths at
the local station through any ports. It also can transmit any wavelength combination to any ports,
so as to achieve the dynamic allocation of wavelengths. The ROADM node uses two WSMD9s
to add or drop any service in any even-numbered wavelength and odd-wavelength channel of
the two directions in the C band.
The ROADM formed by the WSMD9 boards can be adopted in center sites or edge sites. It has
the following advantages:

Functional Units
An ROADM system, which consists of WSMD9 boards, has the following units:

l 9-port wavelength selective switching multiplexing and demultiplexing board (WSMD9)
Signal Flow
An ROADM node consists of four WSMD9s. The signal grooming from west to east, south, and
north is taken for example. The signal grooming from east, south, and north to the other three
of the nine directions is the same as that from west to east, south and north.
Initially, the optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals are separated from the
line signals received from west. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the optical supervisory
unit for processing, and the main-path optical signals are sent to the WSMD9 board after being
amplified.
The WSMD9 board splits the main path optical signals into nine equal optical signals. The optical
demultiplexing unit demultiplexes the main path signals into single wavelengths that need be
output from the local station.
If the service signals need be output eastward, the signals from west WSMD9 board are input
through the east WSMD9 board. The added wavelengths that need be output eastward are added
through an input port on the east WSMD9 board. The added wavelengths are multiplexed with
the wavelengths groomed from west. The multiplexed wavelengths are amplified and are further
The signal flow of the services to be output southward or northward is the same as that eastward.
The ITL board is optional in an ROADM system, which consists of WSMD9 boards.

to the ITL board through an interface on the WSMD9 board. The ITL board splits the
through two interfaces on the WSMD9 board.
Figure 6-13 Schematic diagram of ROADM node with WSMD9 boards

West Eest
client-side client-side
D D
West A A Eest
line-side S line-side
WSMD9 WSMD9 S
ODF 1 ODF
1
D
South A D
WSMD9 WSMD9 A North
line-side S line-side
ODF 1 S
ODF
1
South North
client-side client-side
DAS1: Double optical amplifier unit WSMD9: 9-port wavelength selective ODF: Optical distribution frame
with supervisory channel switching multiplexing and
demultiplexing board
6.5 REG in a DWDM System

The REG equipment is an electrical regenerator and is used to further extend the optical
Functions
We have already discussed that the OLA can extend the optical transmission distance without
regeneration. However, when the distance is longer, such factors as dispersion, optical noise,
non-linear effect, or PMD will affect the transmission performance. In this case, we need to
regenerate the original signals. An REG implements the 3R function: reshaping, retiming and
regenerating. This is to improve the signal quality and to extend the transmission distance.

Functional Units
An REG station contains:
l Optical transponder unit (OTU) or line unit
l Optical multiplexer (OM)
l Optical demultiplexer (OD)
l Optical amplifier (OA)
l Optical supervisory channel unit (OSC)
l Multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit (MCA)
Signal Flow
The signal flow of the REG is similar to that of back-to-back OTMs, except that no signal is
added or dropped. Signals are regenerated through the OTU or line unit.
The REG node is responsible for processing the optical signals in two transmission directions.
It separates the optical supervisory signals and the main path optical signals from the received
line signals. The optical supervisory signals are sent to the OSC unit for processing. The main
path signals are sent to the demultiplexer after being amplified. The demultiplexed signals enter
the OTU or line unit and are reshaped, re-timed, and regenerated. Then the wavelengths are
multiplexed by the multiplexer before the optical amplification. Finally, the signals are
Figure 6-14 and Figure 6-15 show the block diagram of the REG signal flow.

Figure 6-14 REG signal flow (OTU as regeneration unit)
λ01
DCM OTU DCM
λ02
OTU
OA OM OD OA
λn
OTU
Client-side ODF
Client-side ODF
F F
West
East
I SC2 I
U U
λ01
OTU MCA
λ02
OTU
OA OD OM OA
λn
DCM OTU DCM
OTU: OTU with regenertion function(LSXLR or LSXR)
λ01
DCM OTU OTU DCM
λ02
OTU OTU
OA OM OD OA
λn
OTU OTU
Client-side ODF
Client-side ODF
F F
East
West
I SC2 I
U U
λ01
OTU OTU MCA
λ02
OTU OTU
OA OD OM OA
λn
DCM OTU OTU DCM
OTU: OTU without regeneration function(LOM, TMX tec.)
OTU: optical transponder unit OM: optical multiplex unit SC2: bidirectional OSC unit
OD: optical demultiplex unit FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit
ODF: Optical distribution frame MCA: spectrum analyzer unit DCM: dispersion compensation module

Figure 6-15 REG signal flow (line unit as regeneration unit)
λ01
DCM Line Unit Line Unit DCM
λ02
Line Unit Line Unit
OA OM OD OA
λn
Line Unit Line Unit
Client-side ODF
Client-side ODF
F F
West
West
I SC2 I
U U
λ01
Line Unit Line Unit
MCA
λ02
Line Unit Line Unit
OA OD OM OA
λn
DCM Line Unit Line Unit DCM
Electrical cross-connection
OM: optical multiplex unit OD: optical demultiplex unit SC2: bidirectional OSC unit
FIU: fiber interface unit OA: optical amplifier unit ODF: optical distribution frame
MCA: spectrum analyzer unit DCM: dispersion compensation module
6.6 OTM in a CWDM System

The OptiX OSN 8800 provides OTM equipment.
Functions
The OTM is adopted in terminal stations, logically divided into transmit direction and receive
direction. In the transmit direction, the OTM converges or converts the client-side signals. Then,
the signals are multiplexed into main path signals by the OADM before line transmission. In the
receive direction, the OTM performs the reverse process.
Functional Units
A CWDM OTM node has the following functional units:

Signal Flow
In the transmit direction, the accessed signals are converged/converted by the OTU into signals
with ITU-T G.694.2-compliant CWDM wavelengths. After that, the signals are multiplexed by
the OADM unit into the main path signals for line transmission.

In the receive direction, the line signals are demultiplexed by the OADM unit into signals of
different wavelengths, and then sent to the corresponding client equipment after being converted/
divided by the OTUs.
The schematic diagram of CWDM OTM node is shown in Figure 6-16.
Figure 6-16 Schematic diagram of CWDM OTM node
OTU
Line-side ODF
OTU
OADM
Unit
OTU
OTU
OADM Unit: OADM unit(s) OTU: Optical transponder unit ODF: Optical distribution frame
6.7 FOADM in a CWDM System

Functions
FOADM adds/drops fixed wavelengths to/from the multiplexed signals.
Functional Units
A CWDM FOADM node has the following functional units:
Signal Flow
The CWDM FOADM node is responsible for processing the optical signals in two transmission
directions.
It receives and sends line signals to the OADM unit, where some wavelengths are dropped to
the OTUs and then to the client side equipment.
Other wavelengths just pass through the OADM unit and are multiplexed with the wavelengths
added locally.
Then, the multiplexed wavelengths are sent to the line for transmission.

The schematic diagram of CWDM FOADM node is shown in Figure 6-17.
Figure 6-17 Schematic diagram of CWDM FOADM node
Pass through East

West
line-side OADM Unit OADM Unit line-side
ODF ODF
O O O O
T T T T
U U U U
West client-side equipment East client-side equipment
OADM Unit: OADM unit(s) OTU: Optical transponder unit ODF: Optical distribution frame

Product Description 7 About the ASON
7 About the ASON
About This Chapter
The ASON, the automatically switched optical network, is a new generation of the optical
transmission network, all called ASON optical network. This section describes some basic
concepts of the ASON and application of the ASON software.
7.1 Overview
The ASON software provided by Huawei can be applied to the OptiX OSN series products to
support the evolution from traditional network to ASON network. It complies with the ITU and
IETF ASON/GMPLS-related standards.
7.2 ASON Software and ASON Functions
Huawei provides the software on the ASON control plane, which implements the functions such
as network callings and connections and dynamic control of the transport plane through signaling
switching.
7.3 Automatic Discovery of Topologies and Resources
On an ASON network, link resources, network topologies, and fibers between sites can be
automatically discovered, and then a network map is automatically generated. The ASON
software dynamically obtains the resource status of the wavelength/sub-wavelength services in
real time, including the occupied and idle resources, providing a quick approach to know the
current network capacity.
7.4 Creation and Deletion of the ASON Trail
The RSVP-TE signaling is needed during the process of creation, deletion, change and rerouting
of the ASON trail.
7.5 OTN ASON Feature
The OptiX OSN WDM series products of Huawei can provide the OTN ASON function after
the ASON software is loaded.
7.6 Optical-Layer and Electrical-Layer ASON Services
The ASON software provides the wavelength-level ASON services at the optical layer and sub-
wavelength level ASON services at the electrical layer. Hence, customers can implement flexible
service grooming at different layers.

7.1 Overview
The ASON software provided by Huawei can be applied to the OptiX OSN series products to
support the evolution from traditional network to ASON network. It complies with the ITU and
IETF ASON/GMPLS-related standards.
7.1.1 Background and Advantages

Compared with the WDM network, the transmission network that applies the new ASON
technology shows advantages in service configuration, bandwidth utilization and protection
schemes.
In the traditional transmission network, the WDM transmission equipment functions as fibers.
Currently, the WDM transmission equipment also carries services. As a result, more
requirements are for the operability of the WDM equipment. The traditional network has the
following problems:
l The service configuration is complex and capacity expansion or service provision takes a
long period.
l The bandwidth utilization is of a low rate and low efficiency. In a ring network, half of the
bandwidth should be reserved.
l Just a few protection schemes are available and the performance of self-healing protection
is poor.
The ASON has been developed to solve these problems. This technology involves signaling
switching and a control plane to enhance its network connection management and recovery
capability. It supports end-to-end service configuration and the service level agreement (SLA).
Service Configuration
Traditional WDM networks are generally chains and rings. The trails and timeslots of their
services are manually configured ring by ring and point by point, which consumes a lot of time
and effort. As networks become increasingly large and complicated, this service configuration
mode cannot meet the rapidly increasing user demands.
The ASON successfully solves this problem by end-to-end service configuration. To configure
a service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, bandwidth requirement and
protection type; the network automatically performs the required operations.
Bandwidth Utilization
Traditional WDM optical transmission networks have a large amount of resources reserved and
lack advanced service protection, and the restore and routing functions. In contrast, with the
routing function the ASON can provide protection by reserving fewer resources, thus increasing
network resource utilization.
Protection and Restoration

Chain and ring are the main topologies used in a traditional WDM network. Optical line
protection or board-level protection are the main protection schemes for the services. In ASON,
mesh is the main topology. Besides protections, the dynamic restoring function is available to

restore the services dynamically. In addition, when there are multiple failures in a network, the
services can be restored as many as possible.
According to the difference in the service restoration time, multiple service types are defined in
ASON networks to meet different customer requirements.
7.1.2 Features of the ASON

As a new technology on the transmission network, the ASON has its own features.
Compared with the traditional network, the ASON has the following features:
l Supports the route calculation strategy that is based on optics parameters and eliminates
the route that does not comply with optics parameters automatically.
l Supports the automatic adjustment of wavelengths during rerouting or optimization, which
solves the wavelength conflict problem. (For OTN network)
l Wavelengths can be automatically allocated for newly created services.
l Configures end-to-end services automatically.
l Discovers the topology automatically.
l Provides mesh networking that enhances the survivability of the network.
l Supports different services which are provided with different levels of protection.
l Provides traffic engineering and dynamically adjusts the network logic topology in real
time to optimize the configuration of network resources.
7.1.3 Huawei OTN ASON Solution

Huawei provides detailed OTN ASON solutions for different layers.
The OTN ASON solution provided by Huawei involves the following products:
l Control plane software: OptiX GSP
l Network management software: iManager U2000
l Equipment on the transport plane: OptiX OSN series equipment
NOTE
The OTN ASON solution provided by Huawei includes optical-layer (OTN_O) and electrical-layer
(OTN_E) ASON services. The optical-layer ASON service achieves OCh-level service grooming and the
electrical-layer ASON service achieves ODUk-level service grooming. Users can determine whether to
choose optical-layer or electrical-layer ASON based on the network situations and service requirements.
Figure 7-1 illustrates the relation among them.

Figure 7-1 Huawei ASON model

Network management
system
Contol plane supported by

OptiX GCP/GSP software
ASON composed
of OSN series
equipment
Currently, Huawei can provide the integral ASON metropolitan transport solution formed by
the OptiX OSN 8800 and OptiX OSN 6800, as shown in the Figure 7-2. The mesh network can
be used in the short long-haul to perform the flexible service grooming. For the ASON products
for different layers, refer to the Table 7-1.

Figure 7-2 ASON metropolitan solution (OTN networking)
Area
backbones
OptiX OSN 8800 T64

OptiX OSN 8800 T32
Short long-hual
OptiX OSN 8800 T16

OptiX OSN 6800
Local networks and
metropolitan core layers
ASON NE
Internet data center
Multi-tenant building
Enterprise
Banks and financial institutions
Intelligent residential community
Table 7-1 ASON WDM NE in the OptiX OSN series products
ASON NE Remarks
OptiX OSN 8800 T64 and ASON NE in short long-haul

OptiX OSN 8800 T32
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 and ASON NE in local network and metropolitan core layers
OptiX OSN 6800
NOTE
In the actual networking of the ASON WDM series products, the reconfigurable optical add/drop
multiplexer board (such as RMU9, WSD9, WSM9, WSMD9 and WSMD4) needs to be configured to
implement the automatic rerouting and restoration of WDM ASON OCh trail.
7.1.4 Introduction and Development of the OTN ASON

The concepts and standards of the ASON appear on the premise that the traditional SDH
transmission system is widely used. The reasonable introduction schemes are necessary.

Introduction Scheme
Two basic introduction schemes are described as follows.
l To create an ASON network:

When the backbone network and MAN need to expand the capacity, you can consider
creating the ASON network.
l To upgrade a traditional WDM network to an ASON network:
If Huawei OptiX OSN series products are deployed in existing network, new software can
be loaded to upgrade the network to an ASON network. If NEs on the existing network can
be used to deploy ASON features, this scheme does not require new equipment and the
network can be smoothly upgraded. If NEs on the existing network cannot be used to deploy
ASON features, the network needs to be reconstructed and then upgraded.
Interconnection between ASON and WDM networks

A great number of WDM networks are currently in service. Hence, for the development of the
ASON, the interconnection between ASON and WDM networks becomes a key factor.
The ASON and WDM networks share the same service granularities, such as ODU2, and ODU1.
Hence, the interconnection between ASON and WDM networks is not a problem from the
viewpoint of service.
The ASON and WDM networks can be uniformly managed only if the equipment in the network
is the Huawei OptiX series equipment.
7.2 ASON Software and ASON Functions

Huawei provides the software on the ASON control plane, which implements the functions such
as network callings and connections and dynamic control of the transport plane through signaling
switching.
7.2.1 Basic Concepts of ASON

The basic concepts related to the ASON are the label switched path (LSP) and rerouting.
ASON
ASON is a new generation optical network that has the following features:
l Customers launch a service request dynamically.
l Routes are selected automatically.
l Signaling controls the creation and removal of connections.
l Network connections are automatically and dynamically completed.
l Switching and transmission are integrated into one system.
LSP
Label switched path (LSP) is the path ASON services pass through. In an ASON, to create ASON
services is to create LSPs. On U2000, LSP is also called ASON Trail.

WDM ASON Trail

WDM ASON Trail is classified into WDM ASON OCh Trail and WDM ASON ODUk Trail.
See Figure 7-3.
l The WDM ASON OCh trail can be created when there are sufficient OCh TE link resources.
l The WDM ASON ODUk trail can be created when there are sufficient TE link resources
where the payload type is ODUk.
Figure 7-3 WDM ASON Trail
ODUk trail
OCh trail
OTU OM OA OA OD OTU
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 does not support the WDM ASON client route.
Rerouting
Rerouting is a means of resuming services. For a non-revertive service, when an LSP is
disconnected, the source node queries and finds the best route to resume services. Then, the
initial node creates a new LSP to transmit the service. After creating a new LSP, the source node
deletes the original LSP.
NOTE
After a revertive service is rerouted, the original LSP is not deleted.

NOTE
For more information on service restoration, refer to 7.2.8 ASON Network Protection and
Restoration.
Rerouting Lockout
In some cases, rerouting is not required after failure of LSP. Then you need to set rerouting
lockout.
Rerouting Policy
Diamond and silver services all support the several rerouting polices. You can flexibly choose
a rerouting policy and properly use network resources according to different network conditions.
l Overlapping policy

During rerouting, the route of the new LSP overlaps the original route whenever possible.
This policy helps save network resources. When bandwidth resources are insufficient, the
service gets more chances to reroute successfully.
l Separating policy
During rerouting, the route of the new LSP is separated from the original route whenever
possible. This policy is applicable to a network with sufficient link resources.
l Best route policy
During rerouting, the best route is computed for the new LSP. Whether the new or old route
resources are utilized again is not considered. This policy chooses a route with the minimum
cost as the new route after rerouting according to network conditions.
l Simulated span restoration policy
During rerouting, the services must reuse the original routes without involving faulty spans.
End-to-end rerouting is enabled only when rerouting on the faulty spans fails, and thus
service route can be controlled and managed more easily.
NOTE
The rerouting policy can be set on the U2000 according to actual conditions.
7.2.2 Structure of the ASON Transmission Network

the ASON has three planes: the control plane, the transport plane, and the management plane.
The most outstanding feature of the ASON compared with the traditional optical network lies
in the introduction of an independent control plane to the transport network. The control plane
brings the revolutionary change to the entire optical network and enables the latter to have the
ability to automatically implement network bandwidth allocation and dynamically configure
trails.
Functions of the three planes of the ASON are as follows:

l Control plane
The control plane mainly controls callings and connections of the network and dynamically
controls the transport plane through signaling exchange (involving setup, release,
monitoring, and maintenance of connections, and provision of protection restoration in case
of a connection failure).
l Transport plane
The traditional WDM network is the transport plane. It transmits optical signals, configures
cross-connection and protection switching for optical signals, and guarantees the reliability
of all optical signals. The switching operations on the transport plane are performed under
the control of the management plane and control plane.
l Management plane
The management plane is a complement to the control plane. It maintains the transport
plane, the control plane and the entire system. On this plane, the end-to-end configuration
can be supported. Its functions include performance management, fault management,
configuration management and security management. The functions of the management
plane are coordinated with the functions of the control plane and transport plane.
As shown in Figure 7-4, the three planes are independent but they interact with each other
through interfaces and defined functions. The management plane communicates with the control
plane and the transport plane through network management interfaces (NMIs). The control plane
communicates with the transport plane through connection control interfaces (CCIs).

Figure 7-4 Three planes of the ASON
NMI
Control plane
Management
CCI plane
NMI
Transmission plane
7.2.3 Location of ASON Software

The ASON software is included in the NE software.
Figure 7-5 shows where ASON software is located in the whole product software system. The
ASON software and NE software run on the SCC board, whereas the board software and network
management (NM) software run on the boards and NM computer respectively, to implement
corresponding functions. The structure of the software for all the OptiX OSN series products is
the same. You can upgrade traditional versions to ASON by loading the NE software that
contains ASON software. Some boards should be upgraded.
Figure 7-5 Software structure of the OptiX OSN series
NM software
NE software ASON software
Board software

7.2.4 Structure of ASON Software

The ASON software is formed by several modules. Each module implements different functions.
According to ITU-T recommendations, ASON has three planes: a control plane, a management
plane, and a transport plane. The management plane refers to the NM layer, and the transport
plane refers to the WDM network. ASON software is used in the control plane, using LMP,
OSPF-TE, and RSVP-TE.
Table 7-2 Acronyms and abbreviations
Acronym Full Spelling
RSVP-TE Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering
OSPF-TE Open Shortest Path First-Traffic Engineering
LMP Link Management Protocol
CSPF Constrained Shortest Path First
Figure 7-6 shows the structure of the ASON software, which consists of a signaling module, a
routing module and a cross-connection management module.
Figure 7-6 Structure of ASON software
ASON software
NMS Signaling
module NE
Cross-connection software
management
module
Routing module
Link management module
Link Management Module

The link management module uses the LMP protocol to perform the following functions.
l Creates and maintains the control channels

l Checks component links and TE links

Signaling Module
The signaling module uses the RSVP-TE protocol to create or remove services according to the
requests from users, and synchronizes and restores services as needed.
Routing Module
The routing module uses the OSPF-TE protocol to perform the following functions.
l Collects and floods TE link information.
l Collects and floods control link information.
l Calculates control route.
The routing module mainly uses the CSPF protocol to perform the following function:
Compute service routes based on information about network-wide TE links
Cross-connection Management Module

The cross-connection management module performs the following functions.
l Creates/Deletes cross-connections.
l Reports link state and alarms.
7.2.5 ASON Protocol

Huawei ASON applies the link management protocol (LMP) as the link management protocol,
OSPF-TE as the routing protocol, and RSVP-TE as the signaling protocol.
The following sections describe the functions of these protocols in an ASON network.
LMP
The LMP performs the following functions in an ASON network.
l Creating and maintaining the control channels between adjacent nodes.
The following is the procedure of creating control channels.
– See Figure 7-7. When two adjacent ASON NEs start up, the LMP uses the OTN
overheads or the DCC channels of the OSC to transmit messages. Node 1 transmits
messages to Node 2, which performs the check to the received messages. If the messages
pass the check, Node 2 returns messages to Node 1. If the messages do not pass the
check, Node 2 returns a message to Node 1, indicating that the messages fail to pass the
check. In this way, Node 2 waits for another check. Hence, a control channel between
the two adjacent nodes is created.
– After the control channel is created, the two nodes store the information about the control
channel and identify the control channel according to the ID.

Figure 7-7 Creating control channels

LMP LMP
Message
Node 1 Node 2
Message
l Verifying component links and TE links.

The following is the procedure of verifying component links and TE Links.
– After the control channels are configured, an attribute consistency check is performed
to the TE links to see if the information is identical at both ends of dynamically
discovered or manually configured TE links. If the check succeeds, the OSPF protocol
is used to flood the information of the TE links to the entire network.
– As shown in Figure 7-8, Node 1 transmits messages and the content to be checked to
Node 2, which checks if it has the same information and returns the check result to Node
1.
– On the OCS network, after a logical board is created for an ASON NE, the ASON
software creates component links for the optical interfaces of the board. Then, the
attributes of component links are configured according to the attributes of the optical
interface. The attributes include slot number, optical interface number, bandwidth and
node ID.
– On the OCS network, after component links are created, the ASON software creates
corresponding TE links. In this case, the LMP starts to verify the component links and
TE links. The LMP performs the verification to verify the consistency of information
at both ends of a link. As shown in Figure 7-8, Node 1 transmits messages and the
content to be checked to Node 2, which checks if it has the same information and returns
the check result to Node 1. If the verification shows consistency, the OSPF-TE can then
flood the information about the TE links to the entire network.
Figure 7-8 Verifying component links and TE links

LMP LMP
Message
Node 1 Node 2
Message

OSPF-TE
The control plane of Huawei ASON applies the OSPF-TE, which is an extended protocol for
OSPF, and performs the following functions.
l Creates and maintains control links.
l Creates neighbor relations.
l Floods and collects the information about the control links on the control plane. According
to the information, the protocol then generates the information about the routes that are
required for forwarding messages on the control plane.
l Floods and collects the information about the TE links on the transport plane. The protocol
then generates the information about the network service topologies for service trail
computation.
RSVP-TE
The RSVP-TE is a protocol for resource reservation. It is a type of signaling. In terms of traffic
engineering, the RSVP is extended to RSVP-TE. The RSVP-TE mainly supports the following
functions:
l LSP creation
l LSP deletion
l LSP attribute modification
l LSP rerouting
l LSP trail optimization
Protocol Authentication
An external entity may modify the OSPF-TE protocol packets of the network, counterfeit a node
of this network and transmit packets, or receive the packets transmitted by nodes in the network
and repeat the attack. To prevent these network insecurities, the ASON provides the function to
authentication protocols. In an ASON domain, the RSVP and OSPF-TE protocols are
authenticated.
The RSVP authentication is configured for nodes and the OSPF-TE authentication for
interconnected interfaces (slots and optical interfaces).
The authentication can be non-authentication, plain text authentication or MD5 authentication.
l Non-authentication: No authentication is required in this mode.
l Plain text authentication: To verify the preset password. The authentication code must be
a character string with no more than eight characters.
l MD5 authentication: To verify the information that is encrypted by the MD5 algorithm.
The authentication code must be a character string with no more than 64 characters.
NOTE
The RSVP does not support plain text authentication.
The check succeeds only when the authentication modes and passwords of adjacent nodes are
the same.
7.2.6 OTN ASON Links

OTN ASON Links include control tunnels, control links and TE links.

Control Channels
The LMP creates and maintains the control channel between NEs. The control channel then
provides a physical channel for the LMP packets. The control channels are classified into in-
fiber and out-fiber control channels. The in-fiber control channels automatically find and use
OTN overhead or the D4-D12 bytes of DCC. The out-fiber control channel uses the Ethernet
links, which should be manually configured.
The verification of TE links can be performed if the control channels are available between two
adjacent nodes.
At least one control channel should be present between two adjacent nodes. If several fibers
exist between adjacent nodes, several control channels can be created.
Control Links
Control links are the communication links created for the communication between the protocol
entities of NEs.
The OSPF control links are created and maintained by the OSPF protocol between two nodes.
The information of the OSPF control links is flooded to the entire network. In this way, each
NE can attain the information and then can form the control topology. The OSPF protocol of
each NE computes the shortest control routes to each NE according to the control topology. The
routes are then recorded in the forward table. The signaling RSVP then uses the routes to transmit
message packets.
By default, control links are created in fibers. Control links can also be created outside fibers on
the condition that the OSPF protocol of the Ethernet ports is enabled.
NOTE
Although the control links and control channels are created in the OTN overheads or DCC channels (D4-
D12), they differ in terms of functions and are independent of each other. The OSPF protocol floods the
information about the control links to the entire network. Each ASON NE stores the information about the
network-wide control links. The ASON NEs do not flood the information about the control channels to the
entire network. Each NE manages and stores the information only about its own control channels.
The OSPF and RSVP protocols transmit messages through the GCC or RES bytes of the OTN.
The gray part in Figure 7-9 indicates the RES byte of OTN overhead.

Figure 7-9 ASON protocol information uses the OTN overhead
3824
3825
4080
14
15
16
17
1
7
8
OTUk[V]
1 Alignm
OH
OPUk OH
Client Signal OTUk
3 ODUk OH FEC
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
1 FAS SM RES
MFAS GCC0 RES JC
2 TCM TCM6 TCM5 TCM4

RES FTFL RES JC
ACT
3 TCM3 TCM2 TCM1 PM EXP RES JC
GCC1 GCC2 APS/PCC RES PSI NJO

4
TE Links
TE link is a traffic engineering link. An ASON NE transmits its bandwidth information to other
ASON NEs on the network in the format of a TE link through the LSA, so as to provide data
for route computation. The TE link is a concept of resources. Different boards generate different
TE links. TE links can be classified into the following types:
l OMS TE link
l OTUk TE link k = 1, 2, 3
l ODUk TE link k = 0, 1, 2, 3
Figure 7-10 shows the layered model of TE links.

Figure 7-10 Layered model of TE links
FIU OMS TE Link FIU
Line Unit Line Unit

OTUk TE Link
ODUk
OTUk
ODUk
OTUk
Tributary Unit ODUk TE Link Tributary Unit
ODUk
ODUk
The corresponding relation between each layer of TE link and its payload type is as follows:
l OMS TE link: bears the OCh.
l OTU3 TE link: bears the ODU3.
l ODU3 TE link: bears the ODU1/ODU2
l ODU2 TE link: bears the ODU1
l ODU1 TE link: bears the ODU0
Certain types of boards are taken as examples to describe the creation process of TE links at
various layers.
See Figure 7-11. After the wavelength trail is created between the FIU boards at two ASON
NEs, the OMS TE link is generated automatically.
See Figure 7-11. After the wavelength trail is created between the NS3 boards at two ASON
NEs, the OTU3 TE link and ODU3 TE link are generated automatically. The payload type of
the OTU3 TE link is ODU3. The payload type of the OTU3 TE link is ODU2.

Figure 7-11 OTU3 TE link and ODU3 TE link

NE1 NE2
NS3 NS3
ODU2 O O O O ODU2
F F
ODU2 D T T D ODU2
I I
ODU2 U U
U U
U U ODU2
3 3 3 3
ODU2 ODU2
O O
S S
C C
OCh TE link
OTU3 TE link
ODU3 TE link
See Figure 7-12. After the wavelength trail is created between the NS2 boards at two ASON
NEs, the OTU2 TE link and ODU2 TE link are generated automatically. The payload type of
the OTU2 TE link is ODU2. The payload type of the OTU2 TE link is ODU1. See Figure
7-12.
Figure 7-12 OTU2 TE link and ODU2 TE link

NE1 NE2
NS2 NS2
ODU1 O O O O ODU1
F F
ODU1 D T T D ODU1
I I
ODU1 U U
U U
U U ODU1
2 2 2 2
ODU1 ODU1
O O
S S
C C
OCh TE link
OTU2 TE link
ODU2 TE link

See Figure 7-13. The ODU1 TE link will be automatically created only after the ODU2 TE link
generates, and the cross-connection between the TOM and NS2 boards is created. The payload
type of the ODU1 TE link is ODU0.
Figure 7-13 ODU1 TE link

NE1 NE2
TOM XCS NS2 NS2 XCS TOM

LP1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 ODU1 LP1
O O O O O O O
O D
D D T T D D
D U
U U U U U U
U 0
0 2 2 2 2 1
1
ODU2 TE link
ODU1 TE link
7.2.7 Function Structure of the OTN ASON

An OTN ASON network consists of ASON NEs, TE links, domains and SPC (soft permanent
connections).
See Figure 7-14.
Figure 7-14 Function structure of the OTN ASON
ASON NE TE link
R1 R4
SPC
R2
R3
ASON domain : ASON NE

: User equipment

ASON NE
An ASON NE is one of the topology components in the ASON. An ASON NE has the following
functions in relation to a traditional NE. See Figure 7-15.
Figure 7-15 ASON NE (OTN networking)

ASON NE
Signaling Routing
( RSVP-TE ) ( OSPF-TE )
Link management protocol ( LMP )
Communication and control Traditional NE
WDM-side/Client- Wavelength WDM-side/Client-

side interface grooming side interface
Node ID is the unique identification of the ASON NE in the control plane. The format of the
node ID is the same as that of the IP address. But the node ID and the IP address of the NE must
be at different network sections.
As a unique identification for NEs on the transport plane, the node ID has the same meaning
regarding an ASON NE and a traditional NE.
The node ID, the NE ID, and the NE IP address are independent of one another.
TE Link
TE link is a traffic engineering link. The ASON NE sends its bandwidth information to other
ASON NEs through the TE link to provide data for route computation. One inter-station fiber
between two FIU boards can be configured with one TE link.
If the ODUk SPRing is configured in an ASON network, the TE links within the ODUk SPRing
can generate working resources and protection resources, which are corresponding to the
working unit and protection unit of the protection group. The TE links without ODUk SPRing
protection are non-protection resources.
ASON Domain
An ASON domain is a subset of a network, which is classified by function for the purpose of
route selection and management. An ASON domain consists of several ASON NEs and TE links.
One ASON NE belongs to one ASON domain.
SPC
In the case of soft permanent connection (SPC), the connection between the user and the
transmission network is configured directly by the NM. The connection within the transmission
network, however, is requested by the NM and then created by the NE's control plane through
signaling. When ASON service is mentioned, it usually refers to SPC.

Permanent connection (PC) is a service connection calculated beforehand and then created
through the NM by issuing a command to NE. A traditional OTN service is a PC.
Switched connection (SC) is a service connection requested by a terminal user (for example, a
router) and is then created in the ASON control plane through signaling.
CAUTION
ASON software only supports SPC. SC is not supported at present.
7.2.8 ASON Network Protection and Restoration

As the transmission network develops, the survivability of the network becomes a key factor in
the design, operation and maintenance of the network. An ASON network must have effective
and flexible protection and restoration schemes.
Difference between Protection and Restoration

Generally, protection involves the capacity pre-allocated among NEs. Simple protection
schemes such as the intra-board 1+1 protection and complex protection schemes such as the
ODUk SPRing protection can be configured. Protection only involves NEs and does not involve
the management system. The protection switching time is short and is generally not more than
50ms. The backup resources, however, cannot be shared in the network.
Generally, restoration involves the usage of any usable capacity among NEs. Even the extra
capacity of low priority can be used for restoration. When a service trail fails, the network
automatically searches for a new route and switches the services from the faulty route. The
algorithm that restores is the same as the algorithm that selects the trail. Restoration requires
spare resources in the network for service rerouting. Service rerouting involves the computation
of routes. Service rerouting involves the computation of routes, route switching, and re-creation
of cross-connections and routes. The service restoration takes a relatively long time.
Protection in an ASON Network

The traditional protection schemes can still be applied in an ASON network. When a fault occurs,
the protection switching is performed by the transport plane. In this case, the protection switching
does not involve the control plane.
Restoration in an ASON Network

In the case of an ASON network, the rerouting scheme is applied to restore services. When an
LSP fails, the source node computes the best trail for service restoration and then uses signaling
to create an LSP. Then, the new trail carries the services. For the non-revertive services, the
original LSP is deleted after the new LSP is created, however, for the revertive services, the
original LSP would not be deleted.
The advantages of rerouting are listed as follows.

l The services can be restored in a fast and automatic manner.
l After the technology for service restoration is applied in an ASON network, less spare
capacity is required when such an ASON network is restored in real time. The bandwidth

utilization is increased considerably. Generally, if a network involves more nodes, the

routes are more complicated and less spare resources are required.
l For OCS network, after the technology for service restoration is applied in an ASON
network, only 30% to 60% of spare capacity is required when such an ASON network is
restored in real time compared with the APS protection or a self-healing ring network. The
bandwidth utilization is increased considerably. Generally, if a network involves more
nodes, the routes are more complicated and less spare resources are required.
Service Restoration
The network restoring schemes can be classified into the centralized restoring scheme and
distributed restoring scheme according to the control mechanism. Huawei ASON applies the
distributed restoring scheme.
If the centralized restoring scheme is applied, a central control system is required to control the
entire network in a comprehensive manner. The central control system contains a very large
network database, which stores all the information about all nodes, links and spare resources.
When a link or a node fails, the fault information is reported to the central control system along
other routes. The central control system then computes a route to replace the faulty route
according to the information stored in the database. The central control system then issues control
commands to each node. A route is created to restore the services.
The distributed restoring scheme does not require any central control system. When a link fails,
the nodes at both ends of the faulty link detect the fault and flood this information to the entire
network. When a node fails, the adjacent nodes detect the fault and flood this information to the
entire network. All LSPs that are involved with the faulty link or node then reroute and new
LSPs are created to restore services.
In a WDM ASON network, when a fiber cut occurs, the WDM ASON OCh trail, WDM ASON
ODUk trail, and WDM ASON Client trail can restore separately. You can set the delay time for
the trail recovery. There is, however, no delay by default.
7.3 Automatic Discovery of Topologies and Resources

On an ASON network, link resources, network topologies, and fibers between sites can be
automatically discovered, and then a network map is automatically generated. The ASON
software dynamically obtains the resource status of the wavelength/sub-wavelength services in
real time, including the occupied and idle resources, providing a quick approach to know the
current network capacity.
For any change to network resources and topologies, such as adding/deleting links, changing
link parameters, adding/deleting network nodes, the ASON software may refresh the relevant
information in real time and inform the network management plane. This facilitates the network
expansion and network reconstruction.
7.3.1 Auto-Discovery of ASON NEs

In the ASON network, the OSPF protocol discovers ASON NEs automatically by sending the
protocol packets.
After discovering the neighbor NEs, the OSPF protocol floods the information about the
neighbor NEs to other NEs. In the end, every ASON NE in the domain has the information about
all ASON NEs in the entire ASON domain.

l When an ASON NE is added to an ASON network, other NEs are able to automatically
discover the new NE by using the OSPF protocol.
l When an ASON NE is removed from an ASON network (for example, power off the NE,
remove the SCC board, or shut down the physical channel), other NEs are able to
automatically detect the missing of this NE.
As shown in Figure 7-16, if two ASON NEs are added, the source topology on the U2000 is
automatically updated in real time.
Figure 7-16 TE link automatic discovery
R1 R4
New NE
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User equipment
7.3.2 Auto-Discovery of Control Links

The ASON network automatically discovers the control links through the OSPF-TE protocol.
When the fiber connection (including the inter-station fiber automatically discovered and the
intra-station fiber manually configured) is complete in an ASON network, each ASON NE uses
the OSPF protocol to discover the control links and then floods the information about its own
control links to the entire network. See Figure 7-17. As a result, each NE obtains the information
of the control links in the entire network and also obtains the information about the network-
wide control topology. The following figure shows the details. Each ASON NE then computes
the shortest route to any ASON NE and writes these routes into the route forwarding table, which
is used for the signaling RSVP to transmit and receive packets.

Figure 7-17 Auto-discovery of control links
ASON Domain
When the fiber connection in the entire network is complete, ASON NEs automatically discover
the network-wide control topology and report the topology information to the management
system. See Figure 7-18.
Figure 7-18 Management of control topology
R1 R4
R2
R3
:ASON NE
: User equipment

7.3.3 Auto-Discovery of TE Links

The ASON network spreads the TE links to the entire network through the OSPF-TE protocol.
After an ASON NE creates a control channel between neighboring NEs through LMP, the TE
link verification can be started. Each ASON NE floods its own TE links to the entire network
through OSPF-TE. Each NE then gets the network-wide TE links, that is, the network-wide
resource topology.
ASON software detects change in the resource topology in real time, including the deletion and
addition of links, and the change in the link parameters, and then reports the change to U2000,
which performs a real-time refresh.
As shown in Figure 7-19, if one TE link is cut, the NM updates the resource topology displayed
on the NM in real time.
Figure 7-19 TE link auto-discovery
R1 R4
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User Equipment
7.4 Creation and Deletion of the ASON Trail

The RSVP-TE signaling is needed during the process of creation, deletion, change and rerouting
of the ASON trail.
7.4.1 Creation of an LSP

The creation of an ASON trail is the creation of an LSP.

As shown in the Figure 7-20, create a bidirectional based on the wavelength services from NE1
to NE3.
Figure 7-20 Creation of an LSP
1 A bi-directional service is to
be created from NE1 to NE3
NE 2
7 4
3
NE 1
5 R2
6
R1 NE 3
2 Compute the route

from NE1 to NE3
The process of LSP creation is as follows:
1. Select the basic information such as service level on the NM, and click the source and sink
nodes that are NE1 and NE3. Respectively select the WDM-side optical interfaces of the
corresponding OTU boards and set the constraint condition of the route according to the
actual use. After confirming the information, the NM issues a command for service creation
to source node NE1.
2. NE1 invokes the CSPF algorithm to compute the most suitable service route according to
the control topology and service topology, which are obtained by the OSPF-TE through
convergence. For example, such a service route is NE1-NE2-NE3.
3. NE1 uses the RSVP-TE signaling protocol to transmit a message to NE2 according to the
service route. NE1 requests NE2 to reserve resources and create a cross-connection.
4. NE2 uses the RSVP-TE signaling protocol to transmit a message to NE3. NE2 requests
NE3 to reserve resources and create a cross-connection.
5. After NE3 creates the cross-connection, NE3 provides feedback message to NE2.
6. NE2 provides a feedback message to NE1.
7. NE1 receives the feedback message and stores the related information. NE2 then reports
the successful creation of the LSP to the management system.
Configuration Trait
The service configuration of the ASON WDM products has the following traits:
l Support the end-to-end bidirectional services of wavelength level based on the OCh trail.
The source and sink of the services must be the WDM-side optical interfaces of the OTU
board.

l Supports the end-to-end bidirectional services on the level of ODUk. That is, after you
specify the source/sink node, source/sink slot, source/sink port, source/sink channel ID,
service level, rate, and protection attributes, a sub-wavelength LSP is created automatically.
l The ODUk SPRing protection configuration can be added or deleted on the ASON ODUk
sub-wavelength service. The span ID, however, cannot be bound with the ASON service.
l Only notice the source and sink of the services but not the intermediate trail in the
configuration of the end-to-end wavelength services.
l Users can set the explicit node, link, the excluded node and link to restrict the service route.
l During route calculation, the ASON software considers the fiber distance, number of node
hops and available bandwidth according to the weights and user cost set by the users to
choose the best route.
7.4.2 Deletion of an LSP

The deletion of an LSP is the deletion of an ASON trail.
As shown in the Figure 7-21, the bidirectional service from NE1 to NE3 is deleted.
Figure 7-21 Deletion of an LSP
1 Delete a service
from NE1 to NE3
NE 2
6 3
2
NE 1
4 R2
5
R1 NE 3
The process for deleting an LSP is described as follows.
1. The management system issues a command to NE1. The requirement is that a bidirectional
service from NE1 to NE3 has to be deleted.
2. NE1 deletes the resources used by the LSP and uses the RSVP-TE signaling to transmit a
message to NE2.
3. After receiving the message from NE1, NE2 deletes the resources used by the LSP and
uses the RSVP-TE signaling to transmit a message to NE3.
4. After receiving the message from NE2, NE3 deletes the resources used by the LSP and
provides feedback message to NE2.
5. NE2 provides a feedback message to NE1.

6. NE1 receives the feedback message and stores the related information. NE2 then reports
the successful deletion of the LSP to the management system.
7.4.3 Rerouting of an LSP

After the trigger conditions of rerouting is detected, for the non-revertive services, a new LSP
is created and the original LSP is deleted, while for the revertive services, the original LSP would
be reserved.
Trigger Conditions of Rerouting

For the WDM service of the OTN networking, Table 7-3 lists the trigger conditions of LSP
rerouting.
Table 7-3 Trigger conditions of rerouting
Event Alarms That Trigger Rerouting

Type
SF The trigger conditions of optical-layer service rerouting include the following

alarms of the FIU board:
FIU: BD_STATUS, MUT_LOS
The trigger conditions of electrical-layer service rerouting include the following
alarms of the OTU board:
ODUk_PM_AIS, ODUk_PM_OCI, ODUk_PM_LCK, ODUk_PM_SSF
OTUk_AIS, OTUk_LOF, OTUk_LOM.
SD The trigger conditions of electrical-layer service rerouting include the following

electrical-layer service alarms of the OTU board:
ODUk_PM_DEG, ODUk_PM_EXC
OTUk_DEG, OTUk_EXC
NOTE
When the BIP detection is of the burst mode, the ODUk_PM_DEG or OTUk_DEG alarm
is reported. When the BIP detection is of the Poisson mode, the ODUk_PM_DEG,
OTUk_DEG, ODUk_PM_EXC or OTUk_EXC alarm is reported.
NOTE
The default state of SD conditions is Disabled. Hence, SD conditions can serve as the
trigger conditions of service rerouting only when the state of SD conditions is set to
Enabled.
NOTE
For details of the above alarms, refer to the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.
For the SDH service of the OCS networking the following alarms trigger the LSP rerouting:
R_LOS, R_LOF, B2_EXC, B2_SD, MS_AIS, MS_RDI, B3_EXC, B3_SD and AU_AIS.
Rerouting Process
When an LSP fails, the faulty LSP sends a rerouting request to the control plane to create a new
LSP. After receiving the request, the source node re-computes the route and allocates resources

for the new LSP. Then, the source node starts the creation of the new LSP. For details on the
process of creating the LSP, refer to 7.4.1 Creation of an LSP.
For a non-revertive service, after the new LSP is created, the original LSP is deleted. For details
on the process of deleting the LSP, refer to 7.4.2 Deletion of an LSP.
7.4.4 Change of an LSP

The change of an LSP is to improve an ASON trail.
The process for the change of an LSP is as follows.
1. The management system issues the command to the source node to change the LSP. After
receiving the request, the source node starts creating a new LSP. Refer to 7.4.1 Creation
of an LSP.
2. After the new LSP is created, the source node and the destination node start to switch the
cross-connection from the original LSP to the new LSP.
3. After the switching, the source node starts the process for the deletion of the original LSP.
Refer to 7.4.2 Deletion of an LSP.
7.5 OTN ASON Feature

The OptiX OSN WDM series products of Huawei can provide the OTN ASON function after
the ASON software is loaded.
7.5.1 End-to-End Service Configuration

The ASON network supports end-to-end service configuration, which is very convenient.
The ASON supports both WDM permanent connections and end-to-end ASON services. To
configure an ASON service, you only need to specify its source node, sink node, and protection
level. Service routing and cross-connection at intermediate nodes are all automatically
completed by the network. You can also set explicit node, excluded node, explicit link and
excluded link to constrain the service routing.
For example, consider the configuration of an ASON service between A and I in Figure 7-22.
The network automatically finds the A-D-E-I route and configures cross-connection at nodes A,
D, E and I. Although there is more than one route from A to I, the network calculates the best
route according to the configured algorithm. It is assumed that A-D-E-I is the best route.
The service is created as follows:
l Choose the bandwidth granularity.

l Choose the server level.
l Choose the source node.
l Choose the sink node.
l According to the service bandwidth and existing network resources, the ASON software
computes a proper service trail through the routing protocol.
l The ASON software sets up end-to-end service connections between sites through the
RSVP-TE signaling protocol.

Figure 7-22 End-to-end service configuration
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User Equipment
The system support optical-layer ASON services that cross electrical regeneration NEs,
including:
l Creation, reroute, and optimization of SLA services, and wavelength-tunable ASON
services crossing electrical regeneration NEs.
l Conversion of crossing electrical regenerator service from static wavelength services to
ASON wavelength services and the vice versa.
l Pre-calculation of the optical-layer ASON services when the services cross electrical
regeneration NEs, including the creation, optimization, and restoration trail preset of SLA
services.
NOTE
The end-to-end wavelengths of the ASON services that cross the electrical regeneration NEs must be the
same.
The regeneration mode of the electrical regeneration NEs that the ASON services cross must be in the
transparent transmission mode and cannot be in the electrical cross-connect back-to-back mode.
7.5.2 Mesh Networking Protection and Restoration

The ASON provides mesh networking protection to enhance service survivability and network
security.
As a main networking mode of ASON, mesh features high flexibility and scalability. Compared
with the traditional WDM network, this networking mode also provides more than one recovery
route for each services so it can best utilize the network resources and enhance the network
security.
On a mesh network, to make the interrupted services available, you can immediately restore the
services through the rerouting mechanism in addition to the traditional protection scheme such
as 1+1 protection and shared protection scheme such as ODUk SPRing. That is, the mesh
network can support traditional protection schemes, the services that can be dynamically

restored, and service restoration mechanisms in case of protection failures. In this manner,
services are not interrupted only if the resources are available.
As shown in Figure 7-23, when the C-G link fails, to restore the service, the network calculates
another route from D to H and creates a new LSP to transmit the service.
Figure 7-23 Trail restoration
Recovery route
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
:ASON NE
:User Equipment
NOTE
In the case of the optical-layer ASON, a wavelength service must be in a channel from end to end. Hence,
the restoration trail with the same channel as that of the original trail may not be found during rerouting.
In this case, the ASON software supports the wavelength tunable function during rerouting. If an end-to-
end restoration trail with the same channel as that of the original trail cannot be found (for example, the
channel in a span is used), the ASON software will try to find another end-to-end restoration trail with
another channel so that the services can be restored to the greatest extent. Note that this function is available
only when the OTU board supports the wavelength tunable function.
7.5.3 SLA Classification of Services

The ASON network can provide services of different QoS to different clients.
The service level agreement (SLA) is used to classify services according to the service protection,
as listed in Table 7-4.

Table 7-4 Service level (WDM Service)

Service Protection Implement Switchi Rerouting Bandwidth
and ation ng Time Time Utilization
Restoratio Means
n Scheme
Diamond Protection intra-board 1 Less than The rerouting 33% (1+1

service and +1 50 ms time varies with protection. One
restoration protection, the network restoration trail
ODUk size, capacity is reserved.)
SNCP and and service
rerouting types.
Silver Restoration Rerouting - 75% (Dynamic

service rerouting and
shared mesh
protection,
resulting in high
utilization of
resources.
Consider a four-
dimensional
node as an
example. The
resource
utilization is
75% in the case
of a single fiber
break.)
Copper No - - - 100% (No

service protection protection.
No Theoretically,
restoration the resources
can be fully
occupied.)
Table 7-5 lists details of the TE links used by ASON services.
Table 7-5 TE links used by WDM ASON trails (WDM Service)

Service Level Working Resource Protection Non-Protection
of TE Link Resource of TE Resource of TE Link
Link
Diamond Not used Not used Used

service
Silver service Not used Not used Used
Copper service Not used Not used Used

7.5.4 Diamond WDM ASON Trail

Diamond WDM ASON trails have the best protection ability. When there are enough resources
on the network, diamond WDM ASON trails provide a permanent 1+1 protection for the WDM
ASON diamond ODUk trail. Diamond services are applicable to voice and data services, VIP
private line, such as banking, security and aviation.
A diamond service is a service with 1+1 protection from the source node to the sink node. It is
also called a 1+1 service. For a diamond service, there are two different LSPs available between
the source node and the sink node. The two LSPs should be as separate as possible. One is the
working LSP and the other is the protection LSP. The same service is transmitted to the working
LSP and the protection LSP at the same time. If the working LSP is proper, the sink node receives
the service from the working LSP; otherwise, from the protection LSP.
NOTE
The optical-layer diamond service specification is removed because of the following factors: (the optical-
layer diamond service solution will be replaced by the associated silver ASON service solution)
l When two LSPs share the same OTU, they use the same wavelength. Therefore, rerouting of the two
LSPs also must use the same wavelength, which makes finding a route very difficult.
l Service switching within 50 ms cannot be guaranteed when 40G OTUs are used because the TDC
adjustment requires more than 50 ms.
l When the service runs on the working LSP, the service performance monitoring is not available for
the backup LSP. This cannot ensure that the backup LSP is in normal state or available, which will
impair the service SLA.
Figure 7-24 shows a diamond service.
Figure 7-24 Diamond Services
Working LSP
R1 R4
E I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
Protection LSP : ASON NE
: User equipment
NOTE
In the creation of diamond services, two LSPs are generated, which have the feature of 1+1 protection for
traditional WDM services. The working trail corresponds to the working LSP, and the protection trail
corresponds to the protection LSP. When the working trail fails, the protection switching is performed
through the traditional WDM 1+1 protection and then a new LSP is created through rerouting.

There are three types of diamond services.

l Permanent 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered once an LSP fails.
l Rerouting 1+1 diamond service: rerouting is triggered only when both LSPs fail.
l Non-rerouting diamond service: rerouting is never triggered.
Table 7-6 lists the attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-7 lists the attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-8 lists the attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service.
Table 7-6 Attributes of the permanent 1+1 diamond services
Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the

creation source node and the sink node.
Protection type During creation, diamond services generate the services that have
the traditional WDM 1+1 protection attribute at the same time.
Different ASON trails support different protection schemes.
For WDM ASON ODUk trail: supports ODUk SNCP
Protection and l If the resources are sufficient, two LSPs are always available
restoration for a permanent 1+1 diamond service. One is the active LSP
and the other is the standby LSP.
l If the resources are not sufficient, one valid LSP can still be
reserved for a permanent 1+1 diamond service to ensure the
service survivability. The other LSP is also available but may
be invalid.
Rerouting l Supports rerouting lockout.

l Supports rerouting priority.
l Supports several rerouting policies:
– Use existing trails whenever possible
– Do not use existing trails whenever possible
– Best route
– Simulated span restoration policy
Revertive Supports reverting to the previous route.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Service conversion l Supports conversion between diamond services and traditional

1+1 services.
l Supports conversion between diamond WDM ASON trails
and silver WDM ASON trails.
l Supports conversion between diamond WDM ASON trails
and copper WDM ASON trails.
Service switching Supports manual switching.

Attribute Permanent 1+1 Diamond Service
Service optimization Supports manual service optimization.
Table 7-7 Attributes of the rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute Rerouting 1+1 Diamond Service
Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node
creation and the sink node.
Protection type During creation, diamond services generate the services that have the
traditional WDM 1+1 protection attribute at the same time. Different
ASON trails support different protection schemes.
Protection and l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is
restoration not triggered.
l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP
for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is triggered
to create a new LSP to restore services.

– Best route
Revertive Supports reverting to the previous route.
Preset restoring Supports setting the preset restoring trail.

trail
Service l Supports conversion between diamond services and traditional 1+1

conversion services.
l Supports conversion between diamond WDM ASON trails and silver
WDM ASON trails.
l Supports conversion between diamond WDM ASON trails and copper
WDM ASON trails.
Service Supports manual switching.

switching
Service Supports manual service optimization.

optimization

Table 7-8 Attributes of the non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service

Attribute Non-rerouting 1+1 diamond service
Requirements Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source node
for creation and the sink node.
Protection type During creation, diamond services generate the services that have the
traditional WDM 1+1 protection attribute at the same time. Different
ASON trails support different protection schemes.
Protection and l When the active LSP fails, services are switched to the standby LSP
restoration for transmission. Rerouting is not triggered.
l When the standby LSP fails, services are not switched. Rerouting is
not triggered.
l When both the active and the standby LSPs fail, rerouting is not
triggered.
Preset restoring Supports setting the preset restoring trail.

trail
Service l Supports conversion between diamond services and traditional 1+1

conversion services.
l Supports conversion between diamond WDM ASON trails and silver
WDM ASON trails.
l Supports conversion between diamond WDM ASON trails and copper
WDM ASON trails.
Service Supports manual switching.

switching

optimization
NOTE
When diamond ODUk ASON WDM trails are created, setting the SNC/N(PM) and SNC/S(TCM) modes
is supported.
When k is 0, only the non-intrusive monitoring (SNC/N(PM)) is supported. When k is 1, 2 or 3, the sub-
layer monitoring (SNC/S(TCM)) and non-intrusive monitoring (SNC/N(PM)) are supported.
When the SNCP type is set as sub-layer monitoring, the U2000 supports setting TCM layers (TCM=1–5).
Traditional services in SNC/I, SNC/N, and SNC/S protection modes can be upgraded into diamond ASON
services with the protection modes unchanged. After rerouting, SNC protection for services in the SNC/I
and SNC/N(TCM) protection modes changes into SNC/N(PM).
7.5.5 Silver WDM ASON Trail

Silver WDM ASON services, including WDM ASON OCh trails, ODUk trails, the revertive
time is several seconds. The silver level service is suitable for those data or internet services that
have low real-time requirement.
Silver services refer to the service connections from the source node to the destination node with
the rerouting protection attribute. They are also called rerouting services. If the LSP of the silver

services fails, rerouting is repeatedly initiated to restore the services until the rerouting is
successful. The silver services compute the restoration tail in real time, and thus no resource
needs to be reserved in advance. Hence, the bandwidth utilization is high. If there are not enough
resources, the services may be interrupted.
As shown in Figure 7-25, A-B-G-H-I is a silver service trail. If the fiber between B and G is
cut, the ASON triggers rerouting from A to create a new LSP that does not pass the cut fiber.
Hence, services are protected.
Figure 7-25 A silver service
R1 R4
E
LSP after rerouting
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
Original LSP R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 7-9 lists the attributes of silver services.
Table 7-9 Attributes of silver services
Attribute Silver Services
Requirements for creation Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the
source node and the sink node.
Service restoration When the original LSP fails, rerouting is triggered to create a
new LSP to restore services.

– Best route

Attribute Silver Services
Revertive Services in the WDM ASON ODUk, OCh trail support reverting
to the previous route manually or automatically.
Preset restoring trail Supports setting the preset restoring trail.
Service migration l Supports migration between silver services and traditional

unprotected services without affecting them.
l Supports migration between silver services and diamond
services.
l Supports migration between silver services and copper
services.
NOTE
In the case of the WDM ASON OCh trails, the conversion between the
silver and diamond or copper is not supported.
Service optimization Supports manual service optimization.
Service association Supports service association.
7.5.6 Copper WDM ASON Trail

The copper services are seldom used. Generally, temporary services, such as the abrupt services
in holidays, are configured as copper services. The copper WDM ASON trails are classified into
OCh trail, ODUk trail.
Copper services are also called non-protection services. If an LSP fails, services do not reroute
and are interrupted. Table 7-10 lists the attributes of copper services.
Table 7-10 Attributes of copper services
Attribute Silver Service
Requirements for Sufficient non-protection resources are available between the source
creation node and the sink node.
Service restoration Does not support rerouting.
Service migration l Supports migration between copper services and traditional

services.
l Supports migration between copper services and diamond services.
l Supports migration between copper services and silver services.
NOTE
In the case of the WDM ASON OCh trails, the conversion between the copper
and diamond or silver levels is not supported.

optimization
Service association Supports service association.

7.5.7 OVPN
In the case of an optical virtual private network (OVPN), multiple operators share one ASON.
When multiple operators share one ASON, different TE link resources are allocated to each
operator. In this case, an operator can use and manage its own TE link resources and ASON
services only. The operators are called OVPN customers.
As shown in Figure 7-26, certain resources are separately allocated to OVPN customers 1 and
2. The network management (NM) users of OVPN customers 1 and 2 are separately created on
the U2000. Then, OVPN customers 1 and 2 can log in to the U2000 through their respective
clients and NM users. OVPN customers 1 and 2 can separately manage and maintain their
resources and ASON services.
Multiple NM users can be created for one OVPN customer. One NM user can manage multiple
OVPN customers.
Figure 7-26 Networking diagram of an OVPN
U2000 Server
U2000 Client U2000 Client

U2000 Client
OVPN OVPN
Customer1 NM User Admin
Customer2
: Resource of OVPN customer 1
: Resource of OVPN c ustomer 2
NOTE
The OVPN function is available only to the optical-layer ASON services.

Enabling the OVPN Function

To perform the OVPN function, you must ensure that all the ASON NEs in the ASON domain
enable the OVPN function. In addition, the OVPN License can be started on the NMS side.
Partitioning the TE Link Resources

The TE link resources are divided into three types: shared resources, unshared resources, and
OVPN customer resources, as shown in Figure 7-27.
Figure 7-27 Partitioning the TE link resources
VC-4
timeslot
. Shared
resources
.
.
.
TE links . Unshared
resources
.
.
.
Resources of OVPN
. customers
.
VC-4
timeslot
Table 7-11 shows the principle for the NM user to use the resources. The NM users are classified
into the following three types:
l NM user (admin): By default, admin is the superuser. The NM user uniquely has the right
to manage the OVPN customers, to partition the OVPN resources, and to use all the TE
link resources.
l OVPN NM user: The OVPN NM user can use the OVPN customer resources (colored) and
shared resources that are partitioned by the NM user admin.
l NM user without the authorities of OVPN customers: This NM user can use the shared
resources only.
Table 7-11 Principle for an NM user to use resources

User Level Shared Resource OVPN User Unshared
Resource Resource
admin Available Available Available
OVPN NM user Available Available Unavailable
NM user without the Available Unavailable Unavailable

authorities of OVPN
customers

NOTE
To allocate the TE links on the MSP ring for OVPN customers, ensure that the timeslots are consistent
with each other in each segment.
OVPN Services
Table 7-12 lists the OVPN service attributes.
Table 7-12 OVPN service attributes

Attribute OVPN Service
Creating a service l When creating a service, the NM user admin can use the shared
resources and OVPN customer resources. Each OVPN service can
use only the timeslot resources of the same color.
l An OVPN customer can create a service on the resources only
allocated to the OVPN customer.
Rerouting When the OVPN service is rerouted, it can use the resources allocated to
the OVPN customer first. If the OVPN customer resources are not
available, the OVPN service can use the shared resources.
Presetting the A restoration trail can be preset. An OVPN customer can use the allocated
restoration trail resources only.
Shared Mesh A shared Mesh restoration trail can be preset. An OVPN customer can
restoration trail use the allocated resources only.
Service switching OVPN services and traditional services can be mutually switched from
each other.
l To switch an SDH service to an ASON service, you need to switch
the static SDH resources to the ASON resources.
l After an ASON service is degraded to an SDH service, the original
ASON service switch to the static SDH resources.
Service An ASON service of an OVPN customer can be optimized on the

optimization resources only allocated to the OVPN customer.
7.5.8 Crankback Mechanism

The Crankback mechanism during rerouting, optimization, and creation of the wavelength/sub-
wavelength LSP is supported.
It takes a certain time to spread network routing information. When rerouting is performed, the
source node may use the outdated network status information to calculate the trail. Therefore,
the selected route may be unavailable, resulting in a rerouting failure.
The ASON software supports the Crankback rerouting mechanism. When setting up connections
according to the calculated trail, the ASON software informs the source node of the information
related to the faulty network nodes or links if the connection setup process is baffled due to
insufficient network resources or network faults. In this case, the source node recalculates a trail
that meets the constraint conditions but does not traverse the obstacle node and then establishes
the connections for the calculated trail. This effectively restores a service by means of rerouting.

7.5.9 Network Traffic Engineering

An ASON network has one network traffic engineering policies, that is, network traffic
equilibrium, so as to make network resources distributed in the best state. In addition, various
restraint conditions for route selection are developed. In this manner, network resources are
properly used.
Network Traffic Equilibrium

Due to manual planning of services on a traditional network, it is difficult for the traditional
network to achieve traffic equilibrium on the entire network. The introduction of ASON features
makes the network resources automatically adjusted. With the traffic engineering algorithm, the
resources of the entire network can be automatically and evenly allocated, which avoids
congestion and improves network security and operability.
On an ASON network, the traffic of each trail is equalized, and thus the situation where the
traffic of certain trails is large but certain trails are idle can be avoided.
The ASON computes a best route according to the CSPF algorithm. If there are many services
between two nodes, there may be several services sharing a same route. The traffic equilibrium
function is used to avoid this situation. As shown in Figure 7-28, there are many silver services
between R2 and R4. To make the network more safe and reliable, the ASON allocates them to
different routes such as A-D-E-I, A-B-C-F-I and A-B-G-H-I as evenly as possible. In this
manner, network security and stability are enhanced.
Figure 7-28 Traffic equilibrium
R1 R4
E
I
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Route Selection Policy

With traffic engineering, Huawei ASON equipment develops various constraint conditions on
the control plane for route selection based on the WDM/OTN ASON network. The constraint
conditions for route selection are as follows:

l Constraint conditions for network resources (explicit node, explicit link, explicit
wavelength, and explicit channel)
l Constraint conditions for exclusion of network resources (excluded node and excluded link)
l Strict route and number of nodes (hops) that a service traverses
l Fiber length of a service, load balancing, SRLG, and associated services
l Combination of the preceding constraint conditions
The constraint conditions for the ASON wavelength or sub-wavelength services are mainly
reflected in the trail cost. The trail cost includes the following factors:
l Link bandwidth occupancy
l Link length
l Number of nodes (hops) that a service traverses
During service route computation, you should consider the preceding factors of the trail cost
(the function of setting the weight of each factor is provided), and thus you can select the route
with the minimum trail cost. In this manner, the traffic is equalized and the network resources
are properly used.
Customized Link Cost

The ASON software supports the customized link cost. Hence, users can adjust the link cost and
select the expected link according to actual situations. After the customized link cost is
introduced, the trail with the lowest cost is selected according to the integrated cost of a link
during service creation or rerouting.
The customized link cost is used to describe the customized link attributes. By using the
customized link cost, users can assign different meanings to a link. The examples are as follows:
l Link age
The cost of a link ascends with the age of the link. When computing a trail, the ASON
software is more likely to select a new trail.
l Link price
The cost of a link ascends with the price of the link. When computing a trail, the ASON
software is more likely to select a cheap trail.
l Link interruption rate
The cost of a link ascends with the link interruption rate. When computing a trail, the ASON
software is more likely to select a trail with a low link interruption rate.
The customized link cost can be queried, and a change of the customized link cost on a node
can be flooded to all nodes on the entire network. In this manner, all nodes on the network
acknowledge the customized link cost information, which can be used as a basis of computing.
Shared Risk Link Group

On an ASON network, a shared risk link group (SRLG) needs to be set when a group of optical
fibers are in one cable.
SRLG represents the shared risk link group. Fibers in the same optical cable have the same risk.
That is, when the cable is cut, all fibers are cut. Hence, an ASON service should not be rerouted
to another link that has the same risk.
Hence, an SRLG needs to be correctly set for the links sharing the same risk on a network so as
to avoid the situation where an LSP after rerouting of ASON services traverses a link that has

the same risk as that of the faulty link. In this manner, the service restoration time during ASON
service rerouting is shortened. You can change the SRLG attribute.
When an electrical-layer service selects its trail, the electrical-layer link inherits the SRLG
information of the links involved in its electrical server layer and the SRLG information of the
links involved in its optical server layer. As a result, during rerouting, the electrical-layer service
follows the principle of separating SRLGs as possible.
7.5.10 Service Association

Service association can be used to associate the same services accessed from different points
into an ASON network.
Service association involves associating two ASON services that have different routes. During
rerouting or optimization of either service, the rerouting service avoids the route of its associated
service. Service association is mainly used for services (dual-source) accessed from two points.
As shown in Figure 7-29, D-E-I and A-B-G-H are two associated LSPs. When the fiber between
B and G is cut, rerouting of A-B-G-H LSP avoids D-E-I LSP.
Figure 7-29 Service association
R1 R4
E
1+1protection
I 1+1protection
D
F
C
A
B
H
G
R2
R3
: ASON NE
: User equipment
Table 7-13 lists the attributes of service association.
Table 7-13 Attributes of service association

Attribute Service Association
Service creation The ASON software supports the following operations:

l Creating two associated WDM ASON trails at one time.
l Associating two created WDM ASON trails.
Service Supports optimization of associated services.

optimization
Rerouting When a service is rerouted, it avoids the route of its associated service.

Attribute Service Association
Service type l Supports association of two silver services.

l Supports association of two copper services.
l Supports association of a silver service and a copper service.
NOTE
In the case of the associated optical-layer or electrical-layer services that have the same source, you can
set a rerouting condition on the U2000. The rerouting condition can be either of the following:
l Rerouting is triggered when one service is interrupted (default condition).
l Rerouting is triggered only when both services are interrupted.
NOTE
The product supports the pre-computation function of optical-layer or electrical-layer associated services
with different source nodes. On the NMS, after a user selects two pairs of service source and sink nodes
and route constraint, the system can precalculate or directly create associated services.
It is recommended that you configure two services that originate from the same node as associated services.
The following problems may occur if two associated services originate from different nodes.
l If two associated services originate from different nodes and travel along the same LSP, they will be
also switched to the same LSP after rerouting.
l If two associated services (for example, services A and B) originate from different nodes and travel
along different LSPs, the current LSP of service A may overlap with the original LSP of service B after
rerouting. If service B is switched back to the original LSP subsequently, it will travel along the current
LSP of service A.
7.5.11 Service Optimization

After the topology changes several times, the ASON may have less satisfactory routes and
therefore requires service optimization. Service optimization involves creating an LSP,
switching the optimized service to the new LSP, and deleting the original LSP to change and
optimize the service. The service route can be restricted during the service optimization.
CAUTION
The LSP must be changed in wavelength trail optimization, which will cause switching between
WSS components. As a result, services may be interrupted during service optimization.
Especially, optical-layer services will be interrupted for seconds. Be cautious to use the function.
LSP optimization has the following features.
l Only manual optimization is supported.

l The optimization does not change the protection level of the optimized service.
l During optimization, rerouting, degrade/upgrade, or deleting operations are not allowed.
l During creation, rerouting, degrading/upgrading, starting or deleting operations,
optimization is not allowed.
l The following service types support optimization: diamond, silver, copper, iron and
tunnel services.

NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 V100R005 is used as a WDM or an OTN device, resources on the original
trail will be reserved during revertive service optimization. When a fault occurs on the optimized trail, the
service can be rerouted back to the original trail if the original trail has no fault.
l During maintenance, lock the revertive function of an optimized revertive service. After performing
the maintenance, unlock the revertive function to manually reroute the service back to the original trail.
l In typical scenarios, it is recommended to set the new trail for an optimized revertive service as the
service's original trail.
7.5.12 Service Migration

The ASON software supports the migration between ASON services and traditional services.
The ASON software also supports migration of the ASON services with different SLAs. The
service migration is hitless and does not interrupt the existing services.
Service Migration between ASON Trails and Permanent Connections

Currently, Huawei ASON software supports the following migration between the traditional
WDM services and ASON services:
l Migration between static 1+1 services and diamond services
NOTE
For ODUk trail, the 1+1 service denotes the ODUk SNCP.
l Migration between static unprotected services and silver services
l Migration between static unprotected services and copper services
Service Migration between ASON Trails

The ASON software supports the following migration between the traditional WDM services
and ASON services:
l Migration between diamond WDM ASON trails and silver WDM ASON trails.
l Migration between diamond WDM ASON trails and copper WDM ASON trails.
l Migration between silver WDM ASON trails and copper WDM ASON trails.
7.5.13 Preset Restoration Trail

Customers may require that the services route to a specified trail in the case of trail failure. To
this end, the ASON software provides the function of presetting the trail for restoration. This
function helps increase the controllability of service routing. The preset restoration trail
information is stored only on the control plane and requires no physical resource.
For SDH ASON service, in the case of a service configured with a preset restoration trail, when
this preset restoration trail fails, the system recalculates a new preset restoration trail during
regular detection (at default intervals of 60 minutes). After recalculating a preset restoration trail,
the system reports a preset restoration trail update event to the NMS.
NOTE
If the resources are sufficient, the system currently supports two preset restoration trails for one ASON
service.
In the case of an optical-layer silver trail, if a wavelength the same as the original wavelength
is not available, the ASON software presets a restoration trail to set up a wavelength-tunable
trail.

ASON software supports pre-set restoration trail in the case of multiple fiber cuts:
l Pre-set restoration trail in the case of multiple fiber cuts
To ensure the route after rerouting in the case of multiple fiber cuts, the ASON software
configures multiple pre-set restoration trails for an end-to-end reroutable service (optical-
layer or electrical-layer service). Users can configure a maximum of two pre-set restoration
trails for a service or an LSP, and specify the priorities of the two trails.
NOTE
Users can configure two pre-set restoration trails for the working and protection LSPs of a diamond
service.
To ensure that services can be restored after multiple fiber cuts, when planning pre-set
trails, users need to separate the routes between multiple pre-set restoration trails as
possible.
l Change of the priority of a pre-set restoration trail in the case of multiple fiber cuts
The ASON software can configure, delete, or query multiple pre-set restoration trails. In
addition, the ASON software can change the priority of a pre-set restoration trail in the case
of multiple fiber cuts. After the pre-set restoration trail in the case of multiple fiber cuts is
configured, if the network condition changes, users can change the priority of the configured
pre-set restoration trail. The change does not immediately trigger rerouting, because the
change is valid only in the next rerouting.
l Route selection policy of the pre-set restoration trail during rerouting in the case of multiple
fiber cuts
The route selection policies of the pre-set restoration trail during rerouting in the case of
multiple fiber cuts are as follows:
– Select the pre-set restoration trail with the highest priority.
– When multiple pre-set restoration trails with the same priority are available, take priority
to select the trail with a small number.
– If services are rerouted to a pre-set restoration trail with a low priority, rerouting is not
triggered after the fault on the pre-set restoration trail with a high priority is rectified.
l Principle of service protection level conversion in the case of multiple pre-set restoration
trails
The protection level conversion principle in the case of multiple pre-set restoration trails
is as follows:
– If a service that has the rerouting capability is converted to a service of another type
that also has the rerouting capability, the pre-set restoration trail in the case of multiple
fiber cuts is retained.
– If a service that has the rerouting capability is converted to a service of another type
that does not have the rerouting capability, the pre-set restoration trail in the case of
multiple fiber cuts is cleared.
– When a diamond service is converted to a silver service, the ASON software determines
whether to retain the pre-set restoration trail of the working LSP or protection LSP
according to the parameters of the working and protection trails set by users.
– When a silver service is converted to a diamond service, the ASON software determines
whether the pre-set restoration trail is used as the pre-set restoration trail of the working
LSP or protection LSP according to the parameters of the working and protection trails
set by users.

7.5.14 Trail Pre-Computation and Adjustment

When optimizing the routes of new ASON wavelength/sub-wavelength services or original
wavelength/sub-wavelength services, users can issue the route pre-computation command
through the U2000. In this manner, users can acknowledge the service routes to be created, routes
after optimization, specific routes involving service restoration trails in advance. In addition,
users can properly adjust the pre-computed trail according to service trail requirements.
7.5.15 Service Reversion Mechanism

The ASON software supports service reversion. After a fault is rectified, services are reverted
to the previous trail.
ASON services can be classified into revertive services and non-revertive services.
l For revertive services, the previous trail is retained after rerouting. After the fault is
rectified, the services are reverted to the previous trail.
l For non-revertive services, the previous trail is not retained after rerouting. After the fault
is rectified, the services are not reverted to the previous trail.
The reversion mechanisms of revertive services include manual reversion, scheduled reversion,
and automatic reversion.
l Scheduled reversion
Services are rerouted because of a fault on the previous trail. After the fault is rectified and
the manually set reversion time elapses, the services are reverted to the previous trail.
l Automatic reversion
Services are rerouted because of a fault on the previous trail. The system periodically checks
the link status. After the fault on the previous trail is rectified and the service alarm ends,
the services are automatically reverted to the previous trail when the wait to revert time is
due.
l Manual reversion
After services are rerouted or optimized to another trail, the information about the previous
trail is retained. When the press-to-revert command is issued, the services are reverted to
the previous trail. If the previous trail is normal and no resource is occupied, the services
are successfully reverted to the previous trail. Otherwise, the reversion fails.
Users can set whether services can be reverted during service creation or change the revertive
attribute of the services without service interruption.
NOTE
The previous trail refers to the trail before rerouting, and the previous route may not be the route initially
set up for ASON services.
NOTE
After several topology changes on an ASON network, the actual service routes may be different from the
original routes. The ASON software provides the function of reverting the services on the entire network
to the original trails. Generally, the route during ASON service creation is the original route of the ASON
service. After services are rerouted or optimized to another trail, the information about the original trail is
retained. If the original route recovers, the services can be adjusted to the original route manually.
NOTE
The OptiX OSN 8800 V100R002 and later supports the automatic reversion function of optical-layer ASON
services.

Adhere to the following principles for changing the service reversion mode:
l For a non-revertive service,

– It can be modified as revertive when the current trail is consistent with the original trail.
– It cannot be modified as revertive when the current trail is inconsistent with the original
trail.
l For a revertive service,
– It can be modified as non-revertive when the current trail is consistent with the original
trail.
– It cannot be modified as non-revertive when the current trail is inconsistent with the
original trail.
Adhere to the following principles for changing the original trail:
l For a non-revertive service,

– The current trail can be set as the original trail regardless whether the current trail is
consistent with the oringinal trail or not.
l For a revertive service,
– The current trail can be set as the original trail if the current trail is consistent with the
original trail.
– The current trail can be set as the original trail if the current trail is inconsistent with
the original trail, but the previous original trail needs to be deleted and the revertive
mode of the current service needs to be set as revertive.
TIP
The features of automatic reversion of optical-layer ASON services are as follows:

l If no port alarm is detected on the link between the FIU boards at two stations, optical-layer services
are automatically reverted to the trail before rerouting. If a wavelength channel alarm is detected, the
services are reverted to the trail before reversion in the case that the trail before reversion has no alarm.
That is, when the optical-layer services are reverted, system does not delete the rerouted trail. If no
service alarm is detected two minutes after the services are reverted to the trail before rerouting, the
system deletes the rerouted trail. Two minutes later, if a service alarm persists, the services are reverted
to the rerouted trail and a reversion failure event is reported. No automatic reversion operation is
performed later, and the service enters the "stopping automatic reversion" state until users manually
revert the services (or in timed manner). In this case, the "stopping automatic reversion" state changes.
l Within the two minutes when the services are automatically reverted but the rerouted trail is not deleted,
if a port on the FIU of the rerouted trail reports an alarm, the two-minute wait is stopped. In this case,
the rerouted trail is directly deleted and the reversion operation is complete.
l If a port on the FIU of the trail before rerouting reports an alarm, the two-minute wait is stopped and
the services are directly reverted to the rerouted trail.
NOTE
When the OptiX OSN 8800 V100R005 is used as a WDM or an OTN device, resources on the original
trail will be reserved during revertive service optimization. When a fault occurs on the optimized trail, the
service can be rerouted back to the original trail if the original trail has no fault.
l During maintenance, lock the revertive function of an optimized revertive service. After performing
the maintenance, unlock the revertive function to manually reroute the service back to the original trail.
l In typical scenarios, it is recommended to set the new trail for an optimized revertive service as the
service's original trail.
NOTE
For the ODU1 ASON service, revertive mode is recommended.

7.5.16 Resource Sharing of Trails

In the case of optical-layer or electrical-layer permanent 1+1 diamond services, rerouting 1+1
diamond services, and associated services with the same source (wavelengths of the associated
silver services are the same), the ASON software supports the function of resource sharing of
the working and protection trails or resource sharing of the associated service trails.
l Resource sharing of the working and protection trails
Resource sharing of the working and protection trails can provide restoration resources as
many as possible. Figure 7-30 shows the main application scenario of tangent rings. The
blue and red continuous lines indicate the working and protection trails. The working and
protection trails are invalid when fibers at points 1 and 2 are cut. In this case, if resources
of the working and protection trails cannot be shared, services cannot get resources for
restoration. If resources can be shared, you can combine part of the working trail and part
of the protection trail together to form a restoration trail, which is the green dashed line in
the figure. Similarly, if the fiber at point 3 is cut, the trail (purple dashed line) can be used
for service restoration.
Figure 7-30 Application of resource sharing of the working and protection trails
NOTE
When both trails for 1+1 diamond ASON services are interrupted, the system by default allows
resources sharing on the working and protection trails during service rerouting. Resource sharing of
the working and protection trails provides a possible solution to protect services in the case of multiple
fiber cuts on a network other than a mesh network.

NOTE
l When both the working and protection trails for a permanent 1+1 diamond ASON service are
interrupted, the system allows resources sharing on the working and protection resources only
when no diverse route is available for service restoration.
l When the "using original trail resources as possible" rerouting policy is used for a rerouting 1+1
diamond service, the system shares the resources on the working and protection trails with
precedence to restore the service.
l In the case of creating a new ASON service or optimizing an ASON service, resource sharing of
the working and protection trails is not allowed. Optimization, pre-computation, and
configuration of a preset restoration trail can still be performed on a service with resource sharing
of the working and protection trails enabled.
l A static service with resource sharing of the working and protection trails enabled cannot be
upgraded to a 1+1 diamond service, and an ASON service where resource sharing of the working
and protection trails is performed cannot be downgraded but can be deleted.
l If resource sharing of the working and protection trails is performed on the original trail of a
revertive service, automatic reversion is not initiated, but the service can be reverted in a manual
or timed manner.
l During rerouting of a diamond service, if the routing policy of the service is section restoration,
you need to take priority to follow this policy.
l The trail of a service where resource sharing of the working and protection trails is performed
cannot be set as the original trail.
l During sharing, directions of services must be the same. A forward trail and a reverse trail cannot
share resources of each other. Figure 7-31 shows application of resource sharing of a forward
and reverse tail.
l An ASON service with the same working and protection trail cannot be enabled with resource
sharing of the working and protection trails.
l If the working and protection trails already share resources, the working and protection trails are
separated to the most when one or all trails are optimized. If resources are insufficient, the
optimized trails can still share resources. (Only the currently shared resources can be shared.)
l When the system choose to share the resources on the working and protection trails for an optical-
layer ASON service, the service will be transmitted over the original wavelength. Resource
sharing and wavelength adjustment are not allowed at the same time.
Figure 7-31 Resource sharing of a forward and reverse tail
A service is added at point A and dropped at point D. The original trail is A->B->C->D
(blue lines). When the fibers between A and B and between C and D are cut, the service

can be rerouted to trail A->C->B->D (red lines). Hence, between B and C, the forward trail
and reverse trail share resources.
l Resource sharing of associated trails
The ASON software provides the trail sharing function to associated ASON services with
the same source. Figure 7-30 shows the main application scenarios of a tangent ring
network. The blue lines and red lines indicate two associated trails with the same source.
When fibers at 1 and 2 are cut, the two trails fail. If resources of the associated trails cannot
be shared, the services cannot be restored. If the resources can be shared, you can combine
the associated trails to make a restoration trail, which is the trail in green as shown in the
figure. Similarly, if the fiber at 3 is cut, you can still use the trail in purple to restore the
services.
NOTE
When both trails that have the same source for two associated optical-layer wavelength services are
interrupted, the system by default allows resources sharing on the associated trails for the associated
services to reroute if there are no other resources available. On the U2000, users can specify whether
to share resources on the associated trails as required.
NOTE
l During rerouting of associated services that come from the same source, the system will take
precedence to share the resources on the two trails for the services if the two trails are configured
with a policy to use resources on the original trail.
l In the case of creating a new service or optimizing a service, resource sharing of associated trails
is not allowed.
l After associated trails share resources, do not cancel the association.
l If associated services are of different types, resource sharing of associated trails is not supported.
For example, the associated OTN services must have the same granularity and rate. The protection
level, however, is not restricted. For example, sharing is allowed when a silver service and a
copper service are associated.
l If resource sharing of associated trails is performed on the original trail of a revertive service,
automatic reversion is not initiated, but the service can be reverted in a manual or timed manner.
l During rerouting of associated services with the same source, if the routing policy of the services
is restoration by section, you need to take priority to follow this policy.
l The trail of a service where resource sharing of associated trails is performed cannot be set as
the original trail. Before canceling association of associated services, you can delete the services
and clear the association information.
l If the trails of associated services already share resources, the trails of the associated services are
separated to the most when one or all trails are optimized. If resources are insufficient, the
optimized trails can still share resources. (Only the currently shared resources can be shared.)
l During sharing, directions of services must be the same. A forward trail and a reverse trail cannot
share resources of each other. Figure 7-31 shows application of resource sharing of a forward
and reverse tail.
l An ASON service with the same associated trail cannot be enabled with resource sharing of
associated trails.
7.5.17 ASON Features Based on the Split of Optical and Electrical

NEs
For ASON network, users need to split the NE into different NEs. The splitting rule is that all
optical boards and regeneration boards are allocated to one or more optical NEs and all electrical
boards are allocated to one or more electrical NEs. Based on the split of optical and electrical
NEs, the ASON software supports resource locating and creation of ASON services.

Figure 7-32 shows the schematic diagram of separate optical and electrical NEs (Colored). In
the figure, NE1 is an optical NE taking the M40 and D40 boards as the edge points. NE2 is the
electrical NE taking the OTU board as the edge points.
Figure 7-33 shows the schematic diagram of separate optical and electrical NEs (Colorless). In
the figure, NE1 is an optical NE taking the WSM9 and WSD9 boards as the edge points. NE2
is the electrical NE taking the OTU board as the edge points.
Figure 7-32 Schematic diagram of the split of optical and electrical NEs (Colored)
W R NE1
S D
M U
F 9 9 F
I I
U R W U
D S
U M
9 9
RDU9 WSM9
OCh
D40 M40 OCh
NE2
OCh OTU OTU OCh

Figure 7-33 Schematic diagram of the split of optical and electrical NEs (Colorless)
W R NE1
S D
M U
F 9 9 F
I I
U R W U
D S
U M
9 9
RDU9 WSM9
OA
OA
DM1~DM 9 AM1~AM 9
WSD 9 WSM9
Drop 73~80 Drop 1~9 Add 1~9 Add 73~80
WSD9 WSD9 WSM9 WSM9
OCh OCh
NE2
OCh OTU OTU OCh
NOTE
When there is no optical path between two or more NEs, the Ethernet ports of the NEs can be used to
achieve the extended ECC communication. By default, the NE takes the auto-extended ECC
communication. When more than eight Huawei devices need to use the extended ECC communication, the
manually extended ECC communication must be used instead. See the "Setting Manually Extended ECC
Communication" of the Commissioning Guide of the OptiX OSN 8800 for details.
In the case that optical and electrical NEs are not split, ASON NEs can only take the OTU or
FIU board as the edge points and the matching TE link is generated when a board is added. In
the case that optical and electrical NEs are split, the multiplexer and demultiplexer boards or
another optical-layer board can be considered as the edge points of the optical NE. In this case,
when an intra-NE fiber connection is created between the optical port on the multiplexer and
demultiplexer boards and the optical port on the OTU board of the electrical NE, an intra-NE
link that carries OCh signals can be generated.

The ASON software processes stations where optical and electrical NEs are split and not split
in different modes. In the case of a station where optical and electrical NEs are split, the
connections between the optical NE and the electrical NE are described as intra-NE links. In
this case, a complete TE link is formed by the OMS TE links between upstream and downstream
stations and the intra-NE links at one station.
NOTE
The multiplexer and demultiplexer board and OTU board at the NE edges configure each other as the link
far end to form an abstract OMS TE link. The link is then used for creating optical-layer services.
After optical and electrical NEs are split at a station, bidirectional fiber connections and link far ends of
the optical and electrical NEs must be configured correctly according to the planning.
After optical and electrical NEs are split at a station, perform configurations on the U2000 to ensure proper
communication between optical NEs and electrical NEs and successful creation of TE links. For details on
how to perform the configurations, see Configuring a Station with Separate Optical and Electrical NEs.
The U2000 can create and manage optical-layer ASON services based on the split of optical and
electrical NEs, including creation, reroute, optimization, deletion, and pre-calculation of various
SLA services, and the conversion between static ASON and dynamic services. The operation
methods are the same as those of the services not based on the split of optical and electrical NEs.
NOTE
The electrical regeneration boards and the optical-layer boards must be installed on the same optical NE.
The total number of subracks of an optical NE cannot exceed 24 and the total number of wavelengths that
traverse electrical regeneration boards cannot exceed 32.
For separate optical and electrical NEs, active and standby system control boards must be used in the master
subracks of the optical and electrical NEs.
NOTE
Two regeneration boards need to be used to bidirectionally regenerate services if each of them can
regenerate services unidirectionally. The two regeneration boards must be installed in paired slots.
The LSXR and TN54NS3 board require one slot. The principles for configuring the LSXR and TN54NS3
boards are as follows:
l OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The LSXR and TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same
wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU12 and IU13,
IU14 and IU15, IU16 and IU17, IU18 and IU19, IU20 and IU21, IU22 and IU23, IU24 and IU25, IU26
and IU27, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, or IU35 and IU36.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The LSXR and TN54NS3 boards for transmitting and receiving the same
wavelength must be installed in IU1 and IU2, IU3 and IU4, IU5 and IU6, IU7 and IU8, IU11 and IU12,
and IU26, IU27 and IU28, IU29 and IU30, IU31 and IU32, IU33 and IU34, IU35 and IU36, IU37 and
IU38, IU39 and IU40, IU41 and IU42, IU45 and IU46, IU47 and IU48, IU49 and IU50, IU51 and IU52,
and IU66, IU67 and IU68.
The TN12LSXLR board requires two slots. The principles for configuring the TN12LSXLR board are as
follows:
l OptiX OSN 8800 T32: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength
must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU13 and IU15, IU17 and IU19, IU21 and IU23, IU25
and IU27, IU30 and IU32, or IU34 and IU36.
l OptiX OSN 8800 T64: The TN12LSXLR boards for transmitting and receiving the same wavelength
must be installed in IU2 and IU4, IU6 and IU8, IU12 and IU14, IU16 and IU18, IU20 and IU22, IU24
and IU26, IU28 and IU30, IU32 and IU34, IU36 and IU38, IU40 and IU42, IU46 and IU48, IU50 and
IU52, IU54 and IU56, IU58 and IU60, IU62 and IU64, IU66 and IU68.

7.5.18 ASON Services Traversing Third-Party Equipment

The ASON software enables ASON services to traverse third-party equipment between Huawei
ASON nodes, and therefore enables end-to-end service management and monitoring.
Figure 7-34 shows interconnection between Huawei NG WDM equipment and third-party
equipment on the client side.
Figure 7-34 Client-side interconnection between Huawei NG WDM equipment and third-party
equipment
NG WDM ASON
Third-party NG WDM ASON
network
network network
ASON NE
Third-party NE
On a network, third-party equipment terminates the OTUk layer and ASON nodes cannot detect
OTUk-layer alarms but only ODUk-layer alarms. Then link status cannot be accurately detected.
When the service boards on third-party equipment does not support rate adaptation, the ASON
service rate cannot be adjusted in an end-to-end mode. To resolve these issues, Huawei ASON
software enables ASON services to traverse third-party equipment.
l The ASON nodes with third-party equipment in between detect status of the links between
themselves according to the TCM-layer alarms, and trigger service rerouting if required.
l The OTUk rate for the ports connected to third-party equipment cannot be adjusted. This
prevents service interruption in case of an end-to-end rate adjustment failure.
ASON services can traverse third-party equipment on the following conditions:
l The third-party equipment supports access of OTUk signals.
l The third-party equipment transparently transmits the complete ODUk-layer signals from
the WDM-side ports on the OTU boards of Huawei NG WDM equipment.
l The third-party equipment processes TCM-layer signals in line with the standard.
l No ODUk cross-connections are configured on the service paths on the third-party
equipment (only regeneration is allowed).
l The third-party equipment does not use the TCM layer that has already been used by Huawei
ASON nodes.
l The TCM layer used by third-party equipment does not repeat the TCM layers in other
configurations.

7.6 Optical-Layer and Electrical-Layer ASON Services

The ASON software provides the wavelength-level ASON services at the optical layer and sub-
wavelength level ASON services at the electrical layer. Hence, customers can implement flexible
service grooming at different layers.
7.6.1 Protection and Restoration Mechanisms for Services

Optical-layer and electrical-layer services have different protection and restoration mechanisms.
Protection and Restoration Mechanism for Optical-Layer ASON Services

Optical-layer ASON services combine protection mechanisms for the traditional WDM network
and the rerouting mechanism for the ASON network, and thus provide the capability of resisting
multiple faults. In the case of the rerouting mechanism for optical-layer ASON services, after
the services are interrupted, rerouting is initiated at the source node. Then, a new trail is set up
through ROADM cross-connections. Figure 7-35 shows the model of the traditional WDM
protection and restoration corresponding to optical-layer silver ASON services of source node
association. For the implementation principles of the client-side protection, see Client 1+1
Protection in the Feature Description.
Figure 7-35 Model of the protection for optical-layer ASON services
Optical-Layer Silver Service of source

node association (Client 1+1 Protection)
OTU FIU
OLP
ROADM
OTU FIU
Protection and Restoration Mechanism for Electrical-Layer ASON Services

Electrical-layer ASON services combine protection mechanisms for the traditional WDM
network and the rerouting mechanism for the ASON network, and thus provide the capability
of resisting multiple faults. In the case of the rerouting mechanism for electrical-layer ASON
services, after the services are interrupted, new services are created through the cross-
connections on the centralized cross-connect boards or tributary boards.Figure 7-36 shows the
model of the traditional WDM protection and restoration corresponding to typical type of
electrical-layer ASON services. For the implementation principles of the ODUk SNCP
protection, see ODUk SNCP in the Feature Description.

Figure 7-36 Model of the protection for electrical-layer ASON services
Electrical-Layer Diamond (ODUk SNCP Protection)
Line Unit
Tributary Unit ROADM
Line Unit
7.6.2 Quick Finding of Optical-Layer and Electrical-Layer Functions

The functions of optical-layer and electrical-layer services implemented by the ASON software
are different.
The WDM ASON features support the optical-layer ASON function and the electrical-layer
ASON function, as described in Table 7-14.
Table 7-14 Optical-layer ASON and electrical-layer ASON

Item Optical-Layer ASON Electrical-Layer ASON
Control channel D4-D12 bytes of the optical RES or SM_TTI and

supervisory channel (OSC) PM_TTI bytes of the OTN
in outband manner. overhead.
The system uses RES bytes
by default.
Supported service type Services of OCh wavelength Services of ODUk

level . wavelength level (k=0, 1, 2,
3).
Supported SLA Silver and copper. Diamond, silver, and copper.
Hardware configuration FIU board, SC1/2 board, and Cross-connect boards and
requirements WSS board. relevant tributary boards.
Rerouting trigger conditions Optical-layer SF alarm. For Electrical-layer SF and SD

detailed information refer to alarms. For detailed
Rerouting of an LSP. information refer to
Rerouting of an LSP.
Rerouting mechanism After a service is interrupted, After a service is interrupted,

rerouting is initiated on the a new service is created
source node, and a new trail through cross-connections
is created through ROADM on the centralized cross-
cross-connections. connect board or tributary
board.

Item Optical-Layer ASON Electrical-Layer ASON
Special technology Wavelength tunable NA

rerouting, which solves the
wavelength blocking
problem in rerouting.
Table 7-15 lists the functions of optical-layer ASON services of different SLAs.
Table 7-15 Functions of optical-layer ASON services of different SLAs

Item Silver Service Copper Service
Protection and restoration Restoration No protection

policy No restoration
Technologies for Rerouting -

implementation
Technical implementation Real-time computation -

without presetting protection
channels
Bandwidth utilization High Excessively high
Supported Route pre- Supported Supported

functions computation
Route Supported Supported

optimization
and service
reversion
Conversion Supported Supported

between
traditional and
ASON services
Switching - -
between
services of
different SLAs
Pre-set Supported -
restoration trail
Service Supported Supported

association
Wavelength Supported -
tunable
rerouting

Item Silver Service Copper Service
Optical Supported Supported

parameters
Table 7-16 lists the functions of electrical-layer ASON services of different SLAs.
Table 7-16 Functions of electrical-layer ASON services of different SLAs
Item Diamond Service Silver Service Copper Service
Protection and Protection and Restoration No protection

restoration policy restoration No restoration
Technologies for ODUk SNCP and Rerouting -

implementation rerouting
Technical Protection always Real-time -

implementation provided when the computation without
network bandwidth presetting protection
is available channels
Bandwidth utilization Low High Excessively high
Support Routing Supported Supported Supported

ed pre-
function computatio
s n
Route Supported Supported -

optimizatio
n and
service
reversion
Conversio Supported Supported Supported

n between
traditional
and ASON
services
Switching Supported Supported Supported

between
services of
different
SLAs
Pre-set Supported Supported -

restoration
trail
Service - Supported Supported

association

Item Diamond Service Silver Service Copper Service
Wavelengt - - -
h tunable
rerouting
Optical - - -
parameters
7.6.3 Prerequisites for Enabling ASON Features

Certain hardware and software prerequisites must be available when the optical-layer and
electrical-layer ASON features are enabled.
The prerequisites for enabling the optical-layer ASON features are as follows:
l The OSC board must be configured.
l The FIU board must be configured.
l The WSS board must be configured.
l It is required to configure two SCC boards in the master subrack.
The prerequisites for enabling the electrical-layer ASON features are as follows:
l The centralized cross-connect board must be configured.
l It is required to configure two SCC boards in the master subrack.
The software prerequisites for enabling ASON features are as follows:
l The NE software version must support the ASON features. Contact Huawei engineers to
determine whether the current NE software version supports the ASON features.
l The version of the mapping NMS that is delivered must support the ASON features.
l The ASON features are controlled by the license on the NMS. The ASON features can be
enabled for only users who apply for and purchase this license or obtain a special permission
from Huawei.
NOTE
There are two types of license: the license for basic ASON features and the license for enabling services.
The first type of license is used to control the ASON features of a single station. The second type of license
is specific for the services on the entire network and is used to control the number of services of different
rates on an ASON network.
NOTE
l 2.5G and 5G boards do not support optical-layer ASON services.

l Individual tributary boards do not support optical-layer ASON services on their client sides.
7.6.4 Conditions for Configuring ASON Services

Certain configuration conditions must be met to ensure successful creation of the optical-layer
and electrical-layer ASON services.
NOTE
The optical power of each channel of an ASON NE must be controlled by the software, and thus an EVOA
must be configured inside the ASON NE.

Configuring Electrical-Layer ASON Services

In the case of electrical-layer ASON services, a centralized cross-connect board must be used
to groom sub-wavelength services. In the case of a site where the main and slave subracks are
configured, electrical-layer cross-connections cannot be groomed between subracks (between
the master and slave subracks and between slave subracks). Hence, the working trail and
protection trail (or restoration trail) of the electrical-layer services must be led out from the site
through the same subrack. See Figure 7-37.
Figure 7-37 Configuring electrical-layer ASON services

Tributary Working Cross-Connect Protection Retrieve
board board board board board
T N N N
Q S S S
X 2 2 2
Configuring Optical-Layer ASON Services

The process of configuring the optical-layer ASON services is more complex than the process
of configuring the electrical-layer ASON services.
The optical-layer ASON services are dynamic, and their restoration routes are not fixed.
Therefore, the reconfigurable optical add/drop multiplexer (ROADM) board should be
configured.
l One pair of WSS boards should be configured for each dimension.

l In the case of silver services, one pair of WSS boards should be configured at each
wavelength add/drop node.
l In the case of permanent 1+1 diamond service and rerouting 1+1 diamond service, two
pairs of WSS boards should be configured at each wavelength add/drop node (one pair is
for the working channel, and the other pair is for the protection channel).
The ASON protocol is embedded in the OSC overheads. Hence, the OSC board must be
configured.
Figure 7-38, which is the diagram for configuring the optical-layer ASON services, shows the
number of WSS boards required by the sliver services. If the services are diamond services with
the rerouting function, a pair of WSS boards (a pair of working boards and a pair of protection
boards) must be configured at points where the services are added and dropped.

Figure 7-38 Configuring optical-layer ASON services

Does not
support
OTU reroute
MR4
WSD9 RMU9
W E
FIU FIU
RMU9 WSD9
OSC WSD9 RMU9 OSC
MR4 Protection
trail Support
Working reroute
trail
OTU

Product Description 8 Operation, Administration, and Maintenance
8 Operation, Administration, and

Maintenance
About This Chapter
8.1 Automatic Deployment Commissioning

The system supports automatic deployment commissioning. This automatic deployment
commissioning function implements automatic commissioning of a new network, optical power
commissioning of an expanded network or in the case of rerouting, real-time optimization of
network performance, and fiber connection test. In the deployment phase, the automatic
deployment commissioning function can be used to adjust the optical power for the main optical
paths and implement performance adjustment for the entire network. This can solve the
performance degradation problem caused by wavelength grooming, aged optical paths, or
artificial factors in the maintenance phase.
8.2 End-to-End Service Configuration
The system provides end-to-end OTN service configurations management function, which helps
simplify the configuration process. This function helps shorten the network deployment time
and implement automatic management of a network.
8.3 Supervision and Administration Module
The TN16XCH board monitors and manages the system NE.
8.4 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces
The system provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.
8.5 Orderwire Function
The orderwire provides voice communication for the operation engineers or maintenance
engineers at different stations.
8.6 Security Management
The NMS uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 NE.
8.7 Master-Slave Subrack Management
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports master-slave subrack management. When multiple subracks are
required on one NE, the master-slave subrack mode should be used for unified management of
these subracks. In this manner, the IP resources can be saved. In addition, when optical-layer
ASON and optical-layer services are configured on the NE, the optical subracks on the NE should

be taken out to form a new NE for management. This facilitates the maintenance and reduces
the management cost.
8.8 Administration and Maintenance
The design of the cabinet and boards and the configuration of the system incorporate the
requirements with easy and effective operation, administration, and maintenance of the
equipment.

8.1 Automatic Deployment Commissioning

The system supports automatic deployment commissioning. This automatic deployment
commissioning function implements automatic commissioning of a new network, optical power
commissioning of an expanded network or in the case of rerouting, real-time optimization of
network performance, and fiber connection test. In the deployment phase, the automatic
deployment commissioning function can be used to adjust the optical power for the main optical
paths and implement performance adjustment for the entire network. This can solve the
performance degradation problem caused by wavelength grooming, aged optical paths, or
artificial factors in the maintenance phase.
This automatic deployment commissioning implements the function as follows:
l Supports fiber connection tests.
l Supports automatic commissioning of a new network, including commissioning of main
optical paths and adjusting of channel flatness.
l Supports optical power commissioning in a scenario in which a site is expanded or
wavelengths are added or removed.
l Supports commissioning of an ASON network, including pre-commissioning of planned
trails and optimization of the optical power after rerouting occurs.
l Supports optimization of O&M performance of a network, including the control of optical
spectral flatness when the wavelength optical power on a channel fluctuates and
optimization commissioning based on service performance.
l Provides detailed information in a report which provides detailed information about boards,
optical power, and BER on the basis of a network or link. This facilitates the maintenance
personnel to understand the running conditions of the network running.
8.2 End-to-End Service Configuration

The system provides end-to-end OTN service configurations management function, which helps
simplify the configuration process. This function helps shorten the network deployment time
and implement automatic management of a network.
When configuring an end-to-end OTN service, you can create a service trail that traverses
different layers and directly create a client service trail. You do not need to know how the service
grooming between the OTN layers is implemented or create an ODU0/ODU1/ODU2/ODU3
server trail at each layer. After you create a client service, the client service trails at different
OTN layers are generated automatically. This simplifies the service configuration process.
The end-to-end OTN service configuration includes creating, querying, deleting, and modifying
an end-to-end service and optimizing an end-to-end service. The latter is also known as service
defragmentation.
8.3 Supervision and Administration Module

The TN16XCH board monitors and manages the system NE.
The TN16XCH board collects the state information, alarm events, and performance parameters
from the functional modules of each board.

Then, the SCC converts, processes, and stores the information and parameters. At the same time,
it sends the control and administration information to the other functional modules.
The TN16XCH provides functional interfaces to facilitate the communication between the
functional modules of each board and the NM, as shown in Table 8-1.
Table 8-1 Description of the functional interfaces of the TN16XCH
Functional Description
Interface
F&fa Connect the RS-232 interface to a PC or a workstation for

commissioning.
Etherneta TMN interface, local NE management interface, and internal

communication interface, used for commissioning
OAMa The operation, administration, and maintenance interface.

The X.25 interface is provided to communicate with the terminal
through the public packet switched network.
DCC communication Provides the data communication channel (DCC) of the supervisory
link.
Communication Communicates with other boards, collects performance data, and

module delivers the configuration.
Qx Network management communication interface.
a: The interface functions of the TN16XCH have corresponding external physical interfaces
in the subrack interface area on the EFI. For details, see the Hardware Description.
The TN16XCH monitors the running status of the boards on the NE.
The main monitoring parameters include:
l Input optical power

l Output optical power
l Laser temperature
l B1 performance parameter
l FEC performance parameter
8.4 Communication and Maintenance Interfaces

The system provides abundant interfaces for data communication and equipment maintenance.
The EFI and ATE boards implement functions, such as clock signal input and output, alarm
input, alarm output, and alarm cascading, to monitor the remote external systems. Table 8-2
shows the interface functions of the EFI, and ATE.
The AUX board provides the inter-board and inter-subrack communication. The AUX board
does not provide external interfaces but only four indicators.

Table 8-2 Interface function of EFI, and ATE

Front Panel Appearance Panel Interfac Usage
Interface e Type
ALMO1 RJ-45 The definitions for the

ALMO2 pins of the ALM01 and
ATE
ALM02 interfaces are the
ALMO3 same. The two interfaces
ALMI2
ALMI1
ALMO4 are used for output and
cascading, respectively.
CLK2
CLK1
ALMO1 The definitions for the
ALMO3
pins of the ALM03 and
TOD2
TOD1
ALM04 interfaces are the

same. The two interfaces
ALMO4
ALMO2
are used for output and

cascading, respectively.
Alarm outputs are sent to
the DC power distribution
cabinet through the output
interface and the
cascading interface. You
can configure it to be the
other outputs to realize
integrated display of
alarms. The OptiX OSN
8800 provides eight alarm
outputs. Defaults of the
first three are critical
alarm, major alarm, and
minor alarm. The other
five are reserved. Alarm
outputs can be cascaded.
ALMI1 RJ-45 External alarm signal

ALMI2 input function is designed
for requirements when the
alarm signals of the
external systems (such as
the environment
monitory) need remote
monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 8800
provides eight alarm
inputs. The name of the
eight alarms can be
configured to cooperate
with the external system to
realize remote monitoring
of external alarms.
CLK1 RJ-45 Clock signal input and

CLK2 output interface


Interface e Type
TOD1 RJ-45 Time signal input and

TOD2 output interface
ETH1 RJ-45 l Connects a network

EFI ETH2 cable from the ETH1/
ETH2/ETH3 interface
ETH3 on one subrack to
LAMP1
ETH1
SERIAL
corresponding
interfaces on the other
LAMP2
ETH2
subracks to achieve the

communication
NM_ETH1
between the master
NM_ETH2
ETH3
subrack and slave

subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack
protection is
configured, the ETH3
interface cannot be used
for the communication
between the master and
slave subracks.
l Connects a network
cable to a CRPC or
ROP board to achieve
communication with
the CRPC or ROP
board.
LAMP1 RJ-45 Controls the PWR

LAMP2 indicators and alarm
indicators of the cabinet
that holds the subrack.


Interface e Type
NM_ETH1 RJ-45 l Connects the network

NM_ETH2 interface on the
equipment through a
network cable to that
on an NM server so
that the NM can
manage the
equipment.
l Connects the
NM_ETH1/
NM_ETH2 network
interface on one NE
through a network
cable to that on another
NE to achieve
communication
between NEs.
SERIAL DB9 The interface provides

serial NM and supports X.
25 protocol.
8.5 Orderwire Function

The orderwire provides voice communication for the operation engineers or maintenance
engineers at different stations.
The orderwire provides the following functions:
l Addressing call: Addressing call, that is, point-to-point call, is the basic function of the
orderwire. In this case, the calling party dials the number of the called party.
l Subnet conference call: The subnet conference call realizes a group call among the stations
on a subnet. A subnet refers to the physical subnetwork. It is a collection of the NEs that
have the same subnet ID and are connected by optical fibers.
NOTE
If the subnet contains only the OptiX OSN 6800, OptiX OSN 3800, and OptiX OSN 8800 equipment, the
subnet conference call is supported. In any other scenarios, the subnet conference call is not supported.
Only a master subrack supports the orderwire function.
8.6 Security Management

The NMS uses many schemes to manage the security of the OptiX OSN 8800/6800/3800 NE.

8.7 Master-Slave Subrack Management

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports master-slave subrack management. When multiple subracks are
required on one NE, the master-slave subrack mode should be used for unified management of
these subracks. In this manner, the IP resources can be saved. In addition, when optical-layer
ASON and optical-layer services are configured on the NE, the optical subracks on the NE should
be taken out to form a new NE for management. This facilitates the maintenance and reduces
the management cost.
In OptiX OSN 8800 T16, TN16XCH 1+1 protection is recommended for the master subrack.
In a slave optical subrack, the AUX board provides the functions of a system control and
communication board. Therefore, no XCH board is required for a slave optical subrack, and
service boards can be inserted into the IU9 and IU10 slots which are intended for housing a
cross-connect boards.
In OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the XCH boards in the master and slave subracks must use the same
software version.
If the number of subracks on an NE is beyond the NE's management capacity, the NE can be
divided into two NEs for management.
To ensure future smooth expansion, users are recommended to configure separate optical NEs
and electrical NEs.
8.7.1 Master-Slave Subrack Management

In the master-slave subrack mode, the multiple subracks are displayed as one NE on the U2000.
On the same NE, the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN 8800 can be configured as the master
and slave subracks.
For the OptiX OSN 8800 T16, when the master subrack uses the TN16XCH as the system control
and communication board, comply with the following rules to configure the master and slave
subracks.
l Each NE supports a maximum of 24 optical subracks. That is, one master optical subrack
manages 23 slave optical subracks.
l Each NE supports a maximum of 8 electrical subracks. That is, one master electrical subrack
manages 7 slave electrical subracks.
l When an NE consists of optical and electrical subracks, the master subrack of the NE
supports a maximum of 19 slave subracks and the number of electrical slave subracks
cannot exceed 4.
l When an NE uses only optical subracks with the ASON function, the NE supports a
maximum of 24 optical subracks. That is, one optical master subrack manages 23 slave
optical subracks.
l When an NE uses only electrical subracks with the ASON function, the NE supports a
maximum of 4 electrical subracks. That is, one electrical master subrack manages 3 slave
electrical subracks.
l When an NE consists of optical subracks with the ASON function and electrical subracks
without the ASON function, the master subrack of the NE supports a maximum of 19 slave
subracks and the number of electrical slave subracks cannot exceed 4.

l When an NE consists of optical subracks without the ASON function and electrical
subracks with the ASON function, the master subrack of the NE supports a maximum of
7 slave subracks and the number of electrical slave subracks cannot exceed 4.
l In OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the master subrack is recommended to configure 1+1 protection
for the TN16XCH boards.
l Because the AUX board on a slave subrack provides the system control and communication
function, you do not need to configure the XCH board for an optical slave subrack, and
you can configure service boards on IU9 and IU10.
l In OptiX OSN 8800 T16, the software version of the XCH board in the master subrack
must be the same as that of the XCH board in each slave subrack.
l If the number of subracks on an NE is beyond the management capability of this NE, the
NE can be divided into two NEs to enable subrack management.
l To ensure future smooth expansion, users are recommended to configure separate optical
NEs and electrical NEs.
NOTE
l The word "subrack" in this context means an equivalent subrack. The equivalent subrack takes the
OptiX OSN 6800 subrack as the unit. One OptiX OSN 6800 subrack is an equivalent subrack. One
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 subrack is taken as one equivalent subrack.
l Electrical subrack is the subrack that houses the cross-connect board, OTU board, or tributary board.
l Optical subrack is the subrack that houses the optical-layer board only.
NOTE
l The slave subrack cannot be upgraded to the master subrack smoothly.

l The HUB mode (one subrack functions as an NE) cannot be upgrade to the master-slave mode smoothly.
8.7.2 Subrack Cascading Scheme

Subracks can be connected by using internal or external fibers and use either an ESC or OSC
technology to carry ECC and network management information. The physical layer for
transmitting ECC is a DCC channel. This means that the ECC is transmitted over fibers. In the
master-slave subrack mode, multiple subracks are displayed as one NE on the NMS.
In certain special situations, a network or an NE is isolated on a transport network and no fiber

connection is established between the network or NE and a gateway NE. Huawei provides
extended ECC communication. If subracks are cascaded by using Ethernet cables, an extended
channel (for example, Ethernet) instead of a DCC channel can be used to carry the ECC to meet
the requirements in these special situations.
Connect the ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface on the EFI board of the master subrack to the
ETH1, ETH2, or ETH3 interface on the EFI board of a slave subrack to implement
communication between the two subracks.
NOTE
When inter-subrack protection is configured, the ETH3 interface cannot be used for the communication
between the master and slave subracks.
Connect the NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2 interface on the EFI board of the master subrack on the
GNE to an Ethernet interface on the NMS computer by using an Ethernet cable so that the NMS
can manage the all the connected subracks. Connect the NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2 interface on
the EFI board of the master subrack on an NE to the NM_ETH1 or NM_ETH2 interface on the
EFI board of the master subrack on another NE to implement the communication between the
two NEs.

Figure 8-1 shows the subrack cascading scheme.
Figure 8-1 Subrack cascading scheme

Extended ECC
Master NM Master
Subrack-1 Subrack-2
EFI EFI
LAMP1
LAMP1
ETH1
ETH1
SERIAL
SERIAL
LAMP2
LAMP2
ETH2
ETH2
Master
Master
XCH XCH Subrack-2
Subrack-1
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH1
AUX
ETH3
ETH3
AUX
EFI
EFI
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
OTU OTU
Slave
Slave
XCH XCH Subrack-2
Subrack-1
AUX
AUX
EFI
EFI
EFI EFI
FIU SC2 SC2 FIU
LAMP1
LAMP1
ETH1
ETH1
SERIAL
SERIAL
OADM/OTM OADM/OTM
LAMP2
LAMP2
ETH2
ETH2
FIU
FIU
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH1
NM_ETH2
NM_ETH1
ETH3
ETH3
Slave Slave
Subrack-1 Subrack-2
External Internal Ethernet

Bus
Fiber Fiber Cable
Two cascading modes are available in master-slave subrack mode. In the first mode, subracks
are cascaded in tree-like structure, and in the other mode subracks are cascaded in ring-like
structure. By default, subracks are cascaded in tree-like structure. When subracks are cascaded
in tree-like structure, the master and slave subracks are not under protection so that the subracks
can be managed in the same way.
Figure 8-2 shows the tree-like subrack cascading scheme. Figure 8-3 shows the ring-like
subrack cascading scheme.
Figure 8-2 Tree-like subrack cascading scheme
Master Master
NM_ETH1 Subrack 0 NM_ETH2 NM_ETH1 Subrack 0 NM_ETH2
2
2
ETH1 ETH2 ETH1 ETH2
Slave ETH1 ETH1 Slave ETH2 Slave

从子架
Subrack 1 2 Subrack 42
从子架3 Subrack 12
从子架3
ETH2 ETH2 ETH1
Slave ETH1 ETH1 Slave ETH2 Slave

从子架
从子架3
ETH2 ETH2 ETH1
ETH1 ETH2 Slave

Slave ETH1 Slave
从子架 2 Subrack 62
从子架3
Subrack 3 ETH2 ETH1
ETH2
ETH1 Slave
Subrack 72
从子架3
ETH2
NE1 NE2

Figure 8-3 Ring-like subrack cascading scheme

Master
NM_ETH1 Subrack 0 NM_ETH2
2
ETH1 ETH2
Slave ETH1 ETH2 Slave

从子架
从子架3
ETH2 ETH1
Normal State
ETH1 ETH2
Slave
从子架 2
Subrack 2
Protection switching Failure recovery
Master
Subrack 0 NM_ETH2
NM_ETH1 从子架 2
ETH1 ETH2
Slave ETH1 ETH2 Slave

Subrack从子架
1 2 Subrack 3 2
从子架3
ETH2 ETH1
ETH1 ETH2 Protection State

Slave
从子架 2
Subrack 2
8.8 Administration and Maintenance

The design of the cabinet and boards and the configuration of the system incorporate the
requirements with easy and effective operation, administration, and maintenance of the
equipment.
8.8.1 Alarm and Performance Event Management

The system uses the alarm and performance event monitoring function for administration and
maintenance.

System Alarm Function

The system supports the alarm management function. This enables the set and query of alarm
level, automatic reporting of alarms, and deletion of history alarms. These help the user to
monitor and maintain the system in real time.
The system monitors alarm status of equipment in real time, analyzes alarms according to the
alarm relativity, and displays the analysis result on the client. A user can view the analysis result
on the client. The NMS enables a user to set the maximum alarm storage capacity and storage
period. If the history alarm data exceeds the capacity or the storage period of the history alarm
data expires, the NMS automatically saves the data in the history alarm database to files.
System Performance Monitoring Function

The performance event is a key parameter that reflects the working performance.
Knowledge about the causes that lead to the performance events, the relevant boards and alarms
helps locate the faults during routine maintenance and analyze faults when they occur.
At the end of each performance monitoring period, the SCC board reports performance events
to the NMS. The NMS enables a user to set the maximum performance storage capacity and
storage period. If the history performance data exceeds the capacity or the storage period the
history performance data expires, the NMS automatically saves the data in the history
performance database to files.
Performance events are related to the alarms. If the performance event value exceeds the preset
threshold value, the relevant alarm will be generated.When a performance event occurs, check
whether the relevant alarm is generated.
System Monitoring Items

The system provides the following system monitoring information.
l Temperature of the running board

l In-position status of the physical board
l Management function of the boards in different functional units
l Management function of the fan module
l Management function of the power module
l Input/Output optical power of the OTU
l Input/Output optical power of the OA
l Current status of the laser in the amplifier
l Temperature of the laser in the amplifier
l Temperature of the transmitting laser
8.8.2 Performance Monitoring of Access Services
Table 8-3 lists the 15-minute or 24-hour performance monitoring of access services provided
by the OptiX OSN 8800.

NOTE
l The equipment can save 15-minute performance data in a maximum of 96 performance detection
periods. That is, the equipment can save twenty-four hours of performance data (15-minute
performance).
l The equipment can save 24-hour performance data in a maximum of 30 performance detection periods.
That is, the equipment can save thirty days of performance data (24-hour performance).
Table 8-3 Performance monitoring of access services

Service Monitored Item Service Type
Category
Data services RMON statistics of FE

Ethernet performance GE
10GE LAN/10GE WAN
SDH/ATM/POS/ B1 bit parity error STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64/STM-256

SONET B2 bit parity error OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192/OC-768
B3 bit parity error
V5-BIP2 bit parity
error
OTN SM-BIP8 bit parity OTU1/OTU2/OTU2e/OTU3

error
TCM-BIP8 bit parity
error
PM-BIP8 bit parity
error
SAN services 8B/10B code violation ESCON

FC100/FC200/FC400/FC1200
FICON/FICON Express/FICON 4G
ISC 1G/ISC 2G
InfiniBand 2.5G/InfiniBand 5G
Video services 8B/10B code violation DVB-ASI
NOTE
Only the SDH boards support B3 bit errors and V5-BIP2 bit errors, which are supported only in the OCS
system.
The system also monitors bit error alarms, such as the FEC alarm and SM/PM/TCM bit error
alarms. For details on alarms of this group, see the Alarms and Performance Events
Reference.
8.8.3 Performance Monitoring of Network

The OptiX OSN 8800 monitors the WDM-side and client-side optical power, monitors the
optical power of a single channel or multiplexed channels of signals, and monitors the bias
current of the lasers.

Table 8-4 provides the performance monitoring of the network.
Table 8-4 Network performance monitoring

Type Monitored Item Implementation Board
OTSa/OMSb optical Optical power Fiber amplifier units, optical

signal performance multiplexer/demultiplexer units,
monitoring ROADM, case-shaped Raman
amplifier units, optical protection
unit and variable optical attenuator
(VOA)c provide real-time
detection.
OTS/OMS signal in- Wavelength value, optical Fiber amplifier units, optical
service spectrum power of each wavelength, multiplexer/demultiplexer units,
analysis OSNRd ROADMf, and Raman amplifier
units provide MON port. The
spectrum analyzer unit can be
connected to this port to monitor
the spectrum of the main path.
OChe optical signal Input/output optical power, WDM-side optical interfaces of all
performance laser temperature, bias current OTUs provide real-time detection.
monitoring
OTN electrical layer SM-BIP8 bit error OTUs with OTN line interfaces
signal detection TCM-BIP 8bit error provide real-time detection.
PM-BIP8 bit error
a: Optical Transmission Section

b: Optical Multiplex Section
c: The VOA supports optical power detection but is not necessarily adopted in OTS/OMS.
d: Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio
e: Optical Channel
f: The ROAM can detect the optical power of locally input wavelengths but cannot detect
OSNR or wavelength value.
On the equipment, there are power monitoring points. For example, the MON interfaces on the
front panels of certain boards monitor the optical power. These boards are as follows:
l The optical amplifier boards: OAU1, OBU1, OBU2, CRPC, HBA, DAS1
l The multiplexer and demultiplexer units: M40, D40, D40V, ITL, FIU
l The reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing units: RMU9, WSD9, WSM9,
WSMD4, RDU9, WSMD9
For details on performance monitoring, see the Alarms and Performance Events Reference.

Product Description 9 Technical Specifications
9 Technical Specifications
About This Chapter
9.1 General Specifications

9.2 Laser Class
Each type of boards of the product has a different laser class.
9.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications
9.4 Tributary Unit and Line Unit Specifications
9.5 PID Unit Specifications
9.6 Cross-connect Unit Specifications
9.7 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit Specifications
9.8 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit Specifications
9.9 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Unit Specifications
9.10 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications
9.11 System Control, Supervision and Communication Board Specifications
9.12 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications
9.13 Optical Protection Unit Specifications
9.14 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications
9.15 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications
9.16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board Specifications
9.17 DCM Specifications

9.1 General Specifications
9.1.1 Cabinet Specifications

Table 9-1 Technical specifications of the N63B cabinet
Item Specification
Dimensions 600 mm (W) x 300 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H)
Weight (kg) 60 kg
Standard working voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC
Working voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC
Table 9-2 Technical specifications of the N66B cabinet
Item Specification
Dimensions 600 mm (W) x 600 mm (D) x 2200 mm (H)
Weight (kg) 85 kg
Standard working voltage -48 V DC or -60 V DC
Working voltage range -40 V DC to -72 V DC
9.1.2 Subrack Specifications

NOTE
The predicted reliability specifications vary according to system configurations.
OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Table 9-3 Mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Item Specification
Dimensions 498 mm (W) × 295 mm (D) × 450 mm (H)

(19.6 in. (W) × 11.6 in. (D) × 17.7 in. (H))

Item Specification
Weight (empty subracka) 18 kg (39.6 lb.)
a: An empty subrack means no boards are installed in the board area, and no fan tray assembly
or air filter is installed.
Table 9-4 Requirements on voltage and current of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Item Requirement
Rated working current 37.5 A
Nominal working voltage -48V DC/-60V DC
Working voltage range -40V DC to -72V DC
Table 9-5 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN 8800 T16

Item Specification
Maximum subrack power consumptiona 1800 W
Typical configuration power consumption 700 W
a: The maximum subrack power consumption refers to the theoretical power consumption
obtained when boards with the highest power consumption are installed in every slot on the
subrack.
Table 9-6 Power consumption of the common units in an OptiX OSN 8800 T16
Power Power
Consumpt Consumpt
(77°F) (W)a (131°F) (W)
a
Subrack OTU subrack 509.2 615.6 8 x 10G OTU (LDX), 1 x XCH, 2

x PIU, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE,
OTN 501 808 5 x NQ2, 2 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x

electrical TQX, 2 x TOA, 1 x AUX, 1 x EFI,
cross-connect 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
subrack assembly


Power Power
Consumpt Consumpt
(77°F) (W)a (131°F) (W)
a
OTM subrack 468.7 569.7 1 x M40V, 1 x D40, 1 x OAU1, 1

x OBU1, 6 x LDX, 1 x XCH, 2 x
OLA subrack 228.1 294.3 4 x OBU1, 4 x VA1, 1 x SC2, 2 x

FIU, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x AUX,
1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x fan tray
assembly
OADM 449.5 561.5 2 x OAU1, 2 x MR8V, 2 x FIU, 8

subrack x LSX, 1 x SC2, 1 x XCH, 2 x
221 269.2 1 x M40, 1 x D40, 1 x WSMD9,

1 x DAS1, 1 x XCH, 2 x PIU, 1 x
AUX, 1 x EFI, 1 x ATE, and 1 x
fan tray assembly
a: Indicates that the power consumption of the subrack and cabinet is the value in a certain
configuration. The value is for reference only. The actual power consumed by the chassis and
cabinet is a calculation based on the power consumption of each module.
Table 9-7 OptiX OSN 8800 T16 equipment predicted reliability

System Availability Mean Time to Repair Mean Time Between
(MTTR) Failures (MTBF)
0.9999927 4 hours 62.80 years
9.1.3 DCM Frame Specifications

Table 9-8 Technical specifications of the DCM frame
Item Specification
Dimensions 48 mm (H) x 484 mm (W) x 270.5 mm (D) or

1.9 in. (H) x 19.1 in. (W) x 10.6 in. (D)
H = Height; W = Width; D = Depth

9.1.4 CRPC Frame Specification
Table 9-9 Mechanical specifications of the CRPC frame

Item Value
Mechanical specifications 535 mm (W) x 257 mm (D) x 86 mm (H) or 21.1 in.

(W) x 10.1 in. (D) x 3.4 in. (H)
Weight 3 kg (6.6 lb)
9.1.5 Fan-Tray Assembly Specifications

Table 9-10 Technical specifications of the fan tray assembly
Item Specification
Dimensions 493.7 mm (W) x 266.6 mm (D) x 56.1 mm (H) (19.44 in. (W)
x 10.5 in. (D) x 2.21 in. (H))
Power Consumptiona l Low Speed: 42.7 W

l Medium-Low Speed: 74.8 W
l Medium Speed: 106.8 W
l Medium-High Speed: 165.5 W
l High Speed: 215 W
a: Rotating speed of fans is controlled intelligently. When the system is typically configured,
rotating speed of fans is automatically adjusted to a low level. When the system is fully
configured with boards of high power consumption, and the system is running in a high
ambient temperature, rotating speed of fans may be adjusted to a high level. When rotating
at the maximum speed, power consumption of fan tray assembly may reach 215 W.
9.2 Laser Class

Each type of boards of the product has a different laser class.
NOTE
The power shown in Table 9-11 refers to the reference output power of the laser. It is achieved when the
mode-field diameter of fiber is 10 um at the 1550 nm wavelength.
The laser class complies with IEC 60825-2 laser safety standards.
For the OptiX OSN 8800, the laser level of the equipment is HAZARD LEVEL 1M.

Table 9-11 Laser class
Reference Optical
Power Range Laser Class Board Type
Under 10 dBm HAZARD LDX, LEM24, LEX4, LOA, LOG, LOM, LSQ,
LEVEL 1 LSX, LWXS, TMX, ND2, NQ2, NS3, NS2, TDX,
TOA, THA, TOM, TQX, TOG, TSXL, D40, M40,
M40V, RMU9, HSC1, SC1, SC2, ST2, DCP, SCS,
DCU, TDC
10 - 21.3 dBma HAZARD NPO2, NPO2E, SFIU, TN12FIU, ITL, CMR2,

LEVEL 1M CMR4, MR2, MR4, MR8V, RDU9, WSD9, WSM9
(TN13), WSMD4, OAU100, OAU101, OAU102,
OAU103, OBU1, OLP, VA1, VA4, GFU, HBA,
OAU105, OBU2, TN13FIU01, TN13FIU02,
CRPC, DAS1, WSMD9
a: For the HBA, OAU105, OBU2, TN13FIU02, CRPC boards, after the IPA function is
enabled, the laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, which indicates that
the maximum power output by the optical port on the board ranges 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3
dBm (136 mW).
9.3 Optical Transponder Unit Specifications
9.3.1 LDX Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Bo Client-Side Client-Side WDM-Side WDM-Side

ard Fixed Optical Pluggable Optical Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Module Optical Module
Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

12L km (Odd & Even
DX 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 Wavelengths)-Fixed
km Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-80
km 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s Single Rate NRZ-PIN-XFP
-0.3 km
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd
& Even Wavelengths)-
Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

NOTE
There is a margin between the default input power low alarm threshold and the receiver sensitivity and a
margin between the default input power high alarm threshold and the overload point. This ensures that the
system can report an input power low alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity
or report an input power high alarm before the actual input power reaches the overload point.
Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 40 km, and 10 Gbit/s multi-rate 80 km module
can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10Gbit/s single rate -0.3km module can be used only to access 10GE LAN signals.
Table 9-12 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10 Gbit/s rate services
Item Unit Value
Optical 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Module Multirate-10 Multirate-40 Multirate-80 Single
Type km km km Rate-0.3 km
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Optical - SLM SLM SLM MLM

source type
Target - 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7 0.3 km (0.2

distance mi.) mi.) mi.)
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Operating nm 1290 to 1330 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565 840 to 860

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4 -1.3

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9 3
extinction
ratio
Maximum nm N/A N/A N/A N/A

-20 dB
spectral
width

Item Unit Value

Minimum dB 30 30 30 30
side mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - G.691-compliant

mask
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver - PIN PIN APD PIN

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate )
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)
Minimum dBm 0.5 -1 -7 -1

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
Minimum dBm -1 -1 -7 -1
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance

Table 9-13 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for DWDM colored
wavelengths
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd

Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
Line code format - NRZ
Maximum mean launched dBm 2

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -3

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9
Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency deviation GHz ±10
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.3

width
Minimum side mode dB 35

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800
Receiver type - PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650
Receiver sensitivity (FEC dBm -16

on) EOL
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0

(FEC on)
Maximum reflectance dB -27

WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module
Table 9-14 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths
Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1-compliant

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)

Table 9-15 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using tunable wavelengths
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band-

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
l Dimensions of front panel: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)

Power Consumption
Bo WDM-Side Module Typical Power Maximum Power
ard Consumption at 25° Consumption at 55°
C (77°F) (W) C (131°F) (W)
LD 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 44.5 51.2

X Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 45.5 52.2

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
9.3.2 LEM24 Specifications


Module
TN N/A 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 km N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

11L (I-850-LC) (Odd & Even
EM 1000 BASE-LX-10 km Wavelengths)-Fixed
24 (I-1310-LC) Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s BASE-SR-0.3
km (SFP+) 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
10 Gbit/s BASE-LR-10 NRZ-PIN-XFP
km (SFP+)
10 Gbit/s BASE-ER/ km
EW-40 km (SFP+)
km
km
NOTE

Table 9-16 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for GE services

Item Unit Value
Optical Module 1000 BASE-SX-0.5 1000 BASE-LX-10

Type km (I-850-LC) km (I-1310-LC)
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Optical source type - MLM SLM
Target distance - 0.5 km (0.3 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Operating nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -2.5 -3

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -9.5 -9.5

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 9 9
ratio
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z –compliant
Receiver type - PIN PIN

wavelength range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -17 -20
Minimum receiver dBm 0 -3

overload
NOTE
The electrical interface specifications comply with IEEE Std 802.3 when receiving 1000 BASE-T services.

Table 9-17 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10GE services
Item Unit Value
Optical 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

Module Type BASE-SR-0.3 BASE-LR-10 BASE-ER/
km (SFP+) km (SFP+) EW-40 km
(SFP+)
Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface service
rate
Optical source - MLM SLM SLM

type
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Target distance - 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.)
Operating nm 840 to 860 1260 to 1355 1530 to 1565

wavelength
range
Maximum mean dBm -1 0.5 4

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -7.3 -8.2 -4.7

launched power
Minimum dB 3 3.5 3
extinction ratio
Output optical dBm ≤-30 ≤-30 ≤-30

power in case of
laser shutdown
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z –compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11.1 -12.6 -14.1

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -1 0.5 -1

receiver
overload

Item Unit Value

(SFP+)
Maximum dB -12 -12 -26

reflectance
Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
Table 9-20 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical module using gray light
Item Unit Value

Module Type Multirate-10 km Multirate-40 km Multirate-80 km

format
Optical source - SLM SLM SLM

type
Target distance - 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio
Maximum -20 nm N/A N/A N/A

dB spectral
width
Minimum side dB 30 30 30
mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - G.959.1-compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD

Item Unit Value


wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -1 -1 -7
receiver
overload

reflectance
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Consumption at 25°C (77° Consumption at 55°C
F) (131°F)
TN11LEM24 81 83
9.3.3 LEX4 Specifications



Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s BASE-SR-0.3 N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

11L km (SFP+) (Odd & Even
EX 10 Gbit/s BASE-LR-10 Wavelengths)-Fixed
4 km (SFP+) Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s BASE-ER/
EW-40 km (SFP+) 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
km
km
km
NOTE
Table 9-21 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for 10GE services
Item Unit Value

(SFP+)
Optical Gbit/s 10.3125 10.3125 10.3125

interface service
rate
Optical source - MLM SLM SLM

type

format
Target distance - 0.3 km (0.2 mi.) 10 km (6.2 mi.) 40 km (24.9 mi.)

Item Unit Value

(SFP+)

wavelength
range
Maximum mean dBm -1 0.5 4

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -7.3 -8.2 -4.7

launched power
Minimum dB 3 3.5 3
extinction ratio
Output optical dBm ≤-30 ≤-30 ≤-30

power in case of
laser shutdown
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z –compliant

mask

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11.1 -12.6 -14.1

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -1 0.5 -1

receiver
overload

reflectance

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value


format

Item Unit Value


type

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload

reflectance

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (131°F)
TN11LEX4 64 67
9.3.4 LOA Specifications



Module
TN N/A I-16-2 km N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band

11L S-16.1-15 km (Odd & Even
OA Wavelengths)-Fixed
L-16.1-40 km Wavelength-NRZ-
L-16.2-80 km PIN-XFP
2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Multirate-0.5 km Tunable Wavelength-
1000 BASE-LX-10 km NRZ-PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-LX-40 km 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10
km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s km
multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km
FC400/FICON4G
Module (Multi mode)
FC400/FICON4G
Module (Single mode)
1600-M5E-SN-I-0.3 km
(SFP+)
1600-SM-LC-L-10 km
(SFP+)
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
NOTE

NOTE
I-16-2 km module, S-16.1-15 km module, L-16.1-40 km module and L-16.2-80 km module can be used to access
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.

Table 9-25 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDH services
Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type

format
Optical - MLM SLM SLM SLM

source type
Target - 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7


wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -3 0 3 3
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
Maximum nm N/A 1 1 1
-20 dB
spectral
width
Minimum dB N/A 30 30 30
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask G.959.1-compliant
Receiver - PIN PIN APD APD

type

Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -3 0 -9 -9
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and
FE signals.
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module, 1000 BASE-LX-40 km module and 1000 BASE-ZX-80 km module can be used
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals.
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE Std
802.3.

Item Unit Value
Optical 2.125 Gbit/s 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE- 1000 BASE-

Module Multirate-0. LX-10 km LX-40 km ZX-80 km
Type 5 km

format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7

distance mi.) mi.) mi.) mi.)

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -2.5 -3 0 5

mean
launched
power

Item Unit Value

Type 5 km
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z-compliant

mask
Receiver - PIN PIN PIN PIN

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -20 -22

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -3 -3 -3
receiver
overload
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI signals.
Table 9-27 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for SDI services
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s

multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km
Target distance - 10 km (6.2 mi.)
Service rate Gbit/s ≤3

Item Unit Value

multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km

power

power

width
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity dBm -16
Table 9-28 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC services

Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type FC400/FICON4G FC400/FICON4G

Module-0.3 km Module-10 km
(Multi mode) (Single mode)
Transmitter parameter nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355

specifications at point S

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -9 -8.4

launched power
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface

(FC-PI-2) parameter template

Item Unit Value

Operating wavelength nm 770 to 860 1260 to 1600

range
Minimum receiver dBm 0 0

overload
Maximum reflectance dB -12 -12
Table 9-29 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for FC800/FICON8G services
Item Unit Value
Optical Module 1600-M5E-SN- 1600-SM-LC-L-10

Type I-0.3 km (SFP+) km (SFP+)
Optical interface Gbit/s 8.5 8.5

service rate
Optical source type - MLM SLM

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -1 -0.5

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -7 -8

launched power
ratio
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11 -14.4
Minimum receiver dBm -1 0.5

overload

Item Unit Value
Optical Module 1600-M5E-SN- 1600-SM-LC-L-10

Type I-0.3 km (SFP+) km (SFP+)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
1.25 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, and DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
Table 9-30 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module for CWDM colored
wavelengths
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

(eSFP CWDM)-40 (eSFP CWDM)-80
km km
Target distance - 40 km (24.9 mi.) 80 km (49.7 mi.)

range
Maximum mean dBm 5 5

launched power
Minimum mean launched dBm 0 0

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 9 8.2
Central wavelength nm ±6.5 ±6.5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 1.0 1.0

spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 30 30

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z-compliant G.957-compliant

G.959.1-compliant
IEEE802.3z-compliant

Item Unit Value

km km
Receiver type - PIN APD

range
Minimum receiver dBm -3 -9

overload
NOTE
2.67 Gbit/s Multi-rate module (eSFP DWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100,
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
wavelengths
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120

km
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency deviation GHz ±12.5

power
Minimum mean launched dBm 0

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 1

width

suppression ratio

Item Unit Value

km
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin are required for

the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
equivalent OTU1 services)
G.959.1-compliant (5% margin are required
for the eye pattern of STM-16 services and
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength nm N/A

range
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9
Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value
Optical Module 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40

Type km km
Optical source type - SLM SLM

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -1 2

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 6 8.2

ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm N/A N/A

spectral width

Item Unit Value

Type km km

suppression ratio

wavelength range

overload
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight: 1.19 kg (2.64b.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Typical Power Maximum Power
Module Consumption at Consumption at
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11LOA 800 ps/nm-C Band 31.8 36

(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
800 ps/nm-C Band- 32.8 37

Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP

9.3.5 LOG Specifications

Bo Client-Side Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable
Optical Module Optical Module
Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band N/A

11L Multirate-0.5 km (odd & even
OG 1000 BASE-LX-10 wavelengths)-Fixed
km Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
1000 BASE-LX-40
Fixed Wavelength-
1000 BASE-ZX-80 NRZ-PIN
km
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate Tunable Wavelength-
(eSFP CWDM)-40 NRZ-PIN
km
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate Tunable Wavelength-
(eSFP CWDM)-80 NRZ-APD
km
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

12L Multirate-0.5 km Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
OG 1000 BASE-LX-10 DRZ-PIN Wavelengths)-
km 800 ps/nm-C Band- Fixed Wavelength-
Tunable Wavelength- NRZ-PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-LX-40
NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
km
Tunable
1000 BASE-ZX-80 Wavelength-NRZ-
km PIN-XFP
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate 10 Gbit/s
(eSFP CWDM)-40 Multirate-10 km
km 10 Gbit/s
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate Multirate-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 10 Gbit/s
km Multirate-80 km
NOTE
For information about the boards supported by the equipment, see Mappings Between the Board and Equipment
in the Hardware Description.

NOTE

NOTE
When accessing 1000 BASE-T services, the specifications of the electrical interface comply with the IEEE
Std 802.3.
Item Unit Value

Type 5 km

format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range

Item Unit Value

Type 5 km
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -20 -22

sensitivity
receiver
overload
wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km km

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

Item Unit Value

km km

range

overload
WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module
Table 9-37 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band 800 ps/nm-C Band-

(odd & even Fixed Wavelength-
wavelengths)-Fixed NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Maximum mean launched dBm 2 2

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -3 -3

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 10
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05
Central frequency deviation GHz ±10 ±5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 0.3 0.3

width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 800

Item Unit Value

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Receiver sensitivity (FEC dBm -16 -16

on) EOL
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 0
Table 9-38 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using tunable wavelengths
Item Unit Value
Optical 1200 ps/ 1200 ps/ 4800 ps/ 800 ps/ 800 ps/
Module Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Band- Band- Band- Band- Band-
Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable Tunable
Wavelen Wavele Wavelen Waveleng Waveleng
gth- ngth- gth- th-DRZ- th-NRZ-
NRZ- NRZ- ODB- PIN PIN
PIN APD APD
Line code - NRZ NRZ ODB DRZ NRZ

format
Maximum dBm 2 2 2 2 2
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 10 10 N/Aa 10 10
extinction ratio
Central THz 192.10 to 196.05

frequency
Central GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation

Item Unit Value
PIN APD APD
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
Minimum side dB 35 35 35 35 35
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN PIN
Operating nm 1200 to 1650

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
Minimum dBm 0 -9 -9 0 0
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
a: The ODB code pattern has three levels, and thus extinction ratio is not needed.

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value


format

Item Unit Value


type

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload

reflectance

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
TN11LOG: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN12LOG: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar WDM-Side Module Typical Power Maximum Power
d Consumption at Consumption at
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even 40 45

1LO wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
G PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 43 48

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable
Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN

Wavelength-ODB-APD
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 37.0 41.44

2LO Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
G PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km


Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
9.3.6 LOM Specifications



Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band N/A

11L Multirate-0.5 km (odd & even
OM 1000 BASE-LX-10 wavelengths)-Fixed
km Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
1000 BASE-LX-40
Fixed Wavelength-
1000 BASE-ZX-80 NRZ-PIN
km
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
FC400/FICON4G Tunable Wavelength-
Module-0.3 km NRZ-PIN
(Multimode)
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
FC400/FICON4G Tunable Wavelength-
Module-10 km NRZ-APD
(Single mode)
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
FC100/FC200/ Tunable Wavelength-
FICON/FICON ODB-APD
Express Module-0.5
km (Multimode) 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
FC100/FC200/ DRZ-PIN
FICON/FICON
Express Module-2 km
(Single mode)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km


Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

12L Multirate-0.5 km Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
OM 1000 BASE-LX-10 DRZ-PIN Wavelengths)-
km 800 ps/nm-C Band- Fixed Wavelength-
Tunable Wavelength- NRZ-PIN-XFP
1000 BASE-LX-40
km NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
1000 BASE-ZX-80 Wavelength-NRZ-
km PIN-XFP
FC400/FICON4G
Module-0.3 km
(Multimode)
FC400/FICON4G
Module-10 km
(Single mode)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-0.5
km (Multimode)
FC100/FC200/
FICON/FICON
Express Module-2 km
(Single mode)
(eSFP CWDM)-40
km
(eSFP CWDM)-80
km
NOTE
NOTE

NOTE
Std 802.3.


Item Unit Value

Type 5 km

format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -20 -22

sensitivity
receiver
overload

Item Unit Value
Optical FC400/ FC400/ FC100/ FC100/

Module FICON4G FICON4G FC200/ FC200/
Type Module-0.3 Module-10 FICON/ FICON/
km (Multi km (Single FICON FICON
mode) mode) Express Express
Module-0.5 Module-2
km km (Single
(Multimode) mode)

format
Target - 0.3 km (0.2 10 km (6.2 0.5 km (0.3 2 km (1.2 mi.)

Transmitter nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355 830 to 860 1266 to 1360

parameter
specifications
at point S
Maximum dBm -1.1 -1 -2.5 -3

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9 -8.4 -9.5 -10

mean
launched
power
Eye pattern - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface (FC-PI-2)

mask parameter template
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN PIN

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -15 -18 -17 -18

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 0 0 0
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -12 -12 -12 -27

reflectance

wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km km

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload

Item Unit Value

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

on) EOL

Item Unit Value
PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Central GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range

Item Unit Value
PIN APD APD
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
TN11LOM:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN12LOM:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd & even 92.7 101.7

1LO wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
M NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN


25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN

Wavelength-ODB-APD

2LO Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
M NRZ-PIN-XFP


Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
NOTE
When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board
increases by another 2 W.
9.3.7 LSQ Specifications

Bo Client-Side Fixed Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Optical Module Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable
Module Optical
Module
TN 40G Transponder N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

11L Tunable Wavelength-
SQ ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN

NOTE
Client-Side Fixed Optical Module
Table 9-49 Specifications of client-side fixed optical module
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 40G Transponder
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm 0
Minimum side mode suppression ratio dB 35
Receiver type - PIN
Item Unit Value
Optical Module 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band-

Type Tunable Wavelength- Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN
Line code format - ODB DQPSK

Item Unit Value

ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN
Operating frequency THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05

range

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 N/A

ratio
Central frequency GHz ±2.5 ±2.5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.6 N/A

spectral width
Maximum -3 dB nm N/A 0.3

spectral width

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm -800 to 800 -800 to 800

wavelength range

(FEC on) EOL

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Maximum Power
Consumption at Consumption at
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11LS 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 75.0 82.0

Q Wavelength-ODB-PIN

Wavelength-DQPSK-PIN
9.3.8 LSX Specifications

Bo Client- Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Side Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable Optical
Fixed Module Module
Optical
Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band (odd N/A

12L Multirate-10 km & even wavelengths)-
SX 10 Gbit/s Fixed Wavelength-
Multirate-40 km NRZ-PIN
10 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Multirate-80 km Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
10 Gbit/s Single Rate
-0.3 km 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN

Bo Client- Client-Side WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side

ard Side Pluggable Optical Optical Module Pluggable Optical
Fixed Module Module
Optical
Module
TN N/A 10 Gbit/s 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

13L Multirate-10 km Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
SX 10 Gbit/s DRZ-PIN Wavelengths)-Fixed
Multirate-40 km 800 ps/nm-C Band- Wavelength-NRZ-
Tunable Wavelength- PIN-XFP
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable
10 Gbit/s Single Rate Wavelength-NRZ-
-0.3 km PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band
(Odd & Even
Wavelengths)-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
NOTE
NOTE

NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km
module can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s single-rate 0.3 km module can be used to access 10GE LAN and FC1200 signals.
Item Unit Value


format

source type

Item Unit Value



wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio

-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate )

Item Unit Value

Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance
wavelengths
Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

Item Unit Value

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

width

suppression ratio

on) EOL
Item Unit Value
PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power

Item Unit Value
PIN APD APD
extinction ratio

frequency
Central GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
TN12LSX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN13LSX: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)

Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)

1LS wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN

Wavelength-ODB-APD

2LS wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 32.5 39

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN

Wavelength-ODB-APD
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 29.4 32.8

3LS Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
X
Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 27 30.4

Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 28 31.4


9.3.9 LWXS Specifications


Optical Module Optical
Module Module
TN N/A 2.125 Gbit/s 12800 ps/nm-C Band- N/A

11L Multirate-0.5 km Fixed Wavelength-
WX I-16-2 km NRZ-PIN
S 12800 ps/nm-C Band-
S-16.1-15 km
TN Fixed Wavelength-
12L L-16.2-80 km NRZ-APD
WX 1.25 Gbit/s Multirate 6500 ps/nm-C Band-
S (eSFP CWDM)-40 km Fixed Wavelength-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ-PIN
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km 3200 ps/nm-C Band-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate Fixed Wavelength-
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km NRZ-APD
12800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
6400 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD (Four
Channels-Tunable)
1600 ps/nm-CWDM
Band-Fixed
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
NOTE
NOTE

NOTE
The I-16/SR-1 OC-48 module, S-16.1/IR-1 OC-48 module, and L-16.2/LR-2 OC-48 can be used to access ETR,
CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
NOTE
The 2.125 Gbit/s multirate module is used to access FC200, GE, FC100 and FE signals.

Table 9-57 Specifications of client-side pluggable optical module

Item Unit Value
Optical 2.125 Gbit/s I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.2-80 km

Module Multirate-0.
Type 5 km

format
Optical - MLM MLM SLM SLM

source type
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 2 km (1.2 mi.) 15 km (9.3 80 km (49.7


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -10 -5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
Maximum nm N/A N/A 1 1

-20 dB
spectral
width
Minimum dB N/A N/A 30 30

side mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z- G.957-compliant

mask compliant
Receiver - PIN PIN PIN APD

type

Item Unit Value
Optical 2.125 Gbit/s I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 km L-16.2-80 km

Module Multirate-0.
Type 5 km

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -18 -18 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -3 0 -9
receiver
overload
Maximum dB N/A -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
The 1.25 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12,
ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access ETR, CLO, STM-16, OC-48, FC200,
FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, or FE signals.
wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km km

range

launched power

power

Item Unit Value

km km

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload
wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km

power

Item Unit Value

km

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

range

Table 9-60 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module
Item Unit Value
Optical 12800 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6500 ps/ 3200 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6400 ps/
Module Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Band- Band- Band- Band- Band- Band-
Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Tunable Tunable
Waveleng Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng
th-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ-
PINa APDa PIN APD APD APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Maximum dBm -1 -1 3 3 3 3
mean launched
power
Minimum mean dBm -5 -5 -2 -2 -2 -2

launched power
Minimum dB 10 10 8.2 8.2 10 8.2

extinction ratio

frequency
Central GHz ±10

frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.2 0.2 0.5 0.5 0.2 0.5

dB spectral
width
Minimum side dB 35 35 30 30 35 35
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 12800 12800 6500 3200 12800 6400

tolerance

mask
Receiver type - PIN APD PIN APD APD APD

Item Unit Value
Optical 12800 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6500 ps/ 3200 ps/ 12800 ps/ 6400 ps/
Module Type nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C nm-C
Band- Band- Band- Band- Band- Band-
Fixed Fixed Fixed Fixed Tunable Tunable
Waveleng Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng Wavelen Waveleng
th-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ- gth-NRZ- th-NRZ-
PINa APDa PIN APD APD APD
(Four
Channels-
Tunable)
Operating nm 1200 to 1650 1300 to

wavelength 1575
range
Receiver dBm -18 -28 -18 -26 -28 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -9 0 -10 -9 -9

receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
a: The 12800ps/nm-PIN and 12800ps/nm-APD modules do not support pilot tone modulation mode.
Table 9-61 Specifications of CWDM-side fixed optical module using fixed wavelengths
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed

Wavelength-NRZ-APD

power
Minimum mean launched dBm 2.5

power
Central wavelength nm 1271 to 1611
Central wavelength nm ≤±6.5

deviation

width

Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1600 ps/nm-CWDM Band-Fixed

Wavelength-NRZ-APD

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Consumption at 25°C (77°F) Consumption at 55°C (131°
(W) F) (W)
LWXS 33.9 37.3
9.3.10 TMX Specifications



Module
TN N/A I-16-2 km 800 ps/nm-C Band N/A

11T S-16.1-15 km (odd & even
MX wavelengths)-Fixed
L-16.1-40 km Wavelength-NRZ-
L-16.2-80 km PIN
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate 800 ps/nm-C Band-
(eSFP CWDM)-80 Fixed Wavelength-
km NRZ-PIN
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate 1200 ps/nm-C Band-
(eSFP DWDM)-120 Tunable Wavelength-
km NRZ-PIN
1200 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-APD
4800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
ODB-APD
800 ps/nm-C Band-
Tunable Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
TN N/A I-16-2 km 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band

12T S-16.1-15 km Tunable Wavelength- (Odd & Even
MX DRZ-PIN Wavelengths)-
L-16.1-40 km Fixed Wavelength-
800 ps/nm-C Band-
L-16.2-80 km Tunable Wavelength- NRZ-PIN-XFP
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate NRZ-PIN 800 ps/nm-C Band-
(eSFP CWDM)-80 Tunable
km Wavelength-NRZ-
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate PIN-XFP
(eSFP DWDM)-120 10 Gbit/s
km Multirate-10 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s
Multirate-80 km
NOTE

NOTE

NOTE
I-16 module, S-16.1 module, L-16.1 module and L-16.2 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48,
FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type

format

source type


wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width

Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP

CWDM)-80 km

Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP

CWDM)-80 km
Central wavelength deviation nm ±6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1.0
Minimum side mode suppression dB 30

ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant

G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - APD
NOTE
The 2.67 Gbit/s multirate module (eSFP CWDM) can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE,
STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE signals.
wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km

power

Item Unit Value

km

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

range
Item Unit Value

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

Item Unit Value

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

on) EOL

Item Unit Value
PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Central GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range

Item Unit Value
PIN APD APD
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value


format

type

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio

Item Unit Value


dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload

reflectance
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
TN11TMX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN12TMX: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)

Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)

1TM wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN

Wavelength-ODB-APD

2TM Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
X NRZ-PIN-XFP


Wavelength-DRZ-PIN

Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
9.3.11 Jitter Transfer Characteristics

Specifications include jitter transfer characteristics specifications of OTUs. These specifications
comply with ITU-T G.8251.
The OTU has the jitter transfer characteristics. Its jitter transfer function should be under the
curve. See Figure 9-1. For its specifications, refer to Table 9-70.
Table 9-70 Jitter transfer characteristics specifications
STM Level fc (kHz) P (dB)
STM-1(A) 130 0.1

STM Level fc (kHz) P (dB)
STM-4(A) 500 0.1
STM-16(A)/OTU1 2000 0.1
STM-64(A)/OTU2 1000 0.1
STM-256(A)/OTU3 4000 0.1
Figure 9-1 Jitter transfer characteristics

Jitter gain
P
-20dB/10 octave
f
0 fc Jitter frequency
9.3.12 Input Jitter Tolerance

Specifications include input jitter tolerance specifications of the OTU. These specifications
comply with ITU-T G.8251.
The OTU is able to tolerate the input jitter pattern shown in Figure 9-2. The specifications are
provided in Table 9-71.
Table 9-71 Input jitter tolerance specifications
STM Level f0 (kHz) f1 (kHz) A1 (UIp-p) A2 (UIp-p)
STM-1(A) 6.5 65 0.15 1.5
STM-4(A) 25 250 0.15 1.5
STM-16(A)/ 100 1000 0.15 1.5

OTU1
STM-64(A)/ 400 4000 0.15 1.5

OTU2
STM-256(A) 1920 16000 0.18 1.5
OTU3 480 16000 0.18 6.0

Figure 9-2 Input jitter tolerance

Input jitter amplitude
A
A2
-20dB/10 octave
A1
f
f0 f1 Frequency
9.3.13 Output Jitter

Specifications include output jitter specifications of OTU. These specifications comply with
ITU-T G.8251.
The specifications of OTU output jitter are provided in Table 9-72.
Table 9-72 Output jitter specifications

Interface Measurement Band
Peak-Peak
STM Level High-Pass (kHz) Low-Pass (MHz) Amplitude (UI)
STM-1 0.5 1.3 0.3
65 1.3 0.1
STM-4 1 5 0.3
250 5 0.1
STM-16/OTU1 5 20 0.3
1000 20 0.1
STM-64/OTU2 20 80 0.3
4000 80 0.1
STM-256 80 320 0.3
16000 320 0.14
OTU3 20 320 1.2
16000 320 0.14
9.4 Tributary Unit and Line Unit Specifications

9.4.1 ND2 Specifications

Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable Optical

Module
TN11ND 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even N/A

2 Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN12ND 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
2 Wavelength-DRZ-PIN Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable NRZ-PIN-XFP
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km
TN52ND 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

2 Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN53ND N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

2 Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP
NOTE
NOTE

Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 800 ps/nm-C Band- 800 ps/nm-C Band-

Tunable Tunable Wavelength-
Wavelength-NRZ- DRZ-PIN
PIN
Line code format - NRZ DRZ

power

power
Central frequency GHz ±5 ±5

deviation

width

suppression ratio
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650

range

on) EOL

overload

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value


format

Item Unit Value


type

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload

reflectance

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
TN11ND2/TN12ND2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb. )
TN52ND2: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
TN53ND2: 1.2 kg (2.7 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar WDM-Side Module Typical Power Maximum
d Consumption at Power
25°C (77°F) (W) Consumption at
55°C (131°F) (W)

1ND Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
2 PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 62.7 70.2

NRZ-PIN

DRZ-PIN
TN1 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 57.2 64

2ND NRZ-PIN
2
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 62 69
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 46 52

Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
TN5 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength- 70.5 77.5

2ND NRZ-PIN
2
DRZ-PIN
TN5 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 25 28

3ND Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
2 PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

9.4.2 NQ2 Specifications

Board WDM-Side Fixed WDM-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Optical Module
TN51NQ N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even Wavelengths)-Fixed

2 Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-XFP
800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable Wavelength-NRZ-PIN-
XFP

XFP

XFP

XFP
NOTE
NOTE

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value


format

Item Unit Value


type

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -1 2 4
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -1 0
mean launched
power
Minimum dB 6 8.2 9
extinction ratio

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio

mask

wavelength
range

sensitivity
receiver
overload

reflectance

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
l TN51NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
l TN52NQ2: 2.0 kg (4.4 lb.)
l TN53NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
l TN54NQ2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
Boar WDM-Side Module Typical Power Typical Power
25°C (77°F) (W) 25°C (77°F) (W)

NQ2 Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP

PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN53 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 46.5 50

PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP
TN54 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 53 58.3

PIN-XFP
NRZ-PIN-XFP

9.4.3 NS2 Specifications


Module
TN11NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even N/A

2 Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN
800 ps/nm-C Band-Fixed Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-ODB-APD
Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
TN12NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even
2 Wavelength)-Fixed Wavelength-NRZ- Wavelengths)-Fixed Wavelength-
PIN NRZ-PIN-XFP
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-APD
Wavelength-ODB-APD
Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN52NS 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable N/A

2 Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
Wavelength-NRZ-PIN
TN53NS N/A 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even

NRZ-PIN-XFP

NOTE
NOTE
Item Unit Value

Wavelength-NRZ-
PIN

power

power

width

suppression ratio

on) EOL

Item Unit Value
PIN APD APD

format
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -3 -3 -3 -3 -3
mean launched
power
extinction ratio

frequency
Central GHz ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation
Maximum -20 nm 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1200 1200 4800 800 800

tolerance nm

wavelength
range

Item Unit Value
PIN APD APD
Receiver dBm -16 -26 -26 -16 -16

sensitivity
(FEC on) EOL
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

power

power

Item Unit Value

PIN-XFP

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

power

power

width

Item Unit Value

Tunable Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-XFP

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN

on) EOL

(FEC on)
Item Unit Value

Type km km
Optical source type - SLM SLM

wavelength range
Maximum mean dBm -1 2

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 6 8.2

ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm N/A N/A

spectral width

Item Unit Value

Type km km

suppression ratio

wavelength range

overload
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
TN52NS2: 1.3 kg (2.86 lb.)
TN53NS2: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board WDM-Side Module Typical Power Maximum
Consumption Power
at 25°C (77°F) Consumption
(W) at 55°C (131°F)
(W)
TN52NS 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 46.5 51.1

2 Wavelength-NRZ-PIN

Wavelength-DRZ-PIN
TN53NS 800 ps/nm-C Band (Odd & Even 20 24

NRZ-PIN-XFP


Consumption Power
(W) at 55°C (131°F)
(W)

9.4.4 NS3 Specifications


Module

3 Wavelength-ODB-PIN


NOTE
NOTE

Item Unit Value

ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

deviation

spectral width

spectral width

suppression ratio

wavelength range

(FEC on) EOL

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance

Item Unit Value

ODB-PIN DQPSK-PIN

range

launched power

launched power

ratio

deviation

spectral width

spectral width

suppression ratio

wavelength range

(FEC on) EOL

overload (FEC on)
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance

Table 9-88 Specifications of DWDM-side fixed optical module using gray light
Item Unit Value
Receiver type - PIN
TN11NS3:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN52NS3:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN54NS3:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Power Consumption
Consumption Power
(W) at 55°C (131°C)
(W)
TN11NS3 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 92 101.2


Wavelength-ODB-PIN
TN52NS3 500 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 118 130


Wavelength-ODB-PIN

TN54NS3 800 ps/nm-C Band-Tunable 73 80


Wavelength-ODB-PIN
9.4.5 TDX Specifications

Board Client-Side Fixed Optical Client-Side Pluggable Optical

Module Module
TN11TD N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km

X/ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
TN12TD
X/ 10 Gbit/s Multirate-80 km
TN52TD 10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km
X
TN53TD N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km

X 10 Gbit/s Multirate-40 km
10 Gbit/s Single Rate-0.3 km
NOTE

NOTE
NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module
can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module can be used to access FC800 signals.
Item Unit Value


format

source type


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio

-20 dB
spectral
width

Item Unit Value

side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate )
Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight:
l TN11TDX: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)

l TN12TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)

l TN52TDX: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)
l TN53TDX: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11TDX 78.0 80.0
TN12TDX 37.4 40.7
TN52TDX 57.3 63.0
TN53TDX 25.0 35.0
9.4.6 TOA Specifications

Board Client-Side Fixed Client-Side Pluggable Optical Module

Optical Module
TN54TO N/A I-16-2 km

A S-16.1-15 km
L-16.1-40 km
L-16.2-80 km
2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
1.25 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP CWDM)-40 km
2.67 Gbit/s Multirate (eSFP DWDM)-120 km
270 Mbit/s to 3 Gbit/s multirate (Video eSFP)-10
km
FC400/FICON4G Module (Multi mode)
FC400/FICON4G Module (Single mode)
NOTE


NOTE
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1,
OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type

format

source type


wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio


Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, and
FE signals.
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE and DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
802.3.
NOTE

Item Unit Value

Type 5 km

format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7


Item Unit Value

Type 5 km

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -20 -22

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
STM-1, OC-3, FDDI, FICON, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals. The
specifications listed below apply to STM-16, OC-48 signals.

wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km km

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload
NOTE
FDDI, FICON, FICON Express, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

range
NOTE
SDI module can be used to access SDI, HD-SDI, and 3G-SDI signals.

Item Unit Value

multirate (Video
eSFP)-10 km
Service rate Gbit/s ≤3

power

power

width
Receiver type - PIN

Item Unit Value

Transmitter parameter nm 830 to 860 1270 to 1355


Item Unit Value


launched power

launched power
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with Fiber Channel-physical interface

(FC-PI-2) parameter template

range

overload
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN54TOA 23 25
9.4.7 TOG Specifications



Optical Module
TN52TO N/A 2.125 Gbit/s Multirate-0.5 km

G 1000 BASE-LX-10 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
NOTE
Item Unit Value

Type 5 km

format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7


wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

Item Unit Value

Type 5 km

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -20 -22

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
Std 802.3.
wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km km

range

launched power

power

Item Unit Value

km km

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight: 0.85 kg (1.87 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN52TOG 41.8 46.0
9.4.8 TOM Specifications



ard Fixed Pluggable Optical Fixed Pluggable Optical
Module Module
TN N/A I-16-2 km N/A 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

11T S-16.1-15 km (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
OM 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
L-16.1-40 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
L-16.2-80 km
I-16-2 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km S-16.1-15 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km L-16.1-40 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km L-16.2-80 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
(Video eSFP)-20 km
TN N/A I-16-2 km N/A 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

52T S-16.1-15 km (eSFP CWDM)-80 km
OM 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate
L-16.1-40 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
L-16.2-80 km
I-16-2 km
2.125 Gbit/s
Multirate-0.5 km S-16.1-15 km
1000 BASE-LX-10 km L-16.1-40 km
1000 BASE-LX-40 km L-16.2-80 km
1000 BASE-ZX-80 km
(eSFP CWDM)-40 km
(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
(eSFP DWDM)-120 km
(Video eSFP)-20 km
NOTE

NOTE

NOTE
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE
signals.
Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type

format

source type


wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width

Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type
side mode
suppression
ratio


type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
NOTE
2.125 Gbit/s Multi-rate module can be used to access FC200, GE, FC100, and FE signals.
to access GE, FC100, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, FE and DVB-ASI signals.
802.3.
Item Unit Value

Type 5 km

format
Target - 0.5 km (0.3 10 km (6.2 40 km (24.9 80 km (49.7


Item Unit Value

Type 5 km

wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -11.5 -4.5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -19 -20 -22

sensitivity
receiver
overload
NOTE
STM-1, OC-3, FE, DVB-ASI signals.
NOTE
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km km

range

launched power

power

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio

G.959.1-compliant

range

overload
NOTE
GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON, STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, FE signals.

wavelengths
Item Unit Value

km

power

power

width

suppression ratio

Receiver type - APD

range

Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1.5 Gbit/s Multirate (Video

eSFP)-20 km
Service rate Gbit/s ≤1.5
Operating frequency range nm 1290 to 1330
Minimum mean launched power dBm -7
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 3
Table 9-103 Specifications of CWDM-side pluggable optical module using fixed wavelengths
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 2.67 Gbit/s Multirate

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km

power

power

Item Unit Value

(eSFP CWDM)-80 km
Central wavelength nm ±6.5

deviation

width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1 - compliant
Receiver type - APD
Item Unit Value

(eSFP DWDM)-120 km

power

power
Central frequency deviation nm ±12.5

width

Item Unit Value

(eSFP DWDM)-120 km

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant (5% margin

are required for the eye pattern
of STM-16 services and
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm N/A
Table 9-105 Specifications of DWDM-side pluggable optical for SDH services

Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type

format

source type


wavelength
range
mean
launched
power

Item Unit Value
Optical I-16-2 km S-16.1-15 L-16.1-40 L-16.2-80

Module km km km
Type

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 8.2 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction
ratio
-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
TN11TOM: 1.4 kg (3.1 lb.)

TN52TOM: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11TOM 55 60
TN52TOM 81 89.1
9.4.9 THA Specifications


Optical Module
TN54TH N/A S-16.1-15 km

A 1000 BASE-LX-10 km (I-1310-LC)
NOTE

NOTE
S-16.1 module can be used to access OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FC100, GE, STM-4, OC-12, ESCON,
STM-1, OC-3, DVB-ASI, and FE signals.
Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type S-16.1

-15 km

power

Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type S-16.1

-15 km

power

width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1–compliant
Receiver type - PIN
NOTE
1000 BASE-LX-10 km module can be used to access GE, FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE and DVB-ASI
signals. The specifications listed below apply to GE signals. The actual values might be slightly different from
these specifications when the accessed signals are FC100, STM-4, ESCON, STM-1, FE, or DVB-ASI signals.

Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1000 BASE-LX-10 km

(I-1310-LC)
Optical source type - SLM
Maximum mean launched dBm -3

power

Item Unit Value
Optical Module Type 1000 BASE-LX-10 km

(I-1310-LC)
Minimum mean launched dBm -9.5

power
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3z –compliant
Receiver type - PIN
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN54THA 35 40
9.4.10 TQX Specifications


Optical Module
TN11TQ N/A 10 Gbit/s Multirate-10 km



Optical Module



NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module, 10 Gbit/s multirate 40 km module, and 10 Gbit/s multirate 80 km module
can be used to access OC-192, STM-64, 10GE WAN, FC1200, and OTU2/OTU2e signals.
The 10 Gbit/s multirate 10 km module can be used to access FC800 signals.
Item Unit Value


format

source type

Item Unit Value



wavelength
range

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -6 -4.7 0 -7.3

mean
launched
power
extinction
ratio

-20 dB
spectral
width
side mode
suppression
ratio

mask

type

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -11 -14 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(multirate )

Item Unit Value

Receiver dBm -14.4 -15.8 -24 -7.5

sensitivity
(10GE
LAN)

receiver
overload
(10GE
LAN)
receiver
overload
(STM-64)
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -12

reflectance
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
TN52TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN53TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
TN55TQX: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN52TQX 91.5 100
TN53TQX 45 50
TN55TQX 45 50
9.4.11 TSXL Specifications


Board Client-Side Fixed Optical Client-Side Pluggable Optical

Module Module
TN11TS 40G Transponder N/A

XL/
TN53TS
XL
NOTE
NOTE
Client-Side Fixed Optical Module
Table 9-109 Specifications of client-side fixed optical module

Item Unit Value
Receiver type - PIN

TN11TSXL:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN53TSXL:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11TSXL 90.2 96
TN53TSXL 75 83
9.5 PID Unit Specifications
9.5.1 ENQ2 Specifications

The specifications include the dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Consumption Maximum Power
at 25°C (77°F) (W) Consumption at 55°C (131°F)
(W)
ENQ2 40 44
9.5.2 NPO2 Specifications

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.

Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable

Optical Module
TN54NP 200 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN N/A

O2
TN55NP 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km) N/A

O2 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km)
NOTE
NOTE
Table 9-110 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical 800 ps/nm-PID- 1500 ps/nm-PID- 200 ps/nm-PID-

Module Type NRZ-PIN (40 km) NRZ-PIN (80 km) NRZ-PIN

format
Central THz 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05 192.10 to 196.05

frequency
Maximum dBm +2 +2 +2
mean launched
power (single
wavelength)
Minimum dBm -4 -6.5 -6.5

mean launched
power (single
wavelength)
Minimum dB 6 6 6.5
extinction ratio
Central GHz ±5 ±5 ±5
frequency
deviation

Item Unit Value
Optical 800 ps/nm-PID- 1500 ps/nm-PID- 200 ps/nm-PID-

Module Type NRZ-PIN (40 km) NRZ-PIN (80 km) NRZ-PIN
Maximum -20 nm 0.8 0.8 0.8

dB spectral
width
mode
suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/nm 800 1500 200

tolerance

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm TN55NPO2S01 to -12 -12

sensitivity TN55NPO2S04:
(FEC enabled) -13.5
EOL TN55NPO2S06,
TN55NPO2S08:
-15
TN55NPO2S0A,
TN55NPO2S0B:
-15
Minimum dBm 3 3 0
receiver
overload

reflectance
TN54NPO2:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN55NPO2:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

TN54PQ2:
l Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69
in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN54NPO2 134 147
TN55NPO2 143 157.3
TN54PQ2 1.1 1.2
9.5.3 NPO2E Specifications

The specifications include the optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power
consumption.
Board WDM-Side Fixed Optical Module WDM-Side Pluggable

Optical Module
TN55NP 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (40 km) N/A

O2E 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-PIN (80 km)
NOTE
Specifications of Optical Modules on the DWDM Side
Table 9-111 Specifications of the PID optical module on the DWDM side
Item Unit Value
Optical Module 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ- 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-

Type PIN (40 km) PIN (80 km)
Transmitter parameter

Item Unit Value
Optical Module 800 ps/nm-PID-NRZ- 1500 ps/nm-PID-NRZ-

Type PIN (40 km) PIN (80 km)
Maximum mean dBm +2 +2

launched power
(single wavelength)

launched power
(single wavelength)
ratio
Central frequency GHz ±5 ±5

deviation

spectral width

suppression ratio
Receiver parameter specifications

at point R

wavelength range

(FEC enabled) EOL

overload
Maximum dB -27 -27

reflectance
Table 9-112 Specifications of the red and blue band filters on the TN55NPO2E board
Item Unit Value
Working wavelength in the C nm 1528 to 1561

band
Working wavelength in the blue THz 196.0 to 193.8

band (T01/R01)

Item Unit Value
Working wavelength in the red THz 193.6 to 191.4

band (T02/R02)
Demultiplexing loss (RI->T01, dB ≤1

RI->T02)
Multiplexing loss (R01–>T0, dB ≤1

R02->T0)
Isolation between red and blue dB ≥ 13

bands
TN55NPO2E:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
TN54PQ2:
l Dimensions of front panel: 24.5 mm (W) x 68 mm (D) x 57 mm (H) (0.96 in. (W) x 2.69
in. (D) x 2.24 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN55NPO2E 143 157.3
TN54PQ2 1.1 1.2
9.6 Cross-connect Unit Specifications
9.6.1 TN16XCH Specifications

Specifications include dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
l Dimensions of the front panel: 37.6 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 350.3 mm (H) (1.5 in. (W)
x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8 in. (H))

Power Consumption
Board Power Power Typical Power Maximum
Consumption Consumption Consumption Power
at Warm at Warm at 25°C (77°F) Consumption
Backup (25°C, Backup (55°C, (W) at 55°C (131°F)
77°F) (W) 131°F) (W) (W)
TN16XCH 40 48 73–1.4 x (16–n) 88.8–1.4 x (16–

n)
9.7 Optical Multiplexer Unit and Demultiplexer Unit

Specifications
9.7.1 D40 Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight and power consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 9-113 lists the optical specifications of the D40.
Table 9-113 Optical specifications of the D40

Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5
Reflectance dB < -40
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 25
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5
Temperature characteristics nm/°C < 0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤3
-1 dB bandwidth nm ≥ 0.2
-20 dB bandwidth nm < 1.4

l Dimensions of front panel:
– TN11D40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
– TN12D40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11D40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
– TN12D40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11D40 10.0 13.0
TN12D40 10.0 13.0
9.7.2 FIU Specifications

Table 9-114 Optical specifications of the FIU board
Interface Item Unit Value
- Operating wavelength nm 1529-1561

range

range of optical
supervisory channel
- Optical return loss dB > 40
IN-TM Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.5

RM-OUT
IN-TC Insertion loss dB ≤1

RC-OUT
IN-TM Isolation dB > 40
IN-TC Isolation dB > 12

- Polarization dependent dB < 0.2

loss
TN12/TN13FIU:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11FIU/TN12FIU 4.2 4.6
TN13FIU/TN21FIU 0.2 0.3
9.7.3 ITL Specifications

Table 9-115 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL01
Item Unit Value
Input channel spacinga - GHz 100
Output channel spacinga - GHz 50
Insertion loss RE-OUT dB < 4.5

RO-OUT
IN-TE dB < 2.5

IN-TO
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB <1
Isolation IN-TE dB > 25

IN-TO
Maximum reflectance - dB -40

Item Unit Value
Directivity - dB > 45
PMD - ps < 0.5
Polarization dependent loss - dB < 0.5
Input optical power range - dBm ≤ 26
a: The input and output ends are defined based on the multiplexing process of the interleaver.
Table 9-116 Optical specifications of the TN11ITL04
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss RE-OUT dB <3

RO-OUT
IN-TE dB <3
IN-TO

IN-TO
PMD - ps < 0.5
Table 9-117 Optical specifications of the TN12ITL
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss RE-OUT dB < 4.5

RO-OUT

Item Unit Value
IN-TE dB < 3.5

IN-TO

IN-TO
PMD - ps < 0.5
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Typical power Maximum power
consumption at 25°C (77° consumption at 55°C
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11ITL 0.2 0.3
TN12ITL 10.0 11.5
9.7.4 M40 Specifications

Table 9-118 lists the optical specifications of the M40 board.

Table 9-118 Optical specifications of the M40 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB ≤ 6.5
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤ 0.5
Temperature characteristics nm/°C ≤ 0.002
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤3
– TN11M40: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
– TN12M40: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11M40: 2.2 kg ( 4.8 lb.)
– TN12M40: 2.0 kg ( 4.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11M40 10.0 13.0
TN12M40 10.0 13.0
9.7.5 M40V Specifications

Table 9-119 lists the optical specifications of the M40V board.

Table 9-119 Optical specifications of the M40V board

Item Unit Value
Insertion loss dB ≤ 8a
Attenuation range dB 0-15
Loss accuracy dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)
≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB ≤ 3a

NOTE
a: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
– TN11M40V: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
– TN12M40V: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
– TN12M40V: 2.3 kg (5.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11M40V 20.0 25.0
TN12M40V 16.0 26.0

9.7.6 SFIU Specifications

Table 9-120 Optical specifications of the SFIU board

Interface Item Uni Value
t
- Operating wavelength range (C band) nm 1528-1561
- Operating wavelength range of optical nm 1480 to 1520

supervisory channel
LINE1- Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.0

SYS1
LINE2-
SYS2
LINE1- Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.5

OSC1
LINE1-
OSC2
LINE1- Isolation dB ≥ 65
OSC1 @λc
LINE1- Isolation dB ≥ 40
OSC2 @λc
OSC1- Directivity dB ≥ 45
SYS1
SYS1-
OSC1
OSC1- Directivity dB ≥ 55
OSC2
OSC2-
OSC1
- Optical return loss dB > 40
- Polarization C band dB < 0.1

dependent loss
OSC channel dB < 0.15

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F)(W) (131°F)(W)
TN11SFIU 0.2 0.3
9.8 Fixed Optical Add and Drop Multiplexer Unit

Specifications
9.8.1 CMR2 Specifications

Table 9-121 lists the optical specifications of the CMR2 board.
Table 9-121 Optical specifications of the CMR2 board
Correspondin Item Unit Value

g interfaces

range
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

IN-D2
Drop channel insertion dB ≤ 1.5
loss
Adjacent channel dB > 25

isolation
Non-adjacent channel dB > 35

isolation
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion dB ≤ 1.5
loss


g interfaces
IN-MO Insertion loss dB ≤ 1.0

MI-OUT
Isolation dB ≥ 13
- Maximum reflectance dB -40
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1271 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR2 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1271 nm OTU board and line board.
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelength

The CMR2 adds/drops and multiplexes two random channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping signals.
The mechanical specifications of TN11CMR2 are as follows.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
CMR2 0.2 0.3
9.8.2 CMR4 Specifications

Table 9-122 lists the optical specifications of the CMR4 board.
Table 9-122 Optical specifications of the CMR4 board

g interfaces
- Operating wavelength nm 1271-1611 (1371 nm excluded)

range


g interfaces
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20
IN-D1 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

IN-D2
Drop channel insertion dB ≤2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
isolation

isolation
A1-OUT 0.5 dB spectral width nm ≥ ±6.5

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion dB ≤2
A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT

MI-OUT
Isolation dB ≥ 13
NOTE
The equipment can transmit the 1291 nm wavelength by connecting the CMR4 board to corresponding
third-party equipment, though the equipment does not provide the 1291 nm OTU board and line board.
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The CMR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are four wavelength groups.
Table 9-123 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths on the CMR4 board

Group Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
1 1291 1311 1331 1351
2 1391 1411 1431 1451
3 1471 1491 1591 1611
4 1511 1531 1551 1571

Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
CMR4 0.2 0.3
9.8.3 MR2 Specifications

Table 9-124 lists the optical specifications of the MR2 board.
Table 9-124 Optical specifications of the MR2 board

g interfaces

range
- Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100
IN-D1 -1dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

IN-D2
loss

isolation

isolation
A1-OUT -1dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion dB ≤ 1.5
loss

MI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13
- Polarization dependence dB < 0.2

loss


The MR2 adds/drops and multiplexes random two channels of signals to/from the multiplexed
signals. There are no rules for adding/dropping wavelengths.
The mechanical specifications of TN11MR2 are as follows:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MR2 0.2 0.3
9.8.4 MR4 Specifications

Table 9-125 lists the optical specifications of the MR4 board.
Table 9-125 Optical specifications of the MR4 board

range
IN-D1 -1dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
isolation

isolation
A1-OUT -1dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

A2-OUT
A3-OUT


A4-OUT Add channel insertion dB ≤ 2.2
loss

MI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13
Rules for Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

The MR4 board adds/drops and multiplexes four consecutive channels of signals to/from the
multiplexed signals. There are ten groups of wavelengths.
Table 9-126 Rules for adding/dropping wavelengths of the MR4 board

G C A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
r h
o ar Wa Wav Fre W Wa Fre W Wa Fre W Wave Freq
u a vel elen que a vele qu av vele que av lengt uenc
p ct en gth ncy v ngt enc el ngt ncy el h y
er gth (nm) (T el h y en h (TH en (nm) (THz
is No Hz) e (nm (T gt (nm z) gt )
ti . n ) Hz h ) h
c gt ) N N
C h o. o.
o N
d o.
e
1 9 80 1560 192. 7 155 192 76 155 192. 74 1558. 192.4

2 .61 10 8 9.79 .20 8.98 30 17 0
1
0
9
2
4
0
2 9 72 1557 192. 7 155 192 68 155 192. 66 1554. 192.8

2 .36 50 0 6.55 .60 5.75 70 94 0
5
0
9
2
8
0

G C A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4

r h
ti . n ) Hz h ) h
c gt ) N N
C h o. o.
o N
d o.
e
3 9 64 1554 192. 6 155 193 60 155 193. 58 1551. 193.2

2 .13 90 2 3.33 .00 2.52 10 72 0
9
0
9
3
2
0
4 9 56 1550 193. 5 155 193 52 154 193. 50 1548. 193.6

3 .92 30 4 0.12 .40 9.32 50 51 0
3
0
9
3
6
0
5 9 48 1547 193. 4 154 193 44 154 193. 42 1545. 194.0

3 .72 70 6 6.92 .80 6.12 90 32 0
7
0
9
4
0
0
6 9 40 1544 194. 3 154 194 36 154 194. 34 1542. 194.4

4 .53 10 8 3.73 .20 2.94 30 14 0
1
0
9
4
4
0

G C A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4

r h
ti . n ) Hz h ) h
c gt ) N N
C h o. o.
o N
d o.
e
7 9 32 1541 194. 3 154 194 28 153 194. 26 1538. 194.8

4 .35 50 0 0.56 .60 9.77 70 98 0
5
0
9
4
8
0
8 9 24 1538 194. 2 153 195 20 153 195. 18 1535. 195.2

4 .19 90 2 7.40 .00 6.61 10 82 0
9
0
9
5
2
0
9 9 16 1535 195. 1 153 195 12 153 195. 10 1532. 195.6

5 .04 30 4 4.25 .40 3.47 50 68 0
3
0
9
5
6
0
1 9 8 1531 195. 6 153 195 4 153 195. 2 1529. 196.0

0 5 .90 70 1.12 .80 0.33 90 55 0
7
0
9
6
0
0
Mechanical specifications of TN11MR4 board are as follows:

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MR4 0.2 0.3
9.8.5 MR8V Specifications

Table 9-127 lists the optical specifications of the MR8V board.
Table 9-127 Optical specifications of the MR8V board

g interfaces

range
IN-D1 –1 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

IN-D2
Drop channel insertion dB ≤4
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
IN-D5
isolation
IN-D6
IN-D7 Non-adjacent channel dB > 35
isolation
IN-D8
A1-OUT –1 dB spectral width nm ≥ 0.2

A2-OUT
Add channel insertion dB ≤6
A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation ≤ 10 dB)
A7-OUT 1.5 (attenuation ≤ 15 dB)
A8-OUT 1.8 (attenuation >15 dB)
VI-VO


g interfaces
IN-MRO Insertion loss dB ≤ 3.5

MRI-OUT
Isolation dB > 13

The MR8V adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals to/from the multiplexed signals.
There are five groups of wavelengths.
Table 9-128 Rules for adding/dropping wavelength of the MR8V

Group 1 2 3 4 5
A1/D1 Waveleng 80 64 48 32 16
th No.
Waveleng 1560.61 1554.13 1547.72 1541.35 1535.04

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.10 192.90 193.70 194.50 195.30

y (THz)
A2/D2 Waveleng 78 62 46 30 14
th No.
Waveleng 1559.79 1553.33 1546.92 1540.56 1534.25

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.20 193.00 193.80 194.60 195.40

y (THz)
A3/D3 Waveleng 76 60 44 28 12
th No.
Waveleng 1558.98 1552.52 1546.12 1539.77 1533.47

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.30 193.10 193.90 194.70 195.50

y (THz)
A4/D4 Waveleng 74 58 42 26 10
th No.
Waveleng 1558.17 1551.72 1545.32 1538.98 1532.68

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.40 193.20 194.00 194.80 195.60

y (THz)

Group 1 2 3 4 5
A5/D5 Waveleng 72 56 40 24 8
th No.
Waveleng 1557.36 1550.92 1544.53 1538.19 1531.90

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.50 193.30 194.10 194.90 195.70

y (THz)
A6/D6 Waveleng 70 54 38 22 6
th No.
Waveleng 1556.55 1550.12 1543.73 1537.40 1531.12

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.60 193.40 194.20 195.00 195.80

y (THz)
A7/D7 Waveleng 68 52 36 20 4
th No.
Waveleng 1555.75 1549.32 1542.94 1536.61 1530.33

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.70 193.50 194.30 195.10 195.90

y (THz)
A8/D8 Waveleng 66 50 34 18 2
th No.
Waveleng 1554.94 1548.51 1542.14 1535.82 1529.55

th (nm)
Frequenc 192.80 193.60 194.40 195.20 196.00

y (THz)
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MR8V 7.7 8.6

9.9 Reconfigurable Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing

Unit Specifications
9.9.1 RDU9 Specifications

Table 9-129 Optical specifications of the RDU9 board
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss IN-Drop (DM1-DM8) dB ≤ 12.5
ROA-Drop (DM1-DM8) dB ≤ 11.5
IN-EXPO dB ≤ 12.5
IN-TOA dB ≤1
Consistency of the insertion loss of each dB ≤ 1.2

channel
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11RDU9 6.0 6.6
9.9.2 RMU9 Specifications


Table 9-130 lists the optical specifications of the RMU9 board.
Table 9-130 Optical specifications of the RMU9 board

Item Unit Value
Insertion loss EXPI-OUT dB ≤ 8.5
AMxa-TOA dB ≤ 12.5b
ROA-OUT dB ≤ 1.5
Attenuation precision dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)

< 1.5 (> 10 dB)
VOA attenuation under channel blocking dB > 42

functionc

NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
b: This value can be reached when the attenuation of the VOA is set to 0 dB.
c: Only the TN11RMU902 supports the channel blocking function.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11RMU901 7.7 8.6
TN11RMU902 8.2 9
9.9.3 WSD9 Specifications


Table 9-131 Optical specifications of the WSD9 board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN12WSD9 TN13WSD9
Optical channels - 40 80
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100 50
Insertion loss IN-DMxa dB ≤ 8b ≤ 8b

IN-EXPO
Maximum channel insertion loss dB 1.5 1.5

difference
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16
Port isolation dB > 25 > 25
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25 > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 30 > 30
Extinction ratio dB ≥ 35 ≥ 35
Reconfiguration time s ≤3 ≤3
Directivity dB 35 35
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤1 ≤1
Attenuation range of each of dB 0-15 0-15

dropping wavelengths
Attenuation precision of each of dB ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB) ≤ 1 (0 to 10 dB)

dropping wavelengths ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE
a: DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.
Dimensions of front panel:
l TN12WSD9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
l TN13WSD9: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)

Weight:
l TN12WSD9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
l TN13WSD9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11WSD9 17.0 18.7
TN12WSD9 25.4 28.5
TN13WSD9 25.4 28.5
9.9.4 WSM9 Specifications

Table 9-132 Optical specifications of the WSM9 board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9
Insertion AMxa-OUT dB ≤ 8b ≤ 8b
loss
EXPI-OUT
Maximum channel insertion dB 1.5 1.5

loss difference
-1 dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16
Adjacent channel isolation dB > 25 > 25
Non-adjacent channel isolation dB > 30 > 30

Item Unit Value
Type - TN12WSM9 TN13WSM9

adding wavelengths

adding wavelengths ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (>10 dB)
NOTE
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface.
l TN12WSM9: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 2.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
l TN13WSM9: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H)
Weight:
l TN12WSM9: 2.7 kg (5.94 lb.)
l TN13WSM9: 2.9 kg (6.38 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11WSM9 17.0 18.7
TN12WSM9 25.4 28.5
TN13WSM9 25.4 28.5
9.9.5 WSMD4 Specifications


Table 9-133 Optical specifications of the WSMD4 board

Item Unit Value
TN11WSMD4 TN12WSMD4
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.32 > 0.16
Insertion loss AMxa-OUT dB ≤ 8b ≤ 8b
IN-DMxa ≤8 ≤8
Maximum channel insertion dB 1.5 1.5

loss difference

adding wavelength

adding wavelength ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB) ≤ 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Dimension - 4 4
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM4 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM4 interface.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11WSMD4: 3.2 kg (7.1 lb.)
– TN12WSMD4: 2.6 kg (5.7 lb.)

Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11WSMD4 17 18.7
TN12WSMD4 12 15
9.9.6 WSMD9 Specifications

Table 9-134 Optical specifications of the TN11WSMD9 board

Item Unit Value
Optical channels - 80
Insertion loss AMxa/EXPI-OUT dB ≤ 8b
IN-DMxa/EXPO ≤ 12
Maximum channel insertion loss difference dB 1.5
-1dB spectral width nm > 0.16
Port isolation dB > 25
Extinction ratio dB ≥ 35
Reconfiguration time s ≤3
Directivity dB 35
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤1
Attenuation range of each of adding dB 0 to 15

wavelength
Attenuation precision of each of adding dB < 1 (0 to 10 dB)

wavelength < 1.5 (> 10 dB)
Dimension - 9

Item Unit Value
a: AMx represents the AM1-AM8 interface. DMx represents the DM1-DM8 interface.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11WSMD9 25 30
9.10 Optical Amplifier Unit Specifications
9.10.1 CRPC Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, weight and power consumption.
Table 9-135 Optical specifications of the CRPC board
Item Un Value
it
CRPC01 CRPC03
Pump wavelength range nm 1400-1500 1400-1500
Maximum pump power dB 29 29.5

m
Channel gain on G.652 fiber dB > 10 > 10
Channel gain on G.653 fiber dB N/A > 16
Channel gain on LEAF fiber dB > 12 N/A
Channel gain on TWRS fiber dB > 13 N/A

Item Un Value
it
CRPC01 CRPC03
Effective noise figure on G.652 dB ≤0 N/A

fiber
Effective noise figure on G.653 dB N/A N/A

fiber
Effective noise figure on LEAF dB ≤ -1 N/A

fiber
Effective noise figure on dB ≤ -1.5 N/A

TWRS fiber
Polarization dependence loss dB ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5
Output connector type - LSH/APC, LC/PC LSH/APC, LC/PC
l Dimensions of board: 345.0 mm (H) x 218.5 mm (D) x 76.0 mm (W) or 13.8 in. (H) x 8.7
in. (D) x 3.0 in. (W)
Weight
l CRPC01: 4.0 kg (8.8 1b.)
l CRPC03: 4.2 kg (9.2 1b.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
CRPC01 110.0 121.0
CRPC03 70.0 77.0
9.10.2 DAS1 Specifications


Table 9-136 Optical specifications of the TN11DAS1 board

Item Uni Value
t
Specifica Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561 1529-1561

tions of
OA Nominal gain dB 20 26 31
Nominal input power range dB -32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11

m
Input power range 40 dB -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27

per channel channels m
80 dB -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30

channels m
Nominal single- 40 dB -16 -22 -27

wavelength input channels m
optical power
80 dB -19 -25 -30
channels m
Nominal single- 40 dB 4 4 4
wavelength input channels m
optical power
80 dB 1 1 1
channels m
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤ 8.5 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 5.5
Gain response time on adding/ ms < 10 < 10 < 10

dropping of channels
Channel gain dB 20 to 31
Gain flatness dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0
Multi-channel gain slope dB/ ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0

dB
Input reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 < -40
Pump leakage at input dB < -30 < -30 < -30

m
Maximum reflectance tolerance dB -27 -27 -27

at input
Maximum reflectance tolerance dB -27 -27 -27

at output

Item Uni Value

t
Maximum total output optical dB 20 20 20

power m
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5 ≤ 0.5
Input VOA inherent insertion dB ≤ 1.5

loss
Input VOA dynamic attenuation dB 20

range
Input VOA adjustment accuracy dB 1
Specifica Operating wavelength range of nm 1480 to 1520

tions of optical supervisory channel
demultipl
exer and Optical return loss dB > 40
multiplex Insert loss of optical LIN-TM dB ≤ 1.5
er supervisory
channel RM-
LOUT
Insert loss of C-band dB ≤1
Polarization dependent loss dB < 0.2
Specifica Operating wavelength range nm 1504.5 to 1517.5

tions of 1484.5 to 1497.5
OSC
optical Signal rate Mbi 155.52
module t/s
Launched optical power dB 0.5 to 5

m
Receiver sensitivity dB ≤ -41

m
Receiver overload dB -10

m
a: The gain can be adjusted continuously. The noise figure varies with the gain. The previous table lists the noise
figure when the noise figure uses the typical value.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Power Consumption
F) (131°F)
TN11DAS1 22 28.6
9.10.3 HBA Specifications

Table 9-137 Optical specifications of the HBA board
Item Unit Value
Type - TN11HBA
Channel allocation nm 1529 - 1561
Nominal input power range dBm -25 to -3
Typical input power of a single dBm 80-channel system: -22

wavelength 40-channel system: -19
10-channel system: -13
Noise figure (NF) dB <8
Input reflectance dB < -45
Output reflectance dB < -45
Maximum total output power dBm 26
Gain response time on adding/dropping of ms < 10

channels
Channel gain dB 29±1
Gain flatness dB ≤ 2.5
Polarization dependent loss dB < 0.5
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
HBA 47 75
9.10.4 OAU1 Specifications

Table 9-138 Optical specifications of the TN12OAU100 board
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529-1561 1529-1561 1529-1561
Nominal gain dB 16 22 25.5
Nominal input power range dBm -20 to 2 -26 to -4 -32 to -7.5
Input power range per 40 channels dBm -32 to -14 -32 to -20 -32 to -23.5
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -17 -32 to -23 -32 to -26.5
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm -14 -20 -23.5

wavelength input
optical power 80 channels dBm -17 -23 -26.5
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm 2 2 2

wavelength output
optical power 80 channels dBm -1 -1 -1
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤8 ≤ 5.5 ≤ 5.5

Channel gain dB 16 to 25.5
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30 < -30 < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at dB -27 -27 -27

input

Item Unit Value

output
Maximum total output optical power dBm 18 18 18
VI-VO Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
Adjustment accuracy dB 1
Table 9-139 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU101/TN12OAU101/TN13OAU101 board

Item Unit Value
Nominal gain dB 20 26 31
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -6 -32 to -11
Input power range per 40 channels dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -22 -32 to -27
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm -16 -22 -27

wavelength input

wavelength output
optical power 80 channels dBm 1 1 1

(TN11OAU101,
TN12OAU101)
≤ 7.5
(TN13OAU101)


Item Unit Value
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0

input

output
VI-VOb Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
Adjustment accuracyb dB 1
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1 and TN13OAU1.
Table 9-140 Optical specifications of the TN11OAU102/TN12OAU102 board

Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to -3 -32 to -9 -32 to -14
Input power range per 40 channels dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -25 -32 to -30
channel
80 channels dBm -32 to -22 -32 to -28 -32
Nominal single- 40 channels dBm -19 -25 -30

wavelength input

Item Unit Value

wavelength output
Noise figure (NF)a dB ≤ 7.5 ≤5.5 ≤5.5

Gain flatness dB ≤2 ≤2 ≤2
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤2 ≤2 ≤2

input

output

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
b: The items are supported on the TN12OAU1.

Item Unit Value

Item Unit Value
Input power range 40 dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -25 -32

per channel channels
80 dBm -32 to -23 -32 to -28 -32

channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm -20 -25 -32

wavelength input channels
optical power
80 dBm -23 -28 -32
channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm 4 4 4

wavelength output channels
optical power
80 dBm 1 1 1
channels

(TN11OAU103,
TN12OAU103)
≤ 6.5
(TN13OAU103)


input

output
Maximum total output optical dBm 20 20 20

power

insertion
loss

Item Unit Value
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range

Item Unit Value
Nominal input power range dBm -32 to 0 -32 to -7 -32 to -11
Input power range 40 dBm -32 to -16 -32 to -23 -32 to -27
per channel channels
80 dBm -32 to -19 -32 to -26 -32 to -30

channels

wavelength input channels
optical power
80 dBm -19 -26 -30
channels

wavelength output channels
optical power
80 dBm 4 4 4
channels
Noise figure (NF)a dB < 8.5 <6 <6

Output reflectance dB < -40 < -40 <-40

Item Unit Value

input

output

power

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation
range
– TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 50.8 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (2.0 in. (W) x
8.7 in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
– TN13OAU1: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN11OAU1/TN12OAU1: 1.8 kg (4.0 lb.)
– TN13OAU1: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (131°F)
TN11OAU101 18.0 24.0
TN11OAU102 14.0 18.0
TN11OAU103 18.0 24.0


F) (131°F)
TN11OAU105 22.0 29.0
TN12OAU100 11.0 14.0
TN12OAU101 12.0 15.0
TN12OAU102 10.0 13.0
TN12OAU103 12.0 15.0
TN12OAU105 15.0 21.0
TN13OAU101 12.0 15.0
TN13OAU103 12.0 15.0
TN13OAU105 15.0 21.0
9.10.5 OBU1 Specifications

Table 9-143 Optical specifications of the OBU101/OBU103/OBU104 board

Item Unit Value
TN11OBU10 TN11OBU10 TN11OBU10

1/ 3/ 4/
1 3 4
Input power 40 dBm -32 to -20 -32 to -19 -32 to -17

range per channels
channel
80 -32 to -23 -32 to -22 -32 to -20
channels

wavelength channels
input optical
power 80 -23 -22 -20
channels

wavelength channels

Item Unit Value

1/ 3/ 4/
1 3 4
output optical 80 -3 1 -3
power channels
Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 5.5 ≤ 6.0 ≤ 5.5

Channel gain dB 20±1.5 23±1.5 17±1.5
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

tolerance at input
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27 -27

tolerance at output

power
Multi-channel gain slope dB ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0 ≤ 2.0
VI-VOa Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuatio
n range
Adjustment accuracya dB 1
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU1.

Table 9-144 Optical specifications of the OBU1P1 board

Item Unit Value
Total input power range at dBm -30 to 7

the VI optical port
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30

tolerance at input

tolerance at output
Maximum total output dBm 9

optical power
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
l TN11OBU1: 1.3 kg (2.9 lb.)
l TN12OBU1: 1.1 kg (2.4 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11OBU101 11.0 13.0
TN11OBU103 13.0 15.0
TN11OBU104 12.0 14.0
TN12OBU101 10.0 11.0
TN12OBU103 11.0 12.0
TN12OBU104 10.0 12.0
TN12OBU1P1 10.0 11.0

9.10.6 OBU2 Specifications

Table 9-145 Optical specifications of the OBU2 board

Item Unit Value
OBU205
Nominal input power range dBm -24 to 0
Input power range per 40 dBm -24 to -16

channel Channels
80 -24 to -19
Channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm -16

wavelength input Channels
optical power
80 -19
Channels
Nominal single- 40 dBm 7

wavelength output Channels
optical power
80 4
Channels
Noise figure (NF) dB ≤ 7.0
Nominal gain dB 23
Gain response time on adding/ ms < 10

Channel gain dB 23±1.5
Gain flatness dB ≤ 2.0
Pump leakage at input dBm < -30
Maximum reflectance tolerance at dB -27

input
Maximum reflectance tolerance at dB -27

output

Item Unit Value
OBU205
Maximum total output optical dBm 23

power
Multi-channel gain slope dB/dB ≤ 2.0
VI-VOa Inherent dB ≤ 1.5

insertion
loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuatio
n range
Adjustment accuracya dB 1
a: The items are supported on the TN12OBU2.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight:
l TN11OBU2: 1.9 kg (4.2 lb.)
l TN12OBU2: 1.6 kg (3.5 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11OBU205 17 24
TN12OBU205 14 19
9.11 System Control, Supervision and Communication

Board Specifications
9.11.1 SCC Specifications


l TN11SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 264.6 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 10.4
in. (H)
l TN16SCC: 54.5 mm (W) x 220 mm x (D) 350.3 mm (H) or 2.1 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 13.8
in. (H)
in. (H)
l TN22SCC: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) ox 118.9 mm (H) or 1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.7
in. (H)
in. (H)
in. (H)
l TNK2SCC: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 110.0 mm (H) or 3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 4.4
in. (H)
Weight:
l TN11SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)

l TN16SCC: 1.3 kg (2.8 lb.)
l TN21SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
l TN22SCC: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
l TN51SCC: 1.2 kg (2.6 lb.)
l TN52SCC: 1.0 kg (2.2 lb.)
l TNK2SCC: 0.9 kg (2.0 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN16SCC 32.0 35.0
TN51SCC 18.0 20.0
TN52SCC 23.0 25.1
TNK2SCC 26.7 29.3
9.11.2 AUX Specifications


l Dimensions of the front panel:
– TN51AUX: 25.4 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 107.5 mm (H) (1.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x
4.2 in. (H))
– TN16AUX: 76.2 mm (W) x 220 mm (D) x 80 mm (H) (3.0 in. (W) x 8.7 in. (D) x 3.1
in. (H))
4.2 in. (H))
4.7 in. (H))
4.7 in. (H))
l Weight:
– TN51AUX: 0.45 kg (0.99 lb.)
– TN16AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
– TN11AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
– TN21AUX: 0.6 kg (1.32 lb.)
– TN22AUX: 0.5 kg (1.1 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN51AUX 17.5 19.0
TN16AUX 16.5 19.2
TN11AUX 12.0 17.0
TN21AUX 11.7 13.0
TN22AUX 15.0 17.0
9.12 Optical Supervisory Channel Unit Specifications
9.12.1 HSC1 Specifications

NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the board
and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of the board
are reserved on the U2000 as a precaution.

Table 9-146 lists the optical specifications of the HSC1 board.
Table 9-146 Optical specifications of the HSC1 board
Item Unit Value
Signal rate Mbit/s 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm 5 to 10
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -48
Receiver overload dBm -3
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
HSC1 8.0 8.8
9.12.2 SC1 Specifications

Table 9-147 lists the optical specifications of the SC1 board.
Table 9-147 Optical specifications of the SC1 board
Item Unit Value
Signal ratea Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Signal coding - CMI

Item Unit Value
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -46 ≤ -48
a: The SC1 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
SC1 11.0 14.9
9.12.3 ST2 Specifications

Table 9-148 lists the optical specifications of the ST2.
Table 9-148 Optical specifications of the ST2 board
Item Unit Value
Signal rate Mbit/s 155.52
Operating wavelength range nm 1504.5 to 1517.5

1484.5 to 1497.5
Launched optical power dBm 0.5 to 5
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -41

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight: 0.95 kg (2.09 lb.)
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
ST2 17.5 19.5
9.12.4 SC2 Specifications

Table 9-149 lists the optical specifications of the SC2.
Table 9-149 Optical specifications of the SC2 board

Item Unit Value
Signal ratea Mbit/s 16.896 4.096
Signal coding - CMI
Launched optical power dBm -4 to 0
Receiver sensitivity dBm ≤ -46 ≤ -48
a: The SC2 board at the receive end can automatically determines the signal rate of the OSC
channel based on the OSC board configured at the transmit end. By default, the signal rate of
the OSC channel is 16 Mbit/s.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
SC2 13.5 14.5
9.13 Optical Protection Unit Specifications
9.13.1 DCP Specifications

Table 9-150 Optical specifications of the DCP on the OptiX OSN 8800
TN11DCPa TN12DCPb
TI1-TO11 Insertion loss Single-mode dB - ≤4

TI1-TO12 at the
transmit end multimode dB ≤4.5 -
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
RI11-RO1 Insertion loss Single-mode dB - ≤1.5

RI12-RO1 at the receive
end Multi-mode dB ≤2 -
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Range of the input optical Single-mode dBm- - -35 to 7

power
Multi-mode dBm -35 to 0 -
Operating wavelength range Single-mode nm - 1270 to

1350,
1528 to 1567
Multi-mode nm 830 to 870 -
Switching threshold of optical power dB 5 5

difference
Range of the alarm threshold for the optical dB 3 to 8 3 to 8

power difference
a: TN11DCP has no single-mode optical module.

b: TN12DCP has no multi-mode optical module.

Table 9-151 Optical specifications of the DCP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN
3800
TN11DCP TN12DCPa
TI1-TO11 Insertion loss Single-mode dB ≤4 ≤4

TI1-TO12 at the
transmit end Multi-mode dB ≤4.5 -
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
RI11-RO1 Insertion loss Single-mode dB ≤1.5 ≤1.5

RI12-RO1 at the receive
end Multi-mode dB ≤2 -
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Range of the input optical Single-mode dBm -35 to 7 -35 to 7

power
Multi-mode dBm -35 to 0 -
Operating wavelength range Single-mode nm 1270 to 1270 to

1350, 1350,
1528 to 1567 1528 to 1567
Multi-mode nm 830 to 870 -
Switching threshold of optical power dB 5 5

difference
Range of the alarm threshold for the optical dB 3 to 8 3 to 8

power difference
a: TN12DCP board has no multi-mode optical module.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
DCP 6.8 7.5

9.13.2 OLP Specifications

Table 9-152 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 8800
Interfa Item Unit Value
ce
TN11OLPa TN12OLP01b TN12OLP03b
TI-TO1 Insertio single dB - ≤4 ≤4

TI-TO2 n loss at mode
the
transmit multimo dB ≤4.5 - -
end de
RI1-RO Insertio single dB - ≤1.5 ≤1.5

RI2-RO n loss at mode
the
receive multimo dB ≤2 - -
end de
Range of the input single dBm - -35 to 7 -30 to 23

optical power mode
multimo dBm -35 to 0 - -

de
Operating single nm - 1270 to 1350, 1270 to 1350,

wavelength range mode 1528 to 1567 1528 to 1567
multimo nm 830 to 870 - -

de
Switching threshold of optical dB 5 5 5

power difference
Range of the alarm threshold dB 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8

for the optical power difference
a: TN11OLP has no single mode optical module.

b: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.

Table 9-153 Optical specifications of the OLP board on the OptiX OSN 6800 and OptiX OSN
3800
Interfa Item Unit Value
ce
TN11OLP TN12OLP01a TN12OLP03a
TI-TO1 Insertio single dB ≤4 ≤4 ≤4

TI-TO2 n loss at mode
the
transmit multimo dB ≤4.5 - -
end de
RI1-RO Insertio single dB ≤1.5 ≤1.5 ≤1.5

RI2-RO n loss at mode
the
receive multimo dB ≤2 - -
end de
Range of the input single dBm -35 to 7 -35 to 7 -30 to 23

optical power mode
multimo dBm -35 to 0 - -

de
Operating single nm 1270 to 1270 to 1350, 1270 to 1350,

wavelength range mode 1350, 1528 to 1567 1528 to 1567
1528 to 1567
multimo nm 830 to 870 - -

de
Switching threshold of optical dB 5 5 5

power difference
Range of the alarm threshold dB 3 to 8 3 to 8 3 to 8

for the optical power difference
a: TN12OLP has no multimode optical module.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Weight
l TN11OLP: 0.9 kg (1.98 lb.)
l TN12OLP: 1.0 kg (2.20 lb.)

Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11OLP 6.0 6.6
TN12OLP 4.0 4.5
9.13.3 SCS Specifications

Table 9-154 lists the optical specifications of the SCS board.
Table 9-154 Optical specifications of the SCS board

TI1-TO11 Splitting Single-mode dB ≤4

TI1-TO12 insertion loss
Multi-mode dB ≤4.5
TI2-TO21
TI2-TO22
RI11-RO1 Coupling Single-mode dB ≤4

RI12-RO1 insertion loss
Multi-mode dB ≤4.5
RI21-RO2
RI22-RO2
Operating wavelength range Single-mode nm 1270 to 1350, 1528 to

1567
Multi-mode nm 830 to 870
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))

Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
SCS 0.2 0.3
9.14 Spectrum Analyzer Unit Specifications
9.14.1 MCA4 Specifications

Table 9-155 lists the optical specifications of the MCA4 board.
Table 9-155 Optical specifications of the MCA4 board

Item Unit Value
Detect range for single channel optical power dBm -30 to -10
Detect accuracy for optical power dB ±1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range dB ±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)
for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm ±0.1
Numbers of optical interface pcs 4
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MCA4 8.0 8.5

9.14.2 MCA8 Specifications

Table 9-156 lists the optical specifications of the MCA8 board.
Table 9-156 Optical specifications of the MCA8 board
Item Unit Value
Detect accuracy for optical power dBm ±1.5
Detect accuracy for OSNR (The detect range dB ±1.5 (OSNR: 13 to 19)
for signal-to-noise ratio is 13 dB to 23 dB, and ±2 (OSNR: 19 to 23)
the wavelength spacing is 50 GHz.)
Detect accuracy for central wavelength nm ±0.1
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
MCA8 12.0 13.0
9.14.3 OPM8 Specifications

Table 9-157 lists the optical specifications of the OPM8 board.

Table 9-157 Optical specifications of the OPM8 board
Item Unit Value
Detected accuracy for optical power dB ±1.5
Channel spacing GHz 50/100
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11OPM8 12 15
9.14.4 WMU Specifications

Table 9-158 Optical specifications of the WMU board
Item Unit Value
Adjacent channel spacing GHz 50/100
Per-channel input optical power range dBm -36 to -16
Detect accuracy for central wavelength GHz <2.5
Detect accuracy for single channel optical dB <2

power
Detect range for Central wavelength offset GHz -10 to 10

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
Board Optical Module Typical Power Maximum Power
Type Consumption at Consumption at
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11WMU - 12 15
9.15 Variable Optical Attenuator Unit Specifications
9.15.1 VA1 Specifications

TN11VA1 Optical Specifications

Table 9-159 lists the optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board.
Table 9-159 Optical specifications of the TN11VA1 board
Item Unit Value
IN-OUT Inherent insertion loss dB ≤1.5
Dynamic attenuation dB 20
range

Item Unit Value
range

Item Unit Value
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation≤10dB)

1.5 (attenuation≤15dB)
1.8 (attenuation>15dB)
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
VA1 - 6.5 7.2
9.15.2 VA4 Specifications



Item Unit Value
range


Item Unit Value
IN-OUT Inherent insertion dB ≤1.5

loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation range
Adjustment accuracy dB 1 (attenuation≤10 dB)

1.5 (attenuation≤15 dB)
1.8 (attenuation>15 dB)
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
VA4 - 8.5 9.4
9.16 Optical Power and Dispersion Slope Equalizing Board

Specifications
9.16.1 GFU Board Specifications

Table 9-163 Optical specifications of the GFU board
Item Unit Value
Channel insertion loss dB 0.5-6.0
Polarization dependent loss dB ≤0.5

in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight: 2.0 lb. (0.9 kg)
Power Consumption
l Typical power consumption at 25°C (77°F): 0.2 W
l Maximum power consumption at 55°C (131°F): 0.3 W
9.16.2 DCU Specifications

Table 9-164 Optical specifications of the DCU board (1)

Item Unit Value
DC DC DC DC DC DC D DCU0
U0 U0 U0 U0 U0 U06 CU 8
1 2 3 4 5 07
Typical dispersion km 20 40 60 80 100 120 5 10

compensation distance
Maximum insertion loss dB 3.3 4.7 6.4 8 9 9.8 2.3 2.8
Dispersion compensation - 90%-110%

slope
Polarization mode ps 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.8 0.3 0.3
dispersion
Polarization-dependent dB 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1 0.1

loss
Maximum input power a dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20 20 20
Operating wavelength nm 1528-1568

range
Dispersion compensating - G.652 fiber

fiber type
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.

Table 9-165 Optical specifications of the DCU board (2)

Item Unit Value
DCU DCU DCU DCU DCU1 DCU1

11 12 13 14 5 6
Typical dispersion km 20 40 60 80 100 120

compensation distance
Maximum insertion loss dB 4 5 5.9 6.9 7.8 8.8
Dispersion compensation - 90%-110%

slope
Polarization mode ps 0.4 0.5 0.7 0.8 0.9 1.0

dispersion
Polarization-dependent dB 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3 0.3

loss
Maximum input power a dBm 20 20 20 20 20 20
Operating wavelength nm 1528-1568

range
Dispersion compensating - G.655 fiber

fiber type
a: The maximum input power refers to the maximum input optical power permitted by the
optical module on the condition that the optical module is not damaged.
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
l Weight: 1.5 kg (3.3 lb)
Power Consumption
25°C (77°F) (W) 55°C (131°F) (W)
TN11DCU – 0.2 0.3
9.16.3 TDC Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, laser safety level, mechanical specifications and
power consumption.

Table 9-166 lists the optical specifications of the TDC board.
Table 9-166 Optical specifications of the TDC board

Parameter Unit Value
Optical channels - 80
Dispersion tuning range ps/nm ±400
Dispersion tuning resolution sec <15
Input power range dBm -13 to 0
Dispersion accuracy ps/nm ±10
Output optical power dBm The output optical power should

be close to the input power, with
an error range of ±1.5 dB.
The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows:
in. (D) x 10.4 in. (H))
Power Consumption
F) (W) (131°F) (W)
TN11TDC 13 15
9.17 DCM Specifications

Table 9-167 Table 4-16 Performance requirements for C-band dispersion compensation optical
fibers (G.652 fibers)
DCM Distance Max. DSC PMD PD Max. Operatin

Module (mi./km) Inserti R (ps) L Allowed g
on Loss (dB Powera Wavelen
(dB) ) (dBm) gth (nm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2.3 90% 0.3 0.1 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(T) 6.2/10 2.8 110% 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(B) 24.8/40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 8 0.7 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 9 0.8 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 9.8 0.8 0.1 20
FBG-DCM 49.7/80 4 1.0 0.2 23

(80)
FBG-DCM 62.1/100 4 1.0 0.2 23

(100)
FBG-DCM 74.5/120 4 1.0 0.2 23

(120)
FBG-DCM 99.4/160 8 1.6 0.4 23

(160)
FBG-DCM 124.2/200 8 1.6 0.4 23

(200)
FBG-DCM 149.1/240 8 1.6 0.4 23

(240)
a: The Max. Allowed Power refers to the maximum input optical power that the optical module
can receive without being damaged.
fibers (G.655 LEAF fibers)

DCM(A) 12.4/20 4 90% 0.4 0.3 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(B) 24.8/40 5 110% 0.5 0.3 20


DCM(C) 37.3/60 5.9 0.7 0.3 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 6.9 0.8 0.3 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 7.8 0.9 0.3 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 8.8 1.0 0.3 20
FBG-DCM 74.5/120 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(120)
FBG-DCM 99.4/160 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(160)
FBG-DCM 124.2/200 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(200)
FBG-DCM 149.1/240 3.7 1.0 0.2 23

(240)
fibers (G.653 fibers)
DCM Distance Max. DSC PMD PDL Max. Opera
Module (mi./km) Insert R (ps) (dB) Allowe ting
ion d Wavel
Loss Powera ength
(dB) (dBm) (nm)
DCM(S) 3.1/5 2 90% 0.2 0.1 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(T) 6.2/10 3 110% 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 12.4/20 5 0.5 0.1 20

fibers (TW-RS fibers)
DCM Module Distance Max. DSC PMD PDL Max. Opera
(mi./km) Insert R (ps) (dB) Allowe ting
ion d Wavel
Loss Powera ength
(dB) (dBm) (nm)
DCM(A) 12.4/20 2.3 90% 0.3 0.1 20 1528 to

to 1568
DCM(B) 24.8/40 2.8 110% 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(C) 37.3/60 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(D) 49.7/80 3.8 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(E) 62.1/100 4.2 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(F) 74.5/120 4.7 0.5 0.1 20

Product Description 10 Energy Saving and Sustainable Development
10 Energy Saving and Sustainable

Development
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN 8800 complies with the standards of ROHS/WEEE 2002/96/CE and 2002/95/
CE.
10.1 Sustainable Development

The OptiX OSN 8800 equipment is designed according to the requirement of sustainable
development. All parts and packages of the equipment are identified in standard for recycle.
10.2 Energy Conservation and Emission Reduction
The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the control and monitoring of dynamic energy conservation.

10.1 Sustainable Development

The OptiX OSN 8800 equipment is designed according to the requirement of sustainable
development. All parts and packages of the equipment are identified in standard for recycle.
l In the aspect of packaging design, the OptiX OSN 8800 not only provides the necessary
packaging, but also guarantees that the volume of the package containing the equipment
and the accessories is at most three times the size of the net equipment.
l The product is also designed for convenient unpacking. All hazardous substances contained
in packaging decompose easily.
l Every single mechanical plastic part of over 25 g is labeled according to the standards of
ISO 11469 and ISO 1043-1 to ISO 1043-4. All components and packages of the equipment
are provided with standard labels for recycling.
l Plugs and connectors are easily found, and can be operated with ordinary tools.
l The stickers on the equipment like labels can be removed easily. Some identifying
information like silkscreen is printed on the front panels or subracks.
10.2 Energy Conservation and Emission Reduction

The OptiX OSN 8800 supports the control and monitoring of dynamic energy conservation.
Static Energy Conservation

The following measures for energy conservation are taken during designing of the OptiX OSN
8800:
l Power consumption is reduced by improving the process for manufacturing chips.
l Efficient secondary power modules are used.
l 10G optical modules are normalized to XFP modules.
Dynamic Energy Conservation

Board energy conservation (power down) design:
l Idle ports are power-saving. On the U2000, after Idle Ports is set to Enable Power
Saving, the ports which are not configured with services on the service board are in power-
saving state. That is, a port in power-saving state consumes no power.
l Idle cross-connect bus is power-saving. When the cross-connections bus on a cross-
connection board are idle, they are in power-saving state. That is, the cross-connect board
with idle cross-connections bus consumes no power.
l Standby cross-connect board is referred to as warm standby after Standby Cross-Connect
Board is set to Warm Standby on the U2000. In the warm standby state, the standby cross-
connect board is power-saving state when the active cross-connect board works normally.
When the active cross-connect board is faulty, the standby cross-connect is started quickly
and enters hot standby state.
l Idle boards are power-saving. On the U2000, after Idle Boards is set to Enable Power
Saving, the boards which are not configured with services are in power-saving state. That
is, a port in power-saving state consumes no power.

l Idle lower order cross-connection boards are power-saving. On the U2000, after Idle
Lower Order Cross-Connection Boards is set to Enable Power Saving, the lower order
cross-connection boards which are not used are in power-saving state. That is, a port in
power-saving state consumes no power.
l Idle channels are power-saving. That is, in the case of the board that supports access of
multiple services, for example, the TN52NQ2, TN52TDX, and TN52TQX boards, the idle
channels of the board consume no power. The method to set a channel as idle channel is
as follows.
– The idle optical modules are in power-saving state. No power is consumed in this state.
– The idle channels are in Unused state. No power is consumed in this state.
– The idle logic processing module and the idle encapsulation/decapsulation module do
not consume power.
Heat dissipation design: The OptiX OSN 8800 provides two modes of fan speed adjustment:
Adjustable Speed Mode and Auto Speed Mode. In Auto Speed Mode, the speeds of the fans
in different partitions are adjusted separately and steplessly according to the board temperatures
of the partitions. The speed of the fans in the low-temperature partition is automatically adjusted
to a low level for energy conservation. In Adjustable Speed Mode, the fan speed can be set to
sixfivelevels: Stop, Low Speed, Mid-Low Speed, Medium Speed, Mid-High Speed, and High
Speedfour levels: Stop, Low Speed, Medium Speed, and High Speed. For details about the
fan speed adjustment scheme, see the "Fan Area" in the Hardware Description.
Control and Monitoring of Energy Conservation

The U2000 controls and monitors the status of energy conservation.
l The Nominal Power Consumption(W) of an NE, Current Power Consumption(W) of
an NE, Nominal Power Consumption(W) of a board, and Current Power Consumption
(W) of a board can be queried.
l The power consumption of each NE on the network can be queried. That is, the Nominal
Power Consumption(W), Current Power Consumption(W), Mean Power Saved(W),
and Power Saved In a Year(kWh) of each NE can be queried.

Product Description A Equipment Specifications and Environment Requirements
A Equipment Specifications and

Environment Requirements
Equipment specifications and environment requirements include: performance specifications

for optical interfaces, power supply requirements, electromagnetic compatibility and
environment requirement.
A.1 Performance Specifications for Optical Interfaces

A.2 Power Supply Requirements
A.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility
A.4 Environment Requirement

A.1 Performance Specifications for Optical Interfaces

SDH optical interfaces: ITU-T G.691-compliant and ITU-T G.957-compliant
SONET optical interfaces: GR-253-CORE, GR-1377-CORE and ANSI T1.105
OTN optical interfaces: ITU-T G.709 and ITU-T G.959.1
10GE optical interfaces: IEEE 802.3ae-compliant
GE optical interfaces: IEEE 802.3z-compliant
ESCON optical interfaces: ANSI X3.296, ANSI X3.230-compliant
FC optical interfaces: ANSI X3.303, ANSI X3.230-compliant
Optical fiber connector: LC/PC, LSH/APC
Laser security: In compliance with ITU-T G.664 (with ALS function).
All interfaces on the equipment are provided with dust caps.
A.2 Power Supply Requirements

The DC power supply is provided with double backup. If a single power supply fails, the services
operated by the equipment are not affected and there is an alarm of single power cut.
DC input voltage: -48 V/-60 V DC
Voltage range: -40 V to -72.0 V DC
The working grounding and protection grounding of the equipment are totally separated.
A.3 Electromagnetic Compatibility

The system is in compliance with ETS 300 386, including:
Radiated Emission: EN55022
Conducted Emission: EN55022
Electrostatic Discharge: IEC61000-4-2
Conducted Sensitivity: IEC61000-4-6
Electrical Fast Transient/Burst: IEC61000-4-4
Radiated Sensitivity: IEC61000-4-3
Surge: IEC61000-4-5
Voltage Dips and Short Interruption: IEC61000-4-29
A.4 Environment Requirement

Environment requirement includes the requirement on storage, transport, and operation.
A.4.1 Storage Environment

The storage environment complies with ETSI EN 300 019-1-1 and NEBS GR-63-CORE.
Climate Environment
Table A-1 Requirements on climate environment

Item Range
Altitude ≤ 5000 m (16404 ft.)
Air pressure 70 kPa to 106 kPa
Temperature -40°C (-104°F) to +70°C (+158°F)
Temperature change rate ≤ 1°C /min
Relative humidity 5% to 95%
Solar radiation ≤ 1120 W/s2
Heat radiation ≤ 600 W/s2
Wind speed ≤ 30 m/s
Waterproof Requirement
l Equipment storage requirements at the customer site: Generally the equipment is stored
indoors.
l Ensure that there is no water on the floor and no water enters the packing boxes of the
equipment. The equipment should not be stored in places where there is a possibility of
leakage. Ensure that the equipment is not placed near the auto fire-fighting and heating
facilities.
l If you need to store the equipment outdoors, ensure that the following conditions are met:
– The packing boxes must be intact.
– Rainproof measures must be taken to prevent rainwater from entering the packing boxes.
– Ensure that there is no water on the ground where the packing boxes are stored so that
water does not enter into the packing boxes.
– The packing boxes must not be directly exposed to the sun.
Biologic Environment
l Ensure that there is no fungus on the equipment, such as epiphyte and mildew.
l Ensure that the room is rodent-free.
Clarity of Air

l Ensure that the equipment room is free from explosive, conductive, magnetic conductive
or corrosive dust.
l Ensure that the density of mechanically active substance meets the requirements listed in
Table A-2.
l Ensure that the density of chemical active substance meets the requirements listed in Table
A-3.
Table A-2 Requirements on the density of mechanically active substance
Mechanically Active Substance Content
Suspending dust ≤ 5.00 mg/m3
Deposited dust ≤ 20.0 mg/m2 •h
Sand ≤ 300 mg/m3
Table A-3 Requirements on the density of chemically active substance
Chemical Active Substance Content
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
CI2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCI ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Table A-4 Requirements on mechanical stress
Item Sub-item Range
Sinusoidal vibration Displacement ≤ 7.0 mm –

(0.28 in.)
Acceleration – ≤ 20.0 m/s2
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz

Item Sub-item Range
Non-steady impact Impact response spectrum II ≤ 250 m/s2
Static load ≤ 5 kPa

NOTE
Impact response spectrum: the curve of the maximum acceleration response generated by the equipment
under the stipulated impact motivation. Impact response spectrum II indicates that the duration of semi-
sinusoidal impact spectrum is 6 ms.
Static load: The pressure from upside that the equipment with package can endure when the equipment
is piled according to stipulation.
A.4.2 Transport Environment

The transport environment complies with ETSI EN 300 019-1-2 and NEBS GR-63-CORE.
Climate Environment
Table A-5 Requirements on climate environment
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 5000 m (16404 ft.)
Temperature -40°C (-104°F) to +70°C (+158°F)
Temperature change rate ≤ 3°C /min
Relative humidity 10% to 100%
Waterproof Requirement
The following conditions should be met during the transportation:
l The packing boxes are intact.
l Necessary rainproof measures should be taken for the means of transport to prevent
rainwater from entering the packing boxes.
l There is no water in the means of transportation.

l Avoiding the reproduction of animalcule, such as epiphyte, mildew.

l Getting rid of rodent (such as mice).
Clarity of Air
l No explosive, conductive, magnetic conductive and corrosive dust.
l The density of mechanically active substance complies with the requirements of Table
A-6.
l The density of chemical active substance complies with the requirements of Table A-7.
Suspending dust No requirement
Deposited dust ≤ 3.0 mg/m2•h
Sand ≤ 100 mg/m3
Table A-7 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance
SO2 ≤ 0.30 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
NO2 ≤ 0.50 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 1.00 mg/m3
CI2 ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HCI ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress
Item Sub-item Range
Sinusoidal Displacement ≤ 7.5 mm – –

vibration (0.3 in.)

Item Sub-item Range
Acceleration – ≤ 20.0 m/s2 ≤ 40.0 m/s2
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 200 Hz to

Hz 500 Hz
Random vibration Acceleration spectrum 10 m2/s3 3 m2/s3 1 m2/s3

density
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 200 Hz to

Hz 500 Hz
Non-steady impact Impact response ≤ 300 m/s2

spectrum II
Static load ≤ 10 kPa

NOTE
under the stipulated impact motivation. Impact response spectrum II indicates the duration of semi-
sinusoidal impact spectrum is 6ms.
Static load: The pressure from upside, that the equipment with package can endure when the equipment
A.4.3 Operation Environment

The product needs to be installed indoors and the surrounding temperature should be maintained
around 25°C.
The operation environment complies with ETSI EN 300 019-1-3 and NEBS GR-63-CORE.
Climate Environment
Table A-9 Requirements on temperature and humidity
Cabinet Subrack Temperature Relative Humidity

Temperature
- Long-Term Short-Term Long-Term Short-Term

Operation Operation Operation Operation
-5°C (23 °F) to 5°C (41 °F) to -5°C (23 °F) to 10% to 90% 5% to 95%
45°C (113 °F) 45°C (113 °F) 55°C (131 °F)
NOTE
Testing point of product temperature and humidity: when the cabinet of the product has no protection board
in the front and at the back, the value is tested 1.5 meters above the floor and 0.4 meter in front of the
cabinet.
Short-term working condition means that the successive working time does not exceed 96 hours and the
accumulated time every year does not exceed 15 days.

Table A-10 Other requirements on climate environment
Item Range
Altitude ≤ 4000 m (13123 ft.)
Temperature change rate ≤ 5°C /h
l Ensure that there is no fungus on the equipment, such as epiphyte and mildew.
l Ensure that the room is rodent-free.
Clarity of Air
l Ensure that the equipment room is free from explosive, conductive, magnetic conductive,
or corrosive dust.
l Ensure that the density of mechanically active substance meets the requirements listed in
Table A-11.
l Ensure that the density of chemical active substance meets the requirements listed in Table
A-12.
Dust particle ≤ 3 x 105 particle/m3
Suspending dust ≤ 0.4 mg/m3
Deposited dust ≤ 15 mg/m2*h
Sand ≤ 100 mg/m3
Table A-12 Requirements on the density of chemical active substance
SO2 ≤ 0.20 mg/m3
H2S ≤ 0.006 mg/m3
NH3 ≤ 0.05 mg/m3

CI2 ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
HCI ≤ 0.10 mg/m3
HF ≤ 0.01 mg/m3
O3 ≤ 0.005 mg/m33
CO ≤ 5.0 mg/m3
Mechanical Stress

Item Sub-item Range
Sinusoidal vibration Displacement ≤ 3.5mm (0.14 –

in.)
Acceleration – ≤ 10.0 m/s2
Frequency range 2 Hz to 9 Hz 9 Hz to 200 Hz
Non-steady impact Impact response ≤ 100 m/s2

spectrum II
Static load 0
NOTE
under the stipulated impact motivation. Impact response spectrum II indicates the duration of semi-
sinusoidal impact spectrum is 6ms.
Static load: The pressure from upside, that the equipment with package can endure when the equipment

Product Description B Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid Slots of Boards
B Power Consumption, Weight, and Valid

Slots of Boards
This chapter describes the power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards used in the
OptiX OSN 8800 T16 system.
The power consumption, weight, and valid slots of the boards for the OptiX OSN 8800 T16
system are shown in Table B-1. The values listed in the following table indicate the power
consumption of the boards when they normally work at 25°C and 55°C.
Table B-1 Power consumption, weight and valid slots of the OptiX OSN 8800 T16 boards
Board Module Typical Maximum Weight (kg/ Number of Valid Slots
Type Power Power lb.) Occupied
Consumpti Consumpti Slots
on at 25°C on at 55°C
(W) (W)
TN16AUX - 16.5 19.2 0.6/1.32 2 IU21, IU22
TN16ATE - 0.2 0.3 0.5/1.1 1 IU24
TN11CMR2 - 0.2 0.3 0.8/1.8 1 IU1-IU18
TN11CMR4 - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1-IU18
TN11CRPC0 - 110.0 121.0 4.0/8.8 - Installed

1 outside
TN11CRPC0 - 70.0 77.0 4.2/9.2 - Installed

3 outside
TN11D40 - 10.0 13.0 2.2/4.8 3 IU1-IU6,

IU11-IU16
TN12D40 - 10.0 13.0 2.0/4.4 2 IU1-IU7,

IU11-IU17
TN11DAS1 - 22 28.6 1.4/3.1 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18


(W) (W)
TN12DCP - 6.8 7.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN11DCU - 0.2 0.3 1.5/3.3 1 IU1-IU18
TN16EFI - 2.0 2.5 0.5/1.1 1 IU19
TN54ENQ2 - 40.0 44.0 0.9/2.0 1 IU1, IU5,

IU11, IU15
TN12FIU - 4.2 4.6 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN13FIU - 0.2 0.3 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN11GFU - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1-IU18
TN11HBA - 47.0 75.0 3/6.6 3 IU2-IU7,

IU12-IU17
TN11HSC1 - 8.0 8.8 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN11ITL - 0.2 0.3 1.2/2.6 1 IU1-IU18
TN12ITL - 10 11.5 1.2/2.6 1 IU1-IU18
TN12LDX 800 ps/nm-C 44.5 51.2 1.6/3.5 1 IU1-IU18

Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 45.5 52.2

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
TN11LEM24 - 81.0 83.0 1.0/2.2 2 IU1-IU7,

IU11-IU17
TN11LEX4 - 64.0 67.0 0.7/1.5 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18


(W) (W)
TN11LOA 800 ps/nm-C 31.8 36 1.19/2.64 1 IU1-IU8,

Band (Odd & IU11-IU18
Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 32.8 37

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/s 31.8 36
Multirate -
10km
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
40km
TN12LOG 800 ps/nm-C 37.0 41.44 1.2/2.6 1 IU1-IU8,

Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 38.0 42.44

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 41.61 46.6

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN


(W) (W)
800 ps/nm-C 43.04 48.0

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
10Gbit/s 37.0 41.44

Multirate -
10km
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
40km
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
80km
TN12LOM a 800 ps/nm-C 61.8 69.2 1.1/2.4 1 IU1-IU18

Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 62.8 70.2

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 64.8 72.6

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C 66.7 75.0

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN


(W) (W)
TN11LSQ 800 ps/nm-C 75.0 82.0 2.5/5.5 2 IU2-IU8,

Band- IU12-IU18
Tunable
Wavelength-
ODB-PIN
800 ps/nm-C 82.0 89.0

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
TN13LSX 800 ps/nm-C 27.0 30.4 1.1/2.4 2 IU1-IU18

Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 28.0 31.4

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 29.4 32.8

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C 29.5 33.9

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
TN12LWXS - 33.9 37.3 1.1/2.4 1 IU1-IU18
TN11M40 - 10.0 13.0 2.2/4.8 3 IU1-IU6,

IU11-IU16
TN12M40 - 10.0 13.0 2.0/4.4 2 IU1-IU7,

IU11-IU17


(W) (W)
TN11M40V - 20.0 25.0 2.3/5.1 3 IU1-IU6,

IU11-IU16
TN12M40V - 16.0 26.0 2.3/5.1 2 IU1-IU7,

IU11-IU17
TN11MCA4 - 8.0 8.5 1.9/4.2 2 IU1-IU7,

IU11-IU17
TN11MCA8 - 12.0 13.0 1.9/4.2 2 IU1-IU7,

IU11-IU17
TN11MR2 - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1-IU18
TN11MR4 - 0.2 0.3 0.9/2.0 1 IU1-IU18
TN11MR8V - 7.7 8.6 1.0/2.2 2 IU1-IU7,

IU11-IU17
TN52ND2 800 ps/nm-C 70.5 77.5 1.4/3.1 1 IU1-IU8,

Band- IU11-IU18
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C 67.8 74.6

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
TN53ND2 800 ps/nm-C 25 28 1.2/2.6 1 IU1-IU8,

Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP


(W) (W)
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
10km
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
40km
TN54NPO2 - 134.0 147.0 1.9/4.2 2 IU3, IU7,

IU13, IU17
TN55NPO2 - 143.0 157.3 1.7/3.6 2 IU3, IU7,

IU13, IU17
TN55NPO2E - 143.0 157.3 1.7/3.6 2 IU3, IU7,

IU13, IU17
TN53NQ2 800 ps/nm-C 46.5 50 1.6/3.5 1 IU1-IU8,

Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
10km
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
40km
800 ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
TN54NQ2 800 ps/nm-C 53 58.3 1.6/3.5 1 IU1-IU8,

Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP


(W) (W)
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
10km
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
40km
800 ps/nm-C
Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
TN53NS2 800 ps/nm-C 20 24 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU8,

Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 21 25
Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
10Gbit/s 20 24
Multirate -
10km
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
40km
TN54NS3 800 ps/nm-C 73.0 80.0 1.8/3.96 1 IU1-IU8,

Band- IU11-IU18
Tunable
Wavelength-
DQPSK-PIN
800 ps/nm-C 60.0 65.0

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
ODB-PIN


(W) (W)
TN12OAU10 - 11.0 14.0 1.8/3.96 2 IU2-IU8,

0 IU12-IU18
TN12OAU10 - 12.0 15.0 1.8/3.96 2 IU2-IU8,

1 IU12-IU18
TN12OAU10 - 10.0 13.0 1.8/3.96 2 IU2-IU8,

2 IU12-IU18
TN12OAU10 - 12.0 15.0 1.8/3.96 2 IU2-IU8,

3 IU12-IU18
TN12OAU10 - 15.0 21.0 1.8/3.96 2 IU2-IU8,

5 IU12-IU18
TN13OAU10 - 12.0 15.0 1.6/3.6 1 IU1-IU18

1
TN13OAU10 - 12.0 15.0 1.6/3.6 1 IU1-IU18

3
TN13OAU10 - 15.0 21.0 1.6/3.6 1 IU1-IU18

5
TN12OBU10 - 10.0 11.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1-IU18

1
TN12OBU1P - 10.0 11.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1-IU18

1
TN12OBU10 - 10.0 12.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1-IU18

3
TN12OBU10 - 10.0 12.0 1.1/2.4 1 IU1-IU18

4
TN12OBU20 - 14.0 19.0 1.6/3.6 2 IU2-IU8,

5 IU12-IU18
TN12OLP - 4.0 4.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN11OPM8 - 12.0 15.0 1.2/2.6 1 IU1-IU18
TN16PIU - 3 3.6 0.65/1.4 1 IU20, IU23
TN11RDU9 - 6 6.6 1.1/2.4 1 IU1-IU18
TN11RMU9 - 8.2 9 1.1/2.4 1 IU1-IU18

02
TN12SC1 - 11.0 14.9 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18


(W) (W)
TN12SC2 - 13.5 14.5 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN16SCC - 32 35 1.3/2.8 1 IU9, IU10
TN11SCS - 0.2 0.3 0.8/1.76 1 IU1-IU18
TN11SFIU01 - 0.2 0.3 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN11ST2 - 17.5 19.5 0.95/2.09 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN11TDC - 13 15 1.1/2.4 1 IU1-IU18
TN52TDX - 57.3 63.0 1.4/3.1 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN53TDX - 25 35.0 1.5/3.3 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN54THA - 35.0 40.0 1.5/3.3 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN12TMX 800 ps/nm-C 39.0 43.7 1.2/2.6 1 IU1-IU18

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C 41.0 45.5

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
DRZ-PIN
800 ps/nm-C 31.4 36.1

Band (Odd &
Even
Wavelengths
)-Fixed
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP
800 ps/nm-C 32.4 37.1

Band-
Tunable
Wavelength-
NRZ-PIN-
XFP


(W) (W)
10Gbit/s 31.4 36.1

Multirate -
10km
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
40km
10Gbit/s
Multirate -
80km
TN54TOA - 23.0 25.0 0.7/1.6 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN52TOG - 41.8 46.0 0.85/1.87 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN52TOM - 81.0 89.1 1.5/3.3 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN52TQX - 91.5 100.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN53TQX - 45.0 50.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN55TQX - 45.0 50.0 1.6/3.5 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN53TSXL - 75.0 83.0 1.4/3.1 1 IU1-IU8,

IU11-IU18
TN12VA1 - 6.5 7.2 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN12VA4 - 8.5 9.4 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN11WMU - 12.0 15.0 1.0/2.2 1 IU1-IU18
TN13WSD9 - 25.4 28.5 2.9/6.4 3 IU1-IU6,

IU11-IU16
TN13WSM9 - 25.4 28.5 2.9/6.4 3 IU1-IU6,

IU11-IU16
TN12WSMD - 12.0 15.0 2.6/5.7 2 IU1-IU7,

4 IU11-IU17
TN11WSMD - 25 30 3.1/6.8 2 IU1-IU7,

9 IU11-IU17


(W) (W)
TN16XCH - 73.0-1.4*(16- 88.8-1.4*(16- 1.8/4.0 1 IU9, IU10

n) n)
a: When the FC extension function of the TN12LOM board is used, the power consumption of the board increases
by another 2 W.

Product Description C Standards Compliance
C Standards Compliance
The product complies with related standards and regulations.
C.1 ITU-T Standards

C.2 IEEE Standards
C.3 Laser Security Standards
C.4 Security Standards
C.5 EMC Standards
C.6 Environment Related Standards
C.7 Grounding Standards
C.8 Noise Standard
C.9 Fireproofing Standards
C.10 International Standards

C.1 ITU-T Standards

Recommendations on Architectures
Code Name
ITU-T G.803 Architectures of transport networks based on the Synchronous

Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.841 Types and characteristics of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.842 Interworking of SDH network protection architectures
ITU-T G.871 Framework for optical transport network Recommendations
ITU-T G.872 Architecture of optical transport networks
Recommendations on Physical-Layer Features

Code Name
ITU-T Rec.G.692 Optical interfaces for multichannel systems with optical amplifiers
ITU-T Rec.G.694.1 Spectral grids for WDM applications: DWDM frequency grid
ITU-T Rec.G.694.2 Spectral grids for WDM applications: CWDM frequency grid
ITU-T Rec.G.696.1 Intra-Domain DWDM applications
ITU-T Rec.G.703 Physical/electrical characteristic of hierarchical digital interfaces
ITU-T G.957 Optical interfaces of equipments and systems relating to the

synchronous digital hierarchy
ITU-T G.691 Optical interfaces for single channel STM-64 and other SDH
systems with optical amplifiers
ITU-T G.693 Optical interfaces for intra-office systems
ITU-T G.697 Optical monitoring for DWDM systems
ITU-T G.698.2 Amplified multichannel DWDM applications with single channel

optical interfaces
ITU-T G.671 Transmission characteristics of optical components and

subsystems
ITU-T G.959.1 Optical transport network physical layer interfaces
ITU-T G.661 Definition and test methods for the relevant generic parameters of
optical amplifier devices and subsystems
ITU-T G.662 Generic characteristics of optical amplifier devices and subsystems

Code Name
ITU-T G.663 Application related aspects of optical amplifier devices and sub-
systems
ITU-T G.664 Optical safety procedures and requirements for optical transport
systems
ITU-T G.665 Generic Characteristics of Raman Amplifiers and Raman

Amplified Subsystems
Recommendations on Structures and Mappings

Code Name
ITU-T G.702 Digital hierarchy bit rates
ITU-T G.704 Synchronous frame structures used at 1544,6312,2048,8448 and

44736 kbit/s hierarchical levels
ITU-T Rec.G.707 Network node interface for the synchronous digital hierarchy
(SDH)
ITU-T Rec.G.709 Interfaces for the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
ITU-T Rec.G.7041/Y. Generic Framing Procedure (GFP)

1303
Recommendations on Equipment Functions and Features

Code Name
ITU-T G.783 Characteristics of Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

equipment functional blocks
ITU-T G.798 Characteristics of optical transport network hierarchy equipment

functional blocks
ITU-T G.8011 Ethernet over Transport - Ethernet services framework
ITU-T G.8011.1 Ethernet private line service
ITU-T G.8011.2 Ethernet virtual private line service
ITU-T G.813 Timing characteristics of SDH equipment slave clocks (SEC)
ITU-T G.975 Forward error correction for submarine systems
ITU-T G.975.1 Forward error correction for high bit rate DWDM submarine
systems
ITU-T Rec.G.781 Synchronization layer functions

Code Name
ITU-T Rec.G.811 Timing characteristics of primary reference clocks
ITU-T Rec.Q.812 Protocol profile for electronic communications interactive agent
ITU-T Rec.M.2120 International multi-operator paths,sections and transmission

systems fault detection and localization procedures
Recommendations on Network Protection

Code Name
ITU-T G.772 Protected monitoring points provided on digital transmission

systems
ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344 Ethernet Ring Protection Switching
ITU-T G.808.1 Generic protection switching–Linear trail and subnetwork

protection
ITU-T G.873.1 Optical Transport Network (OTN): Linear protection
Recommendations on Jitter and Performance

Code Name
ITU-T G.823 The control of jitter and wander within digital networks which are
based on the 2048 kbit/s hierarchy
based on the 1544 kbit/s hierarchy
based on the Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.826 Error performance parameters and objectives for

international,constant bit rate digital paths at or above the primary
rate
ITU-T M.2401 Error performance limits and procedures for bringing-into-service

and maintenance of multi operator international paths and sections
within an optical transport network
ITU-T G.8201 Error performance parameters and objectives for multi-operator

international paths within the Optical Transport Network (OTN)
ITU-T G.8261/Y.1361 Timing and synchronization aspects in Packet Networks
ITU-T G.8262/Y.1362 Timing characteristics of synchronous Ethernet equipment slave

clock

Code Name
ITU-T Rec.G.828 Error performance parameters and objectives for international,

constant bit rate synchronous digital paths
ITU-T Rec.G.829 Error performance events for SDH multiplex and regenerator
sections
ITU-T Rec.G.8251 The control of jitter and wander within the optical transport
network (OTN)
Recommendations on Equipment Management

Code Name
ITU-T G.7710 Equipment Management Function (EMF) requirements that are

common to multiple transport technologies
ITU-T G.773 Protocol suites for Q-interfaces for management of transmission

systems
ITU-T Rec.G.774.1 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Bidirectional performance

monitoring for the network element view
ITU-T Rec.G.774.2 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Configuration of the payload

structure for the network element view
ITU-T Rec.G.774.3 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of multiplex-

section protection for the network element view
ITU-T Rec.G.774.4 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of the

subnetwork connection protection for the network element view
ITU-T Rec.G.774.5 Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) Management of connection

supervision functionality (HCS/LCS) for the network element
view
ITU-T Rec.G.775 Loss of Signal (LOS),Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) and Remote
Defect Indication (RDI) defect detection and clearance criteria for
PDH signals
ITU-T G.784 Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) management
ITU-T G.831 Management capabilities of transport networks based on the

Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)
ITU-T G.870/Y.1352 Terms and definitions for Optical Transport Networks (OTN)
ITU-T G.874 Management aspects of the optical transport network element
ITU-T G.875 Optical transport network (OTN) management information model

for the network element view
ITU-T M.3010 Principles for a telecommunication management network

Code Name
ITU-T Rec.Q.811 Lower layer protocol profiles for the Q3 and X interfaces
ITU-T Rec.X.721 Information Technology - Open Systems Interconnection -

Structure of Management Information: Definition of Management
Information
C.2 IEEE Standards

Standar Description
d
IEEE Media Access Control (MAC) Bridges

802.1d
IEEE Virtual bridged local area networks

802.1q
IEEE Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks Amendment 4: Provider Bridges, QinQ
802.1ad
IEEE Virtual Bridged Local Area Networks — Amendment 5: Connectivity Fault

802.1ag Management
IEEE LAN Layer 2 QoS/CoS Protocol for Traffic Prioritization

802.1p
IEEE Multiple Spanning Trees

802.1s
IEEE Std Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) access
802.3 method and physical layer specification
IEEE Media Access Control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, repeater and
802.3z management parameters for 1000 Mb/s operation
IEEE Media Access Control (MAC) parameters, physical Layer, and management
802.3ae parameters for 10Gb/s operation
IEEE IEEE Standard for a Precision Clock Synchronization Protocol for Networked
1588v2 Measurement and Control Systems
C.3 Laser Security Standards

Standard Description
IEC 60825-1 Safety of laser products-Part 1: Equipment classification, requirements

and user's guide

IEC 60825-2 Safety of laser products-Part 2: Safety of optical fiber communication

systems
C.4 Security Standards

IEC 60215 Safety requirements for radio transmitting equipment
EN 60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment. Including Electrical

Business Equipment
IEC 60950-1 Safety of Information Technology Equipment. Including Electrical

Business Equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including Electrical

No 60950-1 Business Equipment
UL 60950-1 3rd edition Safety of Information Technology Equipment Including

Electrical Business Equipment
IEC Publication Guide on the effects of current passing through the human body
479-1
IS 8437 {1993} Guide on the effects of current passing through the human body
IS 13252 {1993} Safety of information technology equipment including electrical

business equipment
C.5 EMC Standards
IEC Publication Testing and measurement techniques of electrostatic discharge

1000-4-2 immunity test
IEC Publication Radiated RF electromagnetic field immunity test

1000-4-3
IEC Publication Testing and measurement techniques of electrical fast transients/burst

1000-4-4 immunity test
IEC Publication Immunity to conducted disturbances

1000-4-6
Information technology equipment-Radio disturbance characteristics-

EN 55022 Limits and methods of measurement

EN 55024 Information technology equipment-Immunity characteristics-Limits

and methods of measurement
IEC 61000-4-2 Testing and measurement techniques -Electrostatic discharge

immunity test
IEC 61000-4-3 Testing and measurement techniques –Radiated, radio-frequency,

electromagnetic field immunity test
IEC 61000-4-4 Testing and measurement techniques –Electrical fast transient/burst

immunity test
IEC 61000-4-5 Testing and measurement techniques –Surge immunity test
IEC 61000-4-6 Testing and measurement techniques –Immunity to conducted

disturbances, induced by radio-frequency fields
IEC 61000-4-11 Testing and measurement techniques –Voltage dips, short

interruptions and voltage variations immunity tests
IEC 61000-4-29 Testing and measurement techniques –Voltage dips, short

interruptions
ETSI EN 300 386 Electromagnetic compatibility and Radio spectrum Matters (ERM);
Telecommunication network equipment; Electro Magnetic
Compatibility (EMC) requirements
GR-1089-CORE Electromagnetic compatibility and electrical safety - generic criteria

for network telecommunications equipment
C.6 Environment Related Standards

ETSI EN 300 Class 1.1: weather-protected, partly temperature-controlled storage

019-1-1 locations
Class 1.2: weather-protected, not temperature-controlled storage
locations
ETSI EN 300 Class 2.2: Careful transportation

019-1-2
ETSI EN 300 Class 3.2 Partly temperature-controlled location

019-1-3:
NEBS GR-63- Network Equipment-Building System (NEBS) Requirements:

CORE Physical Protection
RoHS Restriction of the use of certain hazardous substance in electrical and

electronic equipment

The equipment complies with ROHS standards and the materials used for each component are
listed as follows.
Table C-1 Main materials used in the product

Percentage (Based on RoHS
Part Material Weight (kg) Product Weight) Substance
Cabinet Fe 56 38.4% No
AL 3 2.1% No
Cu 2 1.3% No
ABS 3 2.1% Deca-BDE
Other material 2 1.3% No
Subrack Fe 12.5 8.6% No
ABS 0.4 0.26% Deca-BDE
AL 0.3 0.21%
Zn 0.2 0.13% No
Cable Typical 15 10.3% No

configuration
(power cable,
ground cable,
alarm cable,
management cable
and clock cable)
Other 1.5kg/m - No
configuration
(Weight for each
meter)
Fiber Typical 6.5 4.4% No

configuration (10-
meter fiber x 58)
Boards Fully 45.0 30.9% Pb (in solder)

configuration (25
boards,
components
included)
Total Typical 145.9 100% -

configuration

C.7 Grounding Standards

Grounding Description
Standard
ETS 300 253 Earthing and bonding of telecommunication equipment in

telecommunication centers
GR 1089 CORE Electromagnetic Compatibility and Electrical Safety - Generic Criteria

for Network Telecommunications Equipment
C.8 Noise Standard

Noise Standard Description
ETS 300 753 Acoustic noise emitted by telecommunications equipment
The equipment is compliant with the ETSI 300 753 class3.2, and the nominal acoustic power of
the equipment is equal to or lower than 7.2 bels in the attended telecommunication equipment
room.
C.9 Fireproofing Standards

Fireproofing Description
Standard
EN 60950 (Europe) Safety of information technology equipment
ANSI/UL 60950 Safety of information technology equipment
CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. Audio, video and similar electronic equipment

950-95 (North America)
IEC 60950 Safety of information technology equipment

(International)
73/23/EEC (Europe) Low Voltage Directive
C.10 International Standards

IEC 61291-1 Optical amplifiers - Part 4: Multichannel Applications Performance

specification Template
CAN/CSA-C22.2 Audio, video and similar electronic equipment

No 1-M94
73/23/EEC Low Voltage Directive
IEC 529 Classification of degrees of protection provided by enclosures (IP

Code)
SMPTE 259M Television ---- SDTV1 Digital Signal/Data ---- Serial Digital Interface
SMPTE 424M Television ---- 3 Gb/s Signal/Data Serial Interface
SMPTE 292M Television ---- Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition

Television Systems
CENELEC EN Cable networks for television signals, sound signals and interactive
50083-9 services - Part 9: Interfaces for CATV/SMATV headends and similar
professional equipment for DVB/MPEG-2 transport streams
ISO 9314 Fiber Distributed Data Interface (FDDI)
ETS 300 119 European telecommunication standard for equipment practice

Product Description D Glossary
D Glossary
A
Alarm A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an
emergency has occurred. See also Event.
C
Channel The trail at the channel layer.
Configure To set the basic parameters of an operation object.
Connection A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional connections"
capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between their
respective inputs and outputs.
CWDM Coarse Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology for transmitting signals at
multiple wavelengths through the same fiber with wide spacing between optical
channels. Typical spacing is several nanometers or more.
D
DWDM Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing. The technology utilizes the characteristics of
broad bandwidth and low attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple
wavelengths with specific frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels
to transmit simultaneously in the same fiber.
E
EDFA Erbium Coped Fiber Amplifier. An optical device that amplifies the optical signals. The
device uses a short length of optical fiber doped with the rare-earth element Erbium and
the energy level jump of Erbium ions activated by pump sources. When the amplifier
passes the external light source pump, it amplifies the optical signals in a specific
wavelength range.

F
Flow An aggregation of packets that have the same characteristics. On the U2000 or NE
software, flow is a group of classification rules. On boards, it is a group of packets that
have the same quality of service (QoS) operation. At present, two flows are supported:
port flow and port+VLAN flow. Port flow is based on port ID and port+VLAN flow is
based on port ID and VLAN ID. The two flows cannot coexist in the same port.
Forward error A data encoding technology. It is a method to control errors in communication. In this
correction method, extra (redundant) bits are inserted into the data stream towards other equipment
to control errors. The equipment at the receive end can use these redundant bits to detect
errors and correct errors if possible.
Frame A cyclic set of consecutive time slots in which the relative position of each time slot can
be identified.
I
Input jitter tolerance For STS-N electrical interfaces input jitter tolerance is the maximum amplitude of
sinusoidal jitter at a given jitter frequency, which when modulating the signal at an
equipment input port, results in no more than two errored seconds cumulative, where
these errored seconds are integrated over successive 30 second measurement intervals.
IP address The only address in the TCP/IP protocol that is used to identify the communication port.
The IP address consists of four bytes in the decimal format, for example, 129.9.161.55.
IP over DCC The IP Over DCC follows TCP/IP telecommunications standards and controls the remote
NEs through the Internet. The IP Over DCC means that the IP over DCC uses overhead
DCC byte (the default is D1-D3) for communication.
IPA Intelligent Power Adjustment. The technology that the system reduces the optical power
of all the amplifiers in an adjacent regeneration section in the upstream to a safety level
if the system detects the loss of optical signals on the link. The loss of optical signals
may due to the fiber is broken, the performance of equipment trend to be inferior or the
connector is not plugged well. Thus, the maintenance engineers are not hurt by the laser
being sent out from the slice of broken fiber.
J
Jitter The short-term non-cumulative variations of the significant instants of a digital signal
from their ideal positions in time.
L
Laser The device that generates the directional light covering a narrow range of wavelengths.
Laser light is more coherent than ordinary light. Semiconductor diode lasers are the used
light source in fiber-optic system.
Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically
as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer
of its characteristic information.

M
MAN Metropolitan Area Network. A network where the computer resources in a geographic
region are connected. The coverage of a MAN is larger than the coverage of a local area
network (LAN) but smaller than the coverage of a wide area network (WAN).
N
NE A network unit, including the hardware and software. Normally a network unit has at
least one SCC board, which manages and monitors the entire network unit. NE software
runs on the SCC board.
O
OSNR Optical Signal-to-Noise Ratio. Ratio of the optical power of the transmitted optical signal
to the noise on the received signal.
OTU Optical Transponder Unit. A device or subsystem that converts the accessed client signals
into the G.694.1/G.694.2-compliant WDM wavelength.
T
TCP/IP One of the key protocols in the Internal protocol suite. The hosts that connect to each
other through the TCP protocol can create connection between each other and exchange
data. The TCP protocol ensures that the data can be transmitted from the transmitter to
the receiver in a reliable and orderly manner. The TCP can also distinguish data for the
concurrent applications on the same host.
Trail A type of transport entity, mainly engaged in transferring signal from the input of the
trail source to the output of the trail sink, and monitoring the integrality of the transferred
signal.


Manual Do Produto

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Manual Do Produto

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 Intelligent Optical Transport

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Version

OptiX OSN 8800 T16 V100R006C01

iManager U2000 V100R005C00

iManager U2000 Web LCT V100R005C00

This document is intended for:

l Network Planning Engineer

Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not

Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement

Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles

> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">"

Updates in Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Based on Product Version

4.1 System System Architecture is modified.

2.3.1 Service Types of Access Services is modified.

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-10-31) Based on Product Version

4.1 System System Architecture is modified.

5.4 Protection Equipment Level Protection is modified.

5.7 OTN l ODUflex is modified.

Updates in Issue 01 (2011-07-30) Based on Product Version

1 Overview Overview is added.

4.2.1 Cabinet Cabinet is modified.

5.7 OTN Added the descriptions of ODUflex and OTN Technologies.

4.2.3.1 Function Added the descriptions of TN13OAU101, TN13OAU103,

9 Technical Added the descriptions of TN13OAU101, TN13OAU103,

Whole manual The structure of the contents is adjusted.

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Updates in Issue 03 (2011-09-15) Based on Product Version

4.2.1 Cabinet Cabinet is modified.

Introduction Introduction to PID IPA is added.

Whole manual The structure of the contents is adjusted.

Updates in Issue 02 (2011-04-15) Based on Product Version

4.2.3.1 Function Added the descriptions of THA and TOA boards.

4.2.3.3 Tributary Added the descriptions of TN53TQX, TN54THA and TN54TOA

9 Technical Added the descriptions of TN12OBU1P1, TN53TQX, TN54THA

B Power Added the descriptions of TN12OBU1P1, TN54TOA, TN54THA

Whole manual Deleted the descriptions of TN11BMD4, TN11BMD8, TN12PTQX,

Updates in Issue 01 (2010-12-31) Based on Product Version

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

3 Networking and Applications..................................................................................................10

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

4.2.2.4 Power Consumption.......................................................................................................................43

5 Functions and Features...............................................................................................................71

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

5.4.1.2 SCC Board 1+1 Protection.............................................................................................................91

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

5.8.13 Jitter Suppression Function.................................................................................................................125

6 NE Type and Signal Flow........................................................................................................155

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

7 About the ASON........................................................................................................................185

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

7.5.12 Service Migration................................................................................................................................229

8 Operation, Administration, and Maintenance.....................................................................247

Issue 03 (2012-03-29) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

9.3.8 LSX Specifications................................................................................................................................320